Ir75w SM

iR75W
REVISION 0
OCT. 2000 FY8-13GX-000

COPYRIGHT© 2000 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR75W REV.0 OCT. 2000 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Application
This manual has been issued by Canon Inc. for qualified persons to learn technical
theory, installation, maintenance, and repair of products. This manual covers all
localities where the products are sold. For this reason, there may be information in this
manual that does not apply to your locality.
Corrections
This manual may contain technical inaccuracies or typographical errors due to
improvements or changes in products. When changes occur in applicable products or in
the contents of this manual, Canon will release technical information as the need arises.
In the event of major changes in the contents of this manual over a long or short period,
Canon will issue a new edition of this manual.
The following paragraph does not apply to any countries where such provisions are
inconsistent with local law.
Trademarks
The product names and company names used in this manual are the registered
trademarks of the individual companies.
Copyright
This manual is copyrighted with all rights reserved. Under the copyright laws, this
manual may not be copied, reproduced or translated into another language, in whole or
in part, without the written consent of Canon Inc.
COPYRIGHT © 2000 CANON INC.

Printed in Japan
Imprimé au Japon
Caution
Use of this manual should be strictly supervised to avoid disclosure of confidential information.
INTRODUCTION
1 Symbols Used
This documentation uses the following symbols to indicate special information:
Symbol Description
Indicates an item of a non-specific nature, possibly classified as Note, Caution,

or Warning.
Indicates an item requiring care to avoid electric shocks.
Indicates an item requiring care to avoid combustion (fire).
Indicates an item prohibiting disassembly to avoid electric shocks or problems.
Indicates an item requiring disconnection of the power plug from the electric
outlet.
Indicates an item intended to provide notes assisting the understanding of the

topic in question.
Memo
Indicates an item of reference assisting the understanding of the topic in ques-

REF. tion.
Provides a description of a service mode.
Provides a description of the nature of an error indication.
Refers to the Copier Basics Series for a better understanding of the contents.
COPYRIGHT© 2000 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR75W REV.0 OCT. 2000 i
INTRODUCTION
About Trademarks
LASER SHOT and TypeWing are registered trademarks of Canon Inc.

Canon, Canon logo, LBP, LIPS, NetSpot, and Flash Buddy are trademarks of Canon Inc.
MS-DOS, Microsoft, and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in
the US and in other countries.
Unix is an operating system developed and licensed by AT&T Corp.
PC-9800 Series, PC-PR201/80A, and N5200 Series are trademarks of NEC, Inc.
ESC/P is a trademark of Seiko Epson Corporation.
IBM, PS/55 Series, and OS/2 are trademarks of International Business Machines Corpora-
tion.
FMR Series and FM TOWNS Series are trademarks of Fujitsu Limited.
B16 Series, B32 Series, and 2020 Series are trademarks of Hitachi, Ltd.
HP and HP-7475A are trademarks of Hewlett-Packard Company.
LocalTalk and Macintosh are trademarks of Apple Commuter, Inc.
DEC is a trademark of Digital Equipment Corporation.
Diablo is a trademark of Xerox Corporation.
PostScript is a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
The following fonts are licensed by Bitstream Inc.:

Swiss 721, Swiss 721 Oblique, Swiss 721 Bold, Swiss 721 Bold Oblique, Dutch 801 Ro-
man, Dutch 801 Italic, Dutch 801 Bold, Dutch 801 Bold Ialic, Symbol, FixedPitch 810 Cou-
rier 10Pitch/Text, FixedPitch810 Courier Oblique 10Pitch/Text, FixedPitch 810 Courier
Bold 10Pitch/Text, FixedPitch 810 Courier Bold Oblique 10Pitch/Text,
Century 702, Century Schoolbook, Century 702, CenturySchoolbookItalic,
Century 702, CenturySchoolbookBold, Century 702, CenturySchoolbookBoldItalic, Swiss
721 Narrow, Swiss 721 Narrow Oblique, Swiss 721 Narrow Bold, Swiss 721 Narrow
BoldOblique,
ZapfCalligraphic 801, ZapfCalligraphic801Italic, ZapfCalligraphic 801Bold,
ZapfCalligraphic 801BoldItalic,
Geometric 711 ITC Avant Garde Gothic Book, Geometric 711 ITC Avant Garde Gothic
Book Oblique, Geometric 711 ITC Avant Garde Gothic Demi, Geometric 711 ITC Avant
Garde Gothic Demi Oblique, Revial 711 ITC Bookman Light, Revial 711 ITC Bookman
Light Italic, Revial 711 ITC Bookman Demi, Revial 711 ITC Bookman Demi Italic, Chan-
cery 801 ITC Zapf Chancery Medium Italic and ITC Zapf Dingbats
The following fonts are trademarks of International Typeface Corporation:

ITC Avant Garde Gothic, ITC Bookman, ITC Zapf Chancery, and ITC Zapf Dingbats
In addition to the above, all names of companies and trade names or trademarks in this
document are tradenames or trademarks (or registered tradenames or trademarks) of their
respective companies.
ii COPYRIGHT© 2000 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR75W REV.0 OCT. 2000
INTRODUCTION
2 Outline of the Manual

This Service Manual is compiled for iR75W Series machines, which are capable of
double-sided copying.
This manual provides basic facts and figures needed to service the machine in the field
thereby ensuring the machine’s product quality and functions.
This manual consists of the following chapters:
Chapter 1 General Description: features, specifications, names of parts, and

copying processes
Chapter 2 Basic Operations: outlines of steps used to make copies
Chapter 3 Original Exposure: principles of operations involved in original
exposure, timing of operations, disassembly/
assembly, adjustments, units
Chapter 4 Image Processing: principles of operations involved in original
exposure, timing of operations, disassembly/
assembly, adjustments, units
Chapter 5 Image Formation: principles of operations involved in image for-
mation, timing of operations, disassembly/as-
sembly, adjustments, units
Chapter 6 Pickup/Feed: principles of operations involved in pickup/
feed, timing of operations, disassembly/assem-
bly, adjustments, units
Chapter 7 Fixing: principles of operations involved in fixing,
timing of operations, disassembly/assembly,
adjustments, units
Chapter 8 Externals/Auxiliary Controls:externals, principles of operations involved in
auxiliary controls, timing of operations, disas-
sembly/assembly, adjustments, units
Chapter 9 Installation: requirements and procedures of installation,
procedures of machine relocation and installa-
tion of accessories
Chapter 10 Maintenance/Inspection: table of periodically replaced parts, table of
consumables and durables, scheduled servic-
ing chart
Chapter 11 Troubleshooting: standards, adjustments, arrangement of electri-
cal components, and service mode
Chapter 12 Self Diagnosis: troubleshooting using self diagnostic functions
Appendix: general timing chart, general circuit diagram
COPYRIGHT© 2000 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR75W REV.0 OCT. 2000 iii
INTRODUCTION
This Service Manual uses the following conventions:

1. Each chapter provides outlines of functions in relation to electrical and mechanical
systems involved, and the descriptions cover the timing at which each component is
operated.
In the diagram, indicates a path of mechanical drive, while given
with a signal name indicates the flow of an electric signal.
The expression “turn on the power” refers to turning on the power switch, closing the
front door, or closing the delivery door, ultimately supplying the machine with
power.
2. In explaining the machine’s digital circuits, the level of voltage is expressed as being
‘1’ when high or ‘0’ when low. The actual level of voltage, however, differs from cir-
cuit to circuit.
The machine uses CPUs; however, since their internal mechanisms cannot be
checked in the field, this manual omits explanation of their operations.
As a rule, PCBs are not to be repaired in the field, and this manual limits the explana-
tions of the PCBs to providing general descriptions with block diagrams. The de-
scriptions cover either “from sensors to control functions or the inputs of PCBs pos-
sessing drive functions” or “from the outputs of PCBs possessing drive functions to
loads.” Block diagrams by function are given as needed.
The descriptions in the manual are subject to change to accommodate improvements
or the like made to the product. Major changes will be communicated in the form of
Service Information bulletins.
All service persons are expected to go through this Service Manual and the aforemen-
tioned bulletins and acquire a thorough understanding of the machine, thereby equipping
himself/herself with the skill and the ability to identify faults in the machine and, ultimately,
maintaining the quality and the functions of the machine.
iv COPYRIGHT© 2000 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR75W REV.0 OCT. 2000
INTRODUCTION
System Configuration
An iR75W Series machine may be configured as follows:
[2]
[9]
[3]
[1]
[7]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[10]
[8]
F00-000-01
[1] Copyboard cover (option) [7] Copy Data Controller-A1 or Remote

[2] DADF-F1 (option) Diagnostic Device II (option)
[3] Document Tray-G1 (option) [8] Duplex unit
[4] Copy Tray-E1 (option) [9] Expansion memory (option)
[5] Stapler Sorter-M1 (option) [10] Power cord
[6] Control Card V (option)
COPYRIGHT© 2000 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR75W REV.0 OCT. 2000 v
INTRODUCTION
Points to Note When Turning Off the Main Power Switch
Be sure to turn off the main power switch and disconnect the power plug before starting
to disassemble the machine.
Main power switch
ON
l OFF
Leakage
breaker
Main power lamp
F00-000-02
Leakage Breaker
If a service call is made because the leakage breaker is off and, therefore, the machine
cannot be turned on, go through the following:
1. Make a check on electrical continuity: i.e., a short between primary and ground or a
short between primary terminals.
2. When checking for electrical continuity, keep in mind that you may have to remove
units or covers to look for wire biting.
3. If any unit is found to be faulty, replace the unit.
4. When the machine is free from a fault, turn on the leakage breaker.
5. When the machine has warmed up normally, check to see if the leakage breaker is nor-
mal (using the test button).
6. If the AC unit is found to be free of a fault, contact the Service Department of the Sales
Company with information about the operating environment; specifically, model name,
conditions at the site (as noted when the power shut down), weather (thunder, etc.),
source of noise in the vicinity.
Warning: Do not turn on the leakage breaker without first checking the AC power sup-
ply. Otherwise, the existing fault can lead to a serious accident (activation of
the indoor leakage breaker; electric shock, smoking, flaming).
vi COPYRIGHT© 2000 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR75W REV.0 OCT. 2000
INTRODUCTION
Pinots to Note When Connecting Pickup/Delivery Accessories

• Connect the DADF-F1 connector to [1].
• Connect the connector of the Stapler Sorter-M1 at [2].
Be sure to turn off the machine's main power switch before connecting or removing any
of the units.
[1]
[2]
F00-000-03
[1] for DADF-F1

[2] for stapler Sorter-M1
COPYRIGHT© 2000 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR75W REV.0 OCT. 2000 vii
CONTENTS
Contents
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
1 Features ............................................... 1-1 4 Using the Machine ............................ 1-12
2 Specifications ...................................... 1-2 4.1 Turning On the Power Switch .. 1-12
2.1 Type ............................................ 1-2 4.2 Control Panel ........................... 1-13
2.2 Method ....................................... 1-2 4.3 Extension Mode ....................... 1-14
2.3 Functions .................................... 1-3 4.4 List of User Modes .................. 1-15
2.4 Others ......................................... 1-5 5 Routine Maintenance by the User .... 1-18
2.5 Default Ratios ............................ 1-6 6 Safety ................................................ 1-19
2.6 Copying Speed ........................... 1-6 6.1 Safety of Toner ......................... 1-19
3 Names of Part ..................................... 1-8 7 Image Formation ............................... 1-20
3.1 External View ............................. 1-8 7.1 Outline ..................................... 1-20
3.2 Cross Section ........................... 1-10
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATIONS

1 Basic Operations ................................. 2-1 1.4 Main Motor (M1) Control
1.1 Functional Construction ............ 2-1 Circuit ........................................ 2-9
1.1.1 Scanner Function ................. 2-1 1.4.1 Outline ................................. 2-9
1.1.2 Printer Functions ................. 2-1 1.5 Feed Motor (M3) Control
1.2 Outline of the Electrical Circuit ...................................... 2-11
Circuitry ..................................... 2-2 1.5.1 Outline ............................... 2-11
1.3 Basic Sequence of Operations ... 2-4 1.6 Inputs to and Outputs from
1.3.1 Outline ................................. 2-4 the Major PCBs ........................ 2-13
1.3.2 Basic Sequence of Operations 1.6.1 Inputs to the Major
in Direct Copying ................ 2-5 PCBs .................................. 2-14
1.3.3 Basic Sequence of Operations 1.6.2 Outputs from the Major
for Memory Copying ........... 2-7 PCBs .................................. 2-23
CHAPTER 3 ORIGINAL EXPOSURE

1 Outline of Operations ......................... 3-1 3.3 Turning On and Off the Scanning
1.1 Outline ....................................... 3-1 Lamp .......................................... 3-5
1.2 Basic Sequence of Operations of 3.4 Detecting an Error ...................... 3-5
the Original Exposure System ... 3-2 4 Identifying the Sizes of Originals ....... 3-6
2 Scanner Drive System ......................... 3-3 4.1 Outline ....................................... 3-6
3 Turning On and Off the Scanning 4.2 Identification by Reflection-
Lamp ................................................... 3-4 Type Sensors .............................. 3-6
3.1 Outline ....................................... 3-4 4.3 Detection by the Feeder .............. 3-9
3.2 Pre-Heating the Scanning 5 Disassembly/Assembly ..................... 3-10
Lamp .......................................... 3-5
viii COPYRIGHT© 2000 CANON INC. 2000 2000 CANON iR70W/iR75W REV.0 OCT. 2000
CONTENTS
5.1 Removing the Copyboard 5.14 Replacing the Slider A ............. 3-33
Glass ......................................... 3-11 5.15 Replacing the Slider B ............. 3-33
5.2 Replacing the Motor/Belt ........ 3-12 5.16 Replacing the Original Size
5.3 Replacing the Scanning Lamp Sensor ....................................... 3-33
Unit .......................................... 3-14 5.17 Replacing the Scanner Home
5.4 Replacing the Scanning Position Sensor ........................ 3-34
Lamp/Lamp Heater ................... 3-16 5.18 Replacing the Lamp Carrier
5.5 Preparing for the Replacement Cable ........................................ 3-35
of the No. 1 Mirror Base 6 Making Adjustments ......................... 3-36
(front of the machine) .............. 3-18 6.1 Making Orthogonal
5.6 Preparing for the Replacement Adjustments ............................. 3-36
of the No. 1 Mirror Base 6.1.1 Definition of the
(rear of the machine) ................ 3-20 Orthogonal Level ............... 3-37
5.7 Replacing the No. 1 Mirror 6.1.2 Adjusting the Orthogonal
Base .......................................... 3-22 Level .................................. 3-38
5.8 Replacing the No. 2 Mirror 6.2 Adjusting the Reproduction
Base .......................................... 3-24 Ratio ......................................... 3-40
5.9 Replacing the Scanner Cable 6.2.1 Adjusting the
Pulley ....................................... 3-26 Reproduction Ratio in
5.10 Replacing the Scanner Cable ... 3-27 Main Scanning Direction ... 3-40
5.11 Replacing the Carrier Relay 6.2.2 Adjusting the Reproduction
PCB .......................................... 3-31 Ratio in Sub Scanning
5.12 Replacing the Lamp Relay Direction ............................ 3-40
PCB 1 ....................................... 3-32 6.3 Adjusting the Image Read
5.13 Replacing the Lamp Relay Start Position ............................ 3-40
PCB 2 ....................................... 3-32
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE PROCESSING

1 Outline ................................................ 4-1 4.3 Edge Emphasis ........................... 4-6
2 CCD Unit ............................................ 4-2 4.4 Density Processing ..................... 4-7
2.1 Outline ....................................... 4-2 4.5 Dither Processing ....................... 4-8
2.2 CCD ........................................... 4-2 4.6 Error Diffusion ........................... 4-8
2.3 Linking the CCDs ...................... 4-2 4.7 Image Memory Control ............. 4-9
3 Image Processing PCB ....................... 4-3 5 Disassembly/Assembly ..................... 4-10
3.1 Outline ....................................... 4-3 5.1 CCD Unit ................................. 4-11
3.2 Control ....................................... 4-3 5.2 Scanner Control PCB ............... 4-12
3.3 Shading Correction .................... 4-4 5.3 Image Processing PCB ............ 4-13
3.4 Background Correction .............. 4-5 5.4 Fan ........................................... 4-13
3.5 CCD Seam Correction ............... 4-5 5.5 Additional Memory ................. 4-14
3.6 Enlargement/Reduction 5.5.1 Installing Additional
Processing .................................. 4-5 Memory ............................. 4-14
4 Scanner Control PCB ......................... 4-6 5.5.2 Removing the Additional
4.1 Outline ....................................... 4-6 Memory ............................. 4-15
4.2 Smoothing .................................. 4-6
COPYRIGHT© 2000 CANON INC. 2000 2000 CANON iR70W/iR75W REV.0 OCT. 2000 ix
CONTENTS
CHAPTER 5 IMAGE FORMATION

1 Outline of Processes ........................... 5-1 6 LED Exposure ................................... 5-17
1.1 Outline ....................................... 5-1 6.1 Outline ...................................... 5-17
1.2 Basic Sequence of Operations ... 5-2 7 Disassembly/Assembly ..................... 5-18
2 Primary Charging Assembly ............... 5-3 7.1 Process Unit ............................. 5-19
2.1 Outline ....................................... 5-3 7.2 Developing Assembly .............. 5-21
2.2 Operations .................................. 5-3 7.2.1 Removing the Developing
2.3 Checking the Operations ............ 5-4 Assembly ........................... 5-21
2.4 Cleaning Mechanism for the 7.2.2 Mounting the Developing
Primary Charging Wire .............. 5-5 Assembly ........................... 5-23
2.4.1 Outline ................................. 5-5 7.2.3 Toner Level Sensor ............ 5-25
3 Transfer Charging Assembly .............. 5-6 7.2.4 Toner Bottle Set Sensor ..... 5-25
3.1 Outline ....................................... 5-6 7.2.5 Toner Supply Motor .......... 5-26
3.2 Operations .................................. 5-7 7.2.6 Scraper ............................... 5-27
3.3 Checking the Operations ............ 5-7 7.2.7 Developing Cylinder .......... 5-28
4 Separation Charging Assembly .......... 5-8 7.2.8 Removing the Toner .......... 5-30
4.1 Outline ....................................... 5-8 7.2.9 Removing the Supply
4.2 Operations .................................. 5-8 Roller and the Roller
4.3 Checking the Operations ............ 5-8 Blade .................................. 5-31
4.4 Separation Auxiliary Exposure .. 5-9 7.2.10 Replacing the Stickers ........ 5-33
5 Developing Assembly ....................... 5-10 7.3 Photosensitive Drum ................ 5-35
5.1 Outline ..................................... 5-10 7.3.1 Cleaning ............................. 5-36
5.2 Controlling the Developing 7.4 Primary Charging Assembly .... 5-37
Bias .......................................... 5-11 7.4.1 Removing the Primary
5.2.1 Outline ............................... 5-11 Charging Assembly ............ 5-37
5.2.2 Functions of the 7.4.2 Replacing the Primary
Developing Biases ............. 5-13 Charging Wire .................... 5-37
5.3 Developing Bias Control 7.4.3 Primary Charging Wire
Circuit ...................................... 5-14 Cleaning Motor .................. 5-39
5.3.1 Outline ............................... 5-14 7.5 Transfer/Separation Charging
5.3.2 Developing Bias Control Assembly ................................. 5-40
Circuit ................................ 5-14 7.5.1 Removing the Transfer/
5.3.3 Operations .......................... 5-14 Charging Assembly ............ 5-40
5.3.4 Checking the Operations ... 5-15 7.5.2 Replacing the Transfer/
5.4 Developing Assembly Separation Charging
Locking Mechanism ................. 5-15 Wire ................................... 5-40
5.5 Controlling the Supply of 7.6 Main Motor .............................. 5-42
Toner ........................................ 5-16 7.7 Developing Assembly
5.5.1 Outline ............................... 5-16 Push-On Motor ........................ 5-43
5.5.2 Absence of Toner ............... 5-16 7.8 LED Exposure Unit ................. 5-43
5.5.3 Resetting
(toner absent) ..................... 5-16
x COPYRIGHT© 2000 CANON INC. 2000 2000 CANON iR70W/iR75W REV.0 OCT. 2000
CONTENTS
CHAPTER 6 PICKUP/FEED
1 Outline of Operations ......................... 6-1 1.10.2 Type of Jams ...................... 6-40
1.1 Outline ....................................... 6-1 1.10.3 Sequence of Operations ..... 6-41
1.2 Basic Operations of Pickup from 1.10.4 Jam History ........................ 6-45
the Cassette ................................ 6-5 2 Disassembly/Assembly ..................... 6-46
1.2.1 Pickup Operations ............... 6-5 2.1 Pickup Assembly ..................... 6-47
1.2.2 Basic Sequence of 2.1.1 Removing the Pickup
Operations ............................ 6-8 Unit .................................... 6-47
1.2.3 Operation of the Cassette 2.1.2 Removing the Pickup
Lifter .................................... 6-9 Clutch ................................ 6-48
1.2.4 Pickup from the Cassette ... 6-11 2.1.3 Removing the Pickup/
1.3 Standby Operations Feed Roller ......................... 6-48
(non-pickup) ............................ 6-17 2.1.4 Removing the Separation
1.3.1 Moving Down the Pickup Roller ................................. 6-48
Roller/Moving Up the Lifter 2.1.5 Removing the Pickup
(sliding in the cassette) ...... 6-17 Roller DOWN Solenoid ..... 6-49
1.4 Detecting the Level of Paper .... 6-18 2.1.6 Removing the Separation
1.5 Identifying the Size of Paper ... 6-19 Roller Locking Solenoid .... 6-49
1.5.1 Outline ............................... 6-19 2.1.7 Removing the Lifter
1.5.2 Cassette Size Detecting Motor ................................. 6-50
Switch and Paper Sizes ...... 6-20 2.1.8 Removing the Sensors ....... 6-51
1.5.3 Paper Width and 2.1.9 Removing the Paper Level
Paper Length ...................... 6-21 Sensor ................................ 6-53
1.5.4 Cassette Sizes .................... 6-22 2.2 Feeding Assembly .................... 6-54
1.6 Multifeeder ............................... 6-23 2.2.1 Removing the Inside Feed
1.6.1 Outline ............................... 6-23 Unit .................................... 6-54
1.6.2 Adjusting the Manual Feed 2.2.2 Removing the Separation
Paper Width Sensor Sensor ................................ 6-57
(VR1) ................................. 6-24 2.2.3 Removing the Separation
1.6.3 Sequence of Operations Blower ............................... 6-57
(multifeeder; A4, 2.2.4 Removing the Feed Belt .... 6-58
2 copies) ............................. 6-26 2.3 Registration Roller Assembly .. 6-60
1.6.4 Manual Feed Reversing 2.3.1 Removing the Sensor
Roller Pressure Reducing and the Roller ..................... 6-60
Solenoid ............................. 6-27 2.3.2 Removing the Reversing
1.7 Making Overlay Copies ........... 6-29 Roller ................................. 6-61
1.8 Making Double-Sided Copies . 6-29 2.3.3 Removing the
1.8.1 Outline ............................... 6-29 Multifeeder ........................ 6-61
1.8.2 Sequence of Operations 2.3.4 Removing the Registration
(double-sided copying) ...... 6-30 Unit .................................... 6-63
1.8.3 Trough-Path Operations .... 6-31 2.3.5 Removing the Sensors and
1.9 Delivery Assembly ................... 6-37 Clutches ............................. 6-64
1.9.1 Outline ............................... 6-37 2.3.6 Removing the Multifeeder
1.10 Detecting Jams ......................... 6-39 Paper Sensor ...................... 6-65
1.10.1 Outline ............................... 6-39
COPYRIGHT© 2000 CANON INC. 2000 2000 CANON iR70W/iR75W REV.0 OCT. 2000 xi
CONTENTS
2.3.7Removing the Manual Feed 2.6.2 Removing the Motor Driver

Pickup Roller DOWN PCB .................................... 6-79
Solenoid ............................. 6-66 2.6.3 Removing the Actuator ...... 6-80
2.4 Delivery Assembly ................... 6-68 2.6.4 Removing the Stationary
2.4.1 Removing the Delivery Paper Sensor ...................... 6-81
Cover ................................. 6-68 2.6.5 Removing the Duplex
2.4.2 Replacing the Cover Feed Motor ........................ 6-81
Sheet (1) ............................. 6-69 2.6.6 Removing the Path
2.4.3 Replacing the Static Flapper ............................... 6-83
Eliminating Brush .............. 6-69 2.6.7 Removing the Paper End
2.4.4 Replacing the Cover Sensor ................................ 6-83
Sheet (2) ............................. 6-70 2.7 Pickup Assembly Duplex
2.4.5 Removing the Deliver Outlet Relay Unit ..................... 6-84
Flapper Solenoid ................ 6-70 2.7.1 Removing the Duplex
2.4.6 Removing the Sensor ......... 6-72 Outlet Relay Unit ............... 6-84
2.5 Feed Motor Base ...................... 6-76 2.7.2 Removing the Counter Roller
2.5.1 Removing the Motor Locking Solenoid .............. 6-84
Base ................................... 6-76 2.7.3 Removing the Pickup
2.6 Duplex Unit .............................. 6-79 Sensor ................................ 6-85
2.6.1 Removing the Duplex 2.7.4 Removing the Vertical
Unit .................................... 6-79 Feed Sensor ....................... 6-86
CHAPTER 7 FIXING
1 Outline of Operations ......................... 7-1 2.1.5 Removing the Lower
1.1 Outline ....................................... 7-1 Separation Claw
1.2 Controlling the Fixing Assembly ........................... 7-16
Temperature ............................... 7-3 2.1.6 Removing the Upper
1.2.1 Outline ................................. 7-3 Separation Claw
1.2.2 Controlling the Assembly ........................... 7-17
Temperature ......................... 7-4 2.1.7 Removing the Cleaning
1.2.3 Power Save Mode ................ 7-5 Roller ................................. 7-18
1.3 Protective Mechanisms for the 2.1.8 Fine-Tuning the Position
Fixing System ............................ 7-6 of the Upper Separation
2 Disassembly/Assembly ....................... 7-8 Claws ................................. 7-18
2.1 Fixing Assembly ........................ 7-9 2.1.9 Removing the Main
2.1.1 Removing the Fixing Thermistor/Sub
Assembly ............................. 7-9 Thermistor .......................... 7-19
2.1.2 Removing the Fixing 2.1.10 Removing the Thermal
Heater ................................. 7-10 Switch Unit ........................ 7-21
2.1.3 Removing the Upper 2.1.11 Adjusting the Pressure of
Fixing Roller ...................... 7-12 the Lower Fixing
2.1.4 Removing the Lower Roller (nip) ........................ 7-22
Fixing Assembly ................ 7-14 2.1.12 Lubrication ........................ 7-23
xii COPYRIGHT© 2000 CANON INC. 2000 2000 CANON iR70W/iR75W REV.0 OCT. 2000
CONTENTS
CHAPTER 8 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY CONTROLS

1 Control Panel ...................................... 8-1 5.1.1 Left Upper Cover ............... 8-15
1.1 Outline ....................................... 8-1 5.1.2 Left Lower Cover ............... 8-15
1.2 Operations .................................. 8-2 5.1.3 Right Rear Cover ............... 8-16
1.2.1 Data Communication ........... 8-2 5.1.4 Upper Rear Cover .............. 8-16
1.2.2 LCD Processing ................... 8-2 5.1.5 Control Panel Left Cover ... 8-17
1.2.3 LCD Contrast Adjustment ... 8-2 5.1.6 Control Panel Right
1.2.4 Functions of the Control Cover ................................. 8-17
Panel CPU ............................ 8-2 5.1.7 Left Front Cover ................ 8-18
2 Fans ..................................................... 8-3 5.1.8 Right Upper Cover ............ 8-18
2.1 Arrangement and Functions of 5.1.9 Control Panel ..................... 8-18
the Fans ...................................... 8-3 5.2 DC Controller PCB .................. 8-19
2.2 Sequence of Operations ............. 8-5 5.3 DC Driver PCB ........................ 8-19
2.2.1 2-Speed Control ................... 8-5 5.4 DC Power Supply PCB
2.2.2 Basic Sequence of (multiple output/single output) .. 8-20
Operations of the Fans ......... 8-5 5.5 Fans .......................................... 8-21
3 Power Supply ...................................... 8-6 5.5.1 Cooling Fan and Exhaust
3.1 Outline of the Power Supply ...... 8-6 Fan (exhausting air from
3.2 Power Supply Circuit ................. 8-7 the top of the fixing
3.3 Transition to Sleep Mode ........... 8-8 assembly and inside
3.3.1 Outline ................................. 8-8 the process unit) ................. 8-21
3.3.2 Diagram of Transition 5.5.2 Cooling Fan (exhausting
to Sleep Mode ...................... 8-9 air from the outlet of the
4 Counter .............................................. 8-10 fixing assembly) ................. 8-22
4.1 Outline ...................................... 8-10 5.5.3 Cooling Fan (cooling the
4.2 Counter Operations .................. 8-12 DC power supply) ............. 8-22
5 Disassembly/Assembly ..................... 8-13 6 Dehumidifying Heater ....................... 8-23
5.1 External Covers ........................ 8-14 7 Anti-Condensation Heater ................. 8-25
CHAPTER 9 INSTALLATION
1 Selecting the Site ................................ 9-1 3.1 Preparing for Relocation .......... 9-20
1.1 Outline of the Work Space ......... 9-2 4 Installing the Accessories ................. 9-21
2 Unpacking and Installation ................. 9-3 4.1 Installing the Control
2.1 Opening the Shipping Box and Card V (CC-V) ......................... 9-21
Removing the Fixing Material ... 9-4 4.1.1 Removing the Control
2.2 Mounting the Developing Panel Right Cover .............. 9-21
Assembly ................................... 9-7 4.1.2 Preparing for the Installation
2.3 Supplying the Toner ................. 9-11 of the Control Card Unit .... 9-23
2.4 Stirring the Toner ..................... 9-13 4.1.3 Installing the Control
2.5 Setting the Cassette .................. 9-15 Card Unit ........................... 9-24
2.6 Making the Appropriate 5 Installing the Copy Data
Settings ..................................... 9-19 Controller A1 .................................... 9-27
3 Relocating the Machine .................... 9-20 5.1 Setting Up the Board ............... 9-27
COPYRIGHT© 2000 CANON INC. 2000 2000 CANON iR70W/iR75W REV.0 OCT. 2000 xiii
CONTENTS
5.2 Installing to the Host 6.1 Installing to the Host Machine . 9-44
Machine ................................... 9-30 7 Expansion Memory .......................... 9-55
5.3 Checking the Operations .......... 9-33 7.1 Mounting Expansion
6 Installing the Remote Diagnostic Memory .................................... 9-55
Device II ........................................... 9-44
CHAPTER 10 MAINTENANCE/INSPECTION
1 Periodically Replaced Parts .............. 10-1 3 Scheduled Servicing Chart ............... 10-3
2 Estimated Lives of Durables ............. 10-2 4 Scheduled Servicing Table ............... 10-4
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
1 Guide to Troubleshooting ................. 11-1 2.4.2 Registering the Paper Width
1.1 Image Basic Adjustment Basic Value for the
Procedure ................................. 11-3 Multifeeder ...................... 11-16
1.2 Points to Note on Scheduled 2.4.3 Adjusting the Manual
Servicing .................................. 11-4 Feed Paper Width Sensor
2 Standards and Adjustments ............... 11-5 (VR1) ............................... 11-18
2.1 Adjusting the Image 2.4.4 Details of the Manual
Margin and Registration ........... 11-5 Paper Width Size Sensor
2.2 Fixing System .......................... 11-8 (VR1) ............................... 11-19
2.2.1 Points to Note When 2.4.5 Adjusting the Horizontal
Mounting the Fixing Heater 11-8 Registration for the
2.2.2 Position of the Fixing Multifeeder ...................... 11-19
Assembly Paper Guide ...... 11-8 2.4.6 Checking the
2.2.3 Adjusting the Pressure Photointerrupters ............. 11-20
of the Lower Fixing 3 Troubleshooting Image Faults ........ 11-31
Roller (nip) ........................ 11-9 3.1 Making Initial Checks ............ 11-31
2.3 Making Exposure System ...... 11-11 3.1.1 Site Requirements ............ 11-31
2.3.1 Making Orthogonal 3.1.2 Checking the Originals .... 11-31
Adjustments ..................... 11-11 3.1.3 Checking the Copyboard Glass
2.3.2 Definition of the for Dirt and Scratches ...... 11-31
Orthogonal Level ............. 11-12 3.1.4 Isolating the Problem
2.3.3 Adjusting the Orthogonal Between the Scanner
Level ................................ 11-13 Unit and the Printer Unit .. 11-31
2.3.4 Original Exposure 3.1.5 Checking the Charging
System ............................. 11-15 Assemblies ....................... 11-32
2.3.5 Adjusting the Image 3.1.6 Checking the Developing
Read Start Position ........... 11-15 Assembly ......................... 11-32
2.4 Electrical System .................... 11-16 3.1.7 Checking the Paper .......... 11-32
2.4.1 When Replacing Major 3.1.8 Checking the Consumables
Components ..................... 11-16 and Durables .................... 11-32
xiv COPYRIGHT© 2000 CANON INC. 2000 2000 CANON iR70W/iR75W REV.0 OCT. 2000
CONTENTS
3.1.9 Others .............................. 11-32 5.7.1 DC controller PCB

3.2 Sample Faulty Images ............ 11-34 (main controller) .............. 11-90
3.3 Troubleshooting Image 5.7.2 DC Driver PCB
Faults ...................................... 11-35 (DC driver) ....................... 11-91
3.4 Read Image Faults .................. 11-50 5.7.3 Scanner Controller PCB
4 Troubleshooting Feeding Faults/ (scanner controller) .......... 11-92
Other Malfunctions ......................... 11-56 5.7.4 Image Processing PCB .... 11-93
4.1 Paper Jams ............................. 11-56 6 Upgrading ....................................... 11-94
4.1.1 Pickup Assembly ............. 11-58 6.1 Replacing the DIMM ............. 11-94
4.1.2 Separation/Feeding 6.1.1 Removing the DIMM ...... 11-95
Assembly ......................... 11-59 6.1.2 Mounting the DIMM ....... 11-96
4.1.3 Fixing/Delivery 7 Service Mode .................................. 11-97
Assembly ......................... 11-59 7.1 Outline ................................... 11-97
4.1.4 Reversing/Feeding, Lower 7.1.1 Starting Service Mode
Feeding, and Re-Pickup .. 11-60 and Making Selections ..... 11-98
4.2 Troubleshooting Feeding 7.1.2 Ending Service Mode ....... 11-98
Faults ...................................... 11-61 7.1.3 Backing Up the RAM ...... 11-99
4.2.1 Double Feeding ............... 11-61 7.1.4 Basic Operation .............. 11-100
4.2.2 Wrinkling ......................... 11-61 7.2 DISPLAY
4.3 Troubleshooting Other (display/control mode) ......... 11-105
Malfunction ............................ 11-62 7.3 I/O Display Mode ................ 11-118
5 Arrangement and Functions of 7.3.1 DC_CON ....................... 11-119
Electric Parts ................................... 11-76 7.3.2 IP .................................... 11-127
5.1 Clutch Solenoids .................... 11-76 7.3.3 SORTER ........................ 11-129
5.2 Motors .................................... 11-78 7.4 Adjustment Mode ................ 11-131
5.3 Fans ........................................ 11-80 7.5 FUNCTION
5.4 Sensors ................................... 11-82 (operation check mode) ....... 11-163
5.5 Switches, Counters, Heaters, 7.6 OPTION Settings Mode ...... 11-177
and Zener Diode .................... 11-86 7.7 PG Test Print ........................ 11-183
5.6 PCBs ...................................... 11-88 7.8 COUNTER Mode ................ 11-186
5.7 PCBs ...................................... 11-90 7.9 FEEDER .............................. 11-193
CHAPTER 12 SELF DIAGNOSIS

1 Troubleshooting ................................ 12-1
APPENDIX
1 General Timing Chart ........................ A-1 4 Special Tools ...................................... A-6
2 List of Signals .................................... A-2 5 Solvents/Oils ...................................... A-8
3 General Circuit Diagram .................... A-3
COPYRIGHT© 2000 CANON INC. 2000 2000 CANON iR70W/iR75W REV.0 OCT. 2000 xv
CHAPTER 1
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
COPYRIGHT© 2000 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR75W REV.0 OCT. 2000
1 Features
1. High-speed, high-quality office machine that supports A2 paper.
• It supports A2 paper for both originals and copies.
• It generates 40 A4 copies per minute or 14 A2 copies per minute.
• It has a reading resolution at time of copying of 600 × 600 dpi.
• It makes copies in 256 gradations.
2. Large-capacity image memory.
• It comes with 32-MB image memory as standard, and allows expansion up to 96 MB.
• It uses image memory and enables making as many copies as needed by reading the
original only once (ultimately increasing copying efficiency).
3. Duplex Unit
• It turns out double-sided copies without stacking the sheets in the duplexing assembly,
enabling a smooth flow of operation and a higher productivity.
4. Large source of paper.
It allows the construction of a source of paper accommodating as many as 1050 sheets.
• standard 3 front cassettes
upper cassette 500 × 1
lower cassette 250 × 2
• multifeeder: 50 sheets
5. LED image exposure.
It uses a LED array to expose images (instead of a laser) for a higher productivity when
large-size paper is used.
6. No need for the cleaning of the photosensitive drum, thus no waste toner.
It uses a type of toner which can be reused, and collects toner remaining from transfer
into its developing assembly, eliminating waste toner. The absence of a cleaning mecha-
nism for the photosensitive drum promises a longer drum life.
7. Supports A2 paper, and accommodates the DADF-F1 (option).
The DADF-F1 is capable of processing paper as large as A2. The use of RDF mode en-
ables making double-sided copies.
8. Supports A3 paper, and accommodates the Stapler Sorter-M1 (option).
The Stapler Sorter-M1 is a 10-bin stapler sorter capable of processing paper as large as
A3, i.e., delivering, stacking, and stapling the sheets. (It staples a stack of up to 30
sheets thick.)
COPYRIGHT© 2000 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR75W REV.0 OCT. 2000 1-1
2 Specifications
2.1 Type
Item Specifications
Body Console
Copyboard Fixed
Source of light Fluorescent lamp
Method of reading CCD
Lens Lens array (fixed focal point)
Photosensitive medium OPC drum
T01-201-01
2.2 Method
Item Specifications
Copying Indirect electrostatic
Charging Corona
Exposure LED
Adjustment of copy density Auto or manual
Development Dry, non-magnetic, single-component
Pickup Cassette: retard type (center reference)
Multifeeder: retard type (center reference)
Transfer Static
Separation Static
Fixing Heat roller type
T01-202-01
1-2 COPYRIGHT© 2000 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR75W REV.0 OCT. 2000
2.3 Functions
Item Specifications
Resolution 600× 600 dpi (reading)
Gradation 256 gradation
Type of original Sheet, book, film, 3-D object (2 kg max.)
Maximum size of original A2 (420×594 mm), 431.8×609.6 mm (17″×24″)
Reproduction ratio A paper (230 V) 3R3E
Zoom 25% to 400% (in 1% and 0.1% increments)
Auto Yes
XY independent Yes
Wait time (20°C or higher) From main power on 4 min 30 sec or less
From power save mode
No return time about 2 sec or less
−10% mode about 60 sec or less
First copy time A4, Direct, topmost cassette, auto density adjustment OFF
Copyboard cover mode 7.5 sec or less
Feeder mode 10.0 sec or less
Continuous copying 1 to 999 sheets
Copying speed See T01-206-01.
Copy size Cassette L cassette: A2 to A4/S cassette: A3 to A5
Multifeeder A2 (420×594mm)/431.8×609.6 mm (17″×24″) to postcard
Double-sided A3 (297×420mm) to A5
Type of copy paper Cassette Plain paper, recycled paper, eco paper (64 to 80 g/m2),
colored paper, tracing paper
Multifeeder Plain paper, recycled paper, eco paper, transparency,
colored paper, postcard (vertical feed only),
label, thick paper (64 to 128 g/m2), tracing paper, tracing film
Double-sided Plain paper, recycled paper, eco paper, colored paper
Cassette No claw
Cassette 500 sheets (approx.) of 80 g/m2 paper (2nd cassette)
250 sheets (approx.) of 80 g/m2 paper (3rd and 4th cassettes)
T01-203-01
Item Specifications
2
Multifeeder tray 50 sheets of 80 g/m paper
Delivery tray Center tray/Copy tray (option)
up to A3: 250 sheets of 80 g/m2 paper or equivalent
A2: 100 sheets of 80 g/m2 paper or equivalent
Non-image width
Leading edge/trailing edge 3.0mm/3.5mm
Left/right 3.0mm
Auto clear Yes; 2 min standard; changed between 1 and 9 min in user mode
Auto power off time No; 1 hr standard; may be changed in user mode between 10 min
and 4 hr
T01-203-02
The above specifications are subject to change for product improvement.
2.4 Others
Item Specifications
Operating Temperature 7.5° to 32.5°C
environment Humidity 5% to 85% RH
Atmospheric pressure 810 to 1013 hPa (0.8 to 1.0 atm)
Power supply 230 V Serial number EUR UFJ*****
FRN SCJ*****
GER TCL*****
Power No addition
consumption Copying 1100 W (max., 1700W)
(reference Standby 410 W
only; for 23°C Low power mode 160 W
and at rated Power save No return time 410 W
input, actual mode −10% 370 W
measurements −25% 307 W
taken of −50% 205 W
machine) Auto power-off 50 W
Noise Copying 71 dB or less
(sound power level: Impulse mode)
Standby 50 dB or less
(sound power level: Impulse mode)
Ozone Average: 0.01 ppm or less
Maximum:0.02 ppm or less
Dimensions Width 780 mm
(main body Depth 830 mm
only) Height 985 mm
Weight 196 kg or less (not including option)
Consumables Copy paper Keep wrapped to avoid humidity.
Toner Avoid direct sunlight; keep at 40°C, 85% or less
T01-204-01
2.5 Default Ratios

Items Enlargement Reduction
Default ratio I 1 : 1.414 I 1 : 0.250
II 1 : 2.000 II 1 : 0.500
III 1 : 4.000 III 1 : 0.707
T01-205-01
2.6 Copying Speed
Reproduction iR70W/iR75W DADF in use

Size
mode (copies/min) (reference only; copies/min)
100% (Direct) A2 14 12
A3 19 16
A3 24 21
A4 29 21
A4 40 28
A5 40 27
A5 49 34
The above is based on the following: delivery from the machine, density auto adjustment ON, non-
sort, topmost cassette, no data in memory.
T01-206-01 Copying Speeds
Reproduction mode Reduction (copies/min) Enlargement (copies/min)

A2 → A4 (50%) 29 A3 → A2 (141.4%) 14
A3 → A5 (50%) 49 A4 → A3 (141.4%) 24
A2 → A3 (70.7%) 19 A5 → A4 (141.4%) 40
A3 → A4 (70.7%) 40 A4 → A2 (200.0%) 14
A4 → A5 (70.7%) 49 A5 → A3 (200.0%) 24
The above is based on the following: delivery from the machine, density auto adjustment ON, non-
sort, topmost cassette, no data in memory.
T01-206-02 Copying Speeds
The above specifications are subject to change for product improvement.
The orientation of paper is defined as follows:

Vertical
Memo Rear
Horizontal
Front
(control panel side)
Paper feed direction
F01-206-01
3 Names of Part
3.1 External View
• With the Covers On
[1]
[4]
[2]
[3]
[5]
[9]
ON
l OFF
[6]
[7]
[8]
F01-301-01
[1] Copyboard cover (option) [6] Cassette 2

[2] Front cover [7] Cassette 3
[3] Multifeeder [8] Cassette 4
[4] Main power switch [9] Leakage breaker
[5] Duplex unit
[1]
[8]
[2]
[9]
[3]
[4]
[7]
[5]
[6]
F01-301-02
[1] Copyboard glass [6] Fixing assembly

[2] Control panel [7] Door switch
[3] Front cover [8] Scene contrast adjustment dial
[4] Process unit [9] Service book case
[5] Feed unit release lever
3.2 Cross Section
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9] [10] [11][12][13][14] [15] [16][17] [18] [19]
[20]
[21]
[22]
[23]
[24]
[25]
[26]
[27]
[28]
[29]
[30]
[31]
[32]
[33]
[34]
[54][53] [52] [51] [50] [49][48][47][46] [45] [44] [43] [42] [41] [40] [39][38] [37] [36] [35]
F01-302-01
[1] Feed roller 2 [28] Feed roller 2

[2] Delivery roller [29] Cassette 2 separation roller
[3] Feed roller 1 [30] Vertical path roller 3
[4] Delivery roller [31] Feed roller 3
[5] Feed roller 3 [32] Cassette 3 separation roller
[6] Lower fixing roller [33] Vertical path roller 4
[7] Upper fixing roller [34] Feeder roller 4
[8] Feeding assembly [35] Cassette 4 separation roller
[9] No. 2 mirror [36] Pickup roller 4
[10] No. 3 mirror [37] Pickup roller 3
[11] Pre-exposure unit [38] Pickup roller 2
[12] Lens [39] Guide pulley
[13] CCD [40] Reversing roller 5
[14] Primary charging assembly [41] Reversing roller 6
[15] LED exposure unit [42] Transfer charging assembly
[16] Photosensitive drum [43] Separation charging assembly
[17] No. 1 mirror [44] Reversing roller 4
[18] Scanning lamp [45] Reversing roller 7
[19] Developing assembly [46] Reversing roller 3
[20] Registration roller 2 [47] Reversing roller 8
[21] Multifeeder pickup roller [48] Cassette 2
[22] Multifeeder feed roller [49] Duplex unit
[23] Multifeeder separation roller [50] Reversing roller 2
[24] Registration roller 1 [51] Cassette 4
[25] Vertical path roller 1 [52] Cassette 3
[26] Relay roller [53] Reversing roller 9
[27] Vertical path roller 2 [54] Reversing roller 1
4 Using the Machine

4.1 Turning On the Power Switch
The machine is equipped with a “main power switch” on the right side of its control
panel.
[1]
ON
OFF
[2]
F01-401-01
[1] Main power switch

[2] Main power lamp
4.2 Control Panel
ON
OFF
1 2 3
? 4 5 6
7 8 9
ID 0 C
[1] [2] [3][4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9] [10] [11]
F01-402-01
[1] Screen contrast adjustment dial [7] Keypad

[2] Reset key [8] Clear key
[3] Guide key [9] Start key
[4] User mode key [10] Stop key
[5] Interrupt key [11] Power Save key
[6] ID key
4.3 Extension Mode

Mode Description
Page separation Use it to copy left and right pages (e.g., a spread book) on separate
sheets by a single operation.
Transparency interleaf Use it to insert a sheet of paper between copies made on
transparencies.
Overlay Use it to copy two originals on a single sheet of paper by laying one
image over the other.
Mixed sizes Use it to make copies of originals of different sizes (of the same
width) by setting them on the feeder at the same time.
Shift Make copies of originals by shifting the image to a desired location
on paper.
Bind Use it to create a margin on the side of copies for binding.
Frame erase Use it to delete any images of originals (shade; frame, punch holes)
from copies.
Reduced image composition Use it to copy 2 to 8 originals on a single sheet of paper using
automatic reduction.
Enlarged image composition Use it to copy a single original on one or two sides of a single sheet of
paper of a specific size using automatic enlargement.
Sharpness Use it to increase the contrast of copied images (black and white).
Mode memory Use it to store a copying mode or call a stored copying mode.
Call Use it to call any of the most recently selected three copying modes
for making copies.
Negative/positive reversal Use it to make copies of an original by reversing its black and white
areas.
T01-403-01
4.4 List of User Modes

Making Selections
1. Selecting the Preference Key 1/2
• Use it to register a Preference key to be indicated on the Basic screen.
• Register any two keys from the memory keys in mode memory or the mode keys on
the Extension Mode screen for display on the Basic screen.
2. Setting the Ratio Increment
• Select either 0.1% or 1% as the unit of increment for ratios.
By default, 1% is selected.
3. Setting Power Save Mode
• Use it to select either −10%, −12%, −50%, or no return time as the rate of saving.
• By default, −10% is selected.
4. Turning On/Off Auto Sort
• This is valid only when a sorter is installed.
• When it is on, sort mode will automatically be selected when an original is placed in
the feeder. It remains on after the original is removed if group, staple sort, rotation
sort, or rotation group is selected.
• By default, this function is ON.
5. Turning On/Off Cassette Auto Select
• Use it to select cassettes and multifeeder for auto paper select (APS) and auto cassette
change (ACC).
• Not all cassettes can be de-selected.
• By default, the following is true:
cassette: ON
multifeeder: OFF
6. Setting the Buzzer
• Use it to turn on/off the following three types of buzzers:
input sound: in response to a touch on a key on the control panel or the touch
panel.
warning sound: in response to a problem in the machine (paper jam, malfunction).
job end sound: in response to the end of a job (end of delivery, stapling).
standby sound: in response to a shift from warm-up to standby.
• By default, the following is true:
input sound: ON
warning sound: ON
job end sound: ON
standby sound: ON
7. Switching the Density Increments
• Use it to select either 9-step or 17-step.
• By default, 9-step is selected.
8. Changing the Standard Mode

The standard mode is a combination of functions selected in response to power-on or a
press on the Reset key.
• The standard mode may be “registered” or “initialized.”
• Registering or Changing the Mode
1) Make desired mode settings.
2) Select ‘change standard mode’ in user mode.
3) Press ‘register’.
4) Check the settings on the screen.
9. Setting the system Control ID No.
Use it to set an ID No. for use when managing the system. When an ID No. is regis-
tered, restrictions may be imposed on registering/changing group ID Nos.
• At time of shipment, no system ID No. is set.
• To register a number for the first time, enter a 4-digit number and press ‘OK’.
• To change the number, enter the registered system control ID No., and press ‘OK’;
then, enter a new 4-digit number, and press ‘OK’.
10. Registering Group ID No.
• Use it to enable or disable group ID control.
• Group ID: As many as 300 groups may be stored, each being a 4-digit number.
• ID No.: Use a 4-digit number.
• If no ID No. is registered, the machine may be used by merely entering a group ID.
• If a system control ID No. has been registered, group ID control settings cannot be
made.
• Counter information is available for each group.
11. Auto Vertical/Horizontal Rotation
• An image may automatically be rotated and printed on selected paper based on the
result of computation made on the size of the original and the selected ratio.
• The size of paper for rotation may be up to A3 in Direct.
• This function is enabled by default.
• This function is disabled if any of the following is selected: reduced image composi-
tion, overlay, page separation overlay, mirror image, staple sort, XY independent auto
selection.
12. Selecting the Destination of Delivery
• Use it to select the destination of delivery when an external tray is installed.
• This function is dimmed if a stapler sorter is installed.
13. Initializing the Settings
• Use it to initialize each set of settings to factory settings.
• The Confirmation screen appears when this function is selected.
14. Registering a Source of Tracing Paper
• Use it to select a source of tracing paper.
• The selected source of tracing paper will be indicated by a special icon, and will not
be a candidate for auto cassette change.
15. Turning On/Off Photo Mode

• Use it to enable or disable photo mode.
• When this function is enabled, the Basic screen will indicate ‘photo’.
• By default, this function is disabled.
Setting the Timer

1. Setting the Date/Time
• Use it to set the present date/time.
2. Setting the Auto Clear Time
• Use it to set the length of time before auto clear.
• The length may be between 1 and 9 min in 1-mm increments.
• Setting ‘0’ disables this function.
• By default, 2 min is selected.
3. Setting the Weekly Timer
• Use it to set the time at which the power switch on the control panel is automatically
turned off for each day of the week.
• The days of the week may be from Sunday through Saturday, between 00:00 and
23:59, in 1-min intervals.
• At time of shipment, this function is not set.
• If auto power-off time is set, the auto power-off time is given preference.
4. Changing the Shift Time to Low Power Mode
• Use it to set the length of the shift to any of the following:
10, 15, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 90 min; 2, 3, 4 hr.
• This function cannot be disabled.
• By default, 15 min is selected.
5. Changing the Auto Power-Off Time
• Use it to the power-off time to any of the following:
10, 15, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 90 min; 2, 3, 4 hr.
• This function may be disabled in a separate level of settings mode.
• By default, 1 hr is selected.
Adjustments/Cleaning
1. Zoom Fine-Tuning
• Use it for fine tuning if a slight discrepancy is noted in the size of the original image
and that of the copy image:
• Range of Adjustment
main scanning direction: ±1.0% in 0.1% increments
sub scanning direction: ±1.0% in 0.1% increments
2. Density Correction
• Use it to adjust the length of time in which the LEDs remain on.
• Any of five settings may be selected.
3. Cleaning the Charging Wire
• Use it to clean the charging wire of the primary charging assembly.
5 Routine Maintenance by the User

Advise the user to perform the following at least once a week:
1. Wipe the copyboard glass with a moist cloth; then, dry wipe it.
2. Wipe the copyboard cover using solution of mild detergent; then, dry wipe it.
If a DADF-F1 is installed, wipe its feed belt using a solution of mild detergent, and dry
wipe it.
Advise the user to execute auto cleaning of the primary charging wire if image faults
(e.g., vertical white spots or black lines) occur.
6 Safety
6.1 Safety of Toner
Toner is a non-toxic material composed of small amounts of dye. If your skin or clothes
came into contact with it, remove as much of it as possible, and then wash with water.
Do not use warm water, which would turn the toner into jell and cause it to fuse with the
fibers of the clothes (resisting removal permanently).
Be sure also not to bring toner into contact with vinyl, which tends to dissolve upon con-
tact.
Do not throw toner into fire to avoid explosion.
7 Image Formation
7.1 Outline
The machine uses an indirect statophotographic method, and is constructed as follows:
Copyboard glass Scanning lamp

Lens CCD
Image processing
block
Toner cartridge
LED exposure unit
Developing
Primary
charging assembly assembly
Pre-exposure
assembly
Multifeeder
pickup
assembly
Cassette pickup
Fixing assembly Separation charging Transfer charging
assembly
assembly assembly
F01-701-01
The machine’s image formation process consists of the following seven steps:
Step 1 Pre-exposure
Step 2 Primary charging (negative DC)
Step 3 LED image exposure
Step 4 Development (DC bias)
Step 5 Transfer (positive DC)
Step 6 Separation (AC + negative DC)
Step 7 Fixing
Latent static image formation block
2. Primary charging 3. LED image exposure
1. Pre-exposure
4. Development
5. Transfer
Multifeeder
Registration
Delivery 7. Fixing 6. Separation
Duplexing
Flow of copy paper Cassette
Rotation of drum
F01-701-02
The machine’s image exposure system uses an LED array instead of a laser
device to enable a higher rate of productivity when making large-sized cop-
Memo ies.
For specific mechanisms of the LED exposure system, see 6. “LED Expo-
sure” in Chapter 5.
CHAPTER 2
BASIC OPERATIONS
1 Basic Operations
1.1 Functional Construction
The machine may be broadly divided into the following five functional blocks:
1.1.1 Scanner Function

The scanner functions are found it the original exposure system and the image processing
system and control system (control of scanner unit, original illumination, control panel).
1.1.2 Printer Functions

The printer functions are found in the image formation system, pickup/feed system, and
control system (control of DC controller, high/low voltage power supply).
<Control system> <Original exposure system>
Original
Original scanner
control
Original illumination
Original illumination
control <Image processing system>
CCD
Control panel Analog image processing
Digital image processing Image memory control
DC controller
High-voltage power <Image formation>

supply
Low-voltage power LED exposure unit
supply
Primary charging
Drum Develop-
ment
<Pickup/feed system>
Delivery Pickup Multifeeder
Fixing Feeding Separation Transfer control
Duplex unit
Cassette 2
Cassette 3
Cassette 4
F02-101-01
1.2 Outline of the Electrical Circuitry

The machine's major electric mechanisms are controlled by the CPUs on the DC control-
ler PCB and the scanner control PCB.
The following table shows the division of functions of the CPUs and the functions of the
ICs around the CPUs; as many as three types of CPUs are used (for the control panel, for
the scanner, for the DC controller).
a. DC controller PCB (main controller)

The PCB uses one type of CPU and one type of flash ROM.
In this manual, the CPU on the DC controller PCB is referred to as “DC-CPU,” from its
function (i.e., used for the DC controller).
Name Description (functions)

DC-CPU controls the control panel, controls jobs, controls the feeder,
(for DC controller) controls communication with the Copy Data Controller (accessory),
controls the printer, controls service/user mode, controls pickup/feed,
controls the sorter, controls fixing, controls high-voltage sequence,
controls image formation, controls main motor, detects jams, detects paper in
the cassette
DCC, DIMM controls control programs, controls copying, controls messages on the control
FLASH ROM panel
DC-CPU contains programs for copying sequence
T02-102-01
b. Control Panel

CPU monitors key inputs, controls buzzer sound, controls LED activation
T02-102-02
c. Scanner Control PCB

CPU controls the reading mechanism, controls image processing,
controls image memory, controls original illumination
ROM controls image memory
T02-102-03
32 MB as
standard
32 MB upon Scanner control
expansion CPU
PCB
CPU
32 MB upon
expansion Control panel
DC controller PCB
Sorter
Copy Data
IPC
Controller
Flash ROM
4 MB
DC-CPU*
HVT circuit Feeder
Main motor DC load Feed motor
DC-CPU: CPU for DC controller.
F02-102-01
1.3 Basic Sequence of Operations

1.3.1 Outline
The machine’s copying mode may be divided into the following two modes, each with its
own operating conditions and mechanisms:
Mode Description Operation

Direct copying • 1-on-1 copying with the fixing The scanning operation and the printing
temperature at the target level operation have 1-to-1 linkage.
• interrupt copying
• 1st of normal copying
Memory • Double-sided The image memory that comes as standard
copying • Overlay or installed as an accessory is used to store
• Reduced image composition data collected by scanning an image for
• Book frame erase printing.
• Transparency interleaf
• Shift (top, center, bottom, left
top, left, left bottom)
• Cover (copyboard cover mode)
• Image rotation
• Multiple sets
• Ratio in sub scanning direction at
lower than 40%, or 142.5% or
higher
• Sort, group, or staple mode in
copyboard cover mode
• Center tray delivery when pickup
is from the feeder (however,
with 2 or more originals)
The image memory is 32 MB in size as standard, and may be increased up to a total of 96 MB.
T02-103-01
1.3.2 Basic Sequence of Operations in Direct Copying

a. Conditions for Starting Operations
Conditions for Starting the Scanner
The Start key on the control panel is enabled when the following conditions are met, with
the machine ready to read an original. (Printing, however, will not start until the conditions
for printing are met.)
• The main power switch and the control panel power switch are on, and all external covers
are closed (i.e., 24-V power is present).
• The machine has ended its initial operation, and its lamp heater is under thermal control.
Conditions for Starting the Printer

• The fixing temperature is 170°C or higher.
Note: The fixing temperature here means the surface temperature of the upper fixing
roller. It varies according to the type of paper, and may be checked in service mode
(DISPLAY>ANALOG>FIX-E).
b. Basic Sequence of Operations
Period Purpose
INTR1 From when the main power switch is To warm up the machine.
Initial rotation turned on or the front door is opened/
1 closed to until standby or INTR2.
INTR2 From when the DC-CPU has generated • Stabilizes the sensitivity of the
Initial rotation the print start signal after the Start key photosensitive drum.
2 is pressed to when the scanner starts to • Executes shading correction.
move forward.
SCAN While an original is being read. Collects image data.
Scan
PRINT From when paper is picked up to when Performs printing operation (in
Print toner is transferred to the paper reference to vertical path sensor/
(printing operation). internal delivery sensor signal).
LSTR From the end of PRINT to when the Cleans the surface of the photo-
Last rotation paper moves past the delivery sensor. sensitive drum using static electricity
by way of post processing.
T02-103-02
A4, Plain paper, Direct, Copyboard cover mode, 1 Copy, Cassette 2, Center tray
2-6
Main power ON Start key ON Panel indication OFF
INTR1 STBY INTR2 SCAN PRINT LSTR STBY SLEEP
Main motor (M1)

Feed motor (M3)
Fixing heater 1 (H1)
Scanner motor (M11)
Scanner home position sensor (MS44)
Lamp 1/2 (FL1/FL2)
Data sampling for shading correction
Cassette 2 pickup roller DOWN solenoid (SL3)
Cassette 2 pickup drive clutch (CL3)
Cassette 2 reversing roller UP solenoid (SL7)
Cassette 2 pickup sensor (PS22)

Vertical feed 2 sensor (PS10)
Paper entry sensor 1 (PS2)
Registration roller drive clutch (CL6)
Primary charging assembly (HV1)
Developing bias (D_BIAS)
Developing bias switching (BIASCH)
Transfer charging assembly (HV_XFER)
Separation charging assembly (HV_SEP)
Separation sensor (PS4)
Pre-exposure lamp (E_LAMP)
Transfer auxiliary lamp (TR_LAMP)
LED exposure
Fixing outlet sensor (PS5)
Internal tray delivery sensor 1 (PS6)
Total copy counter (CNT1)
DC power supply cooling fan (FM1)
Exhaust fan (FM2)
Delivery feeding assembly cooling fan (FM3)
Separation blower (BL1)
Scanner control PCB cooling fan (FM4)
Process cooling blower (BL2)
F02-103-01 Basic Sequence of Operations in Direct Mode
1.3.3 Basic Sequence of Operations for Memory Copying
The conditions to start and the basic sequence of operations are the same as those used in
direct copying mode.
Conditions for Starting the Printer

The image data is already in page memory, with the machine ready to print it as soon as
the following conditions are met.
• The fixing temperature is 170°C or higher.
2-8
DADF, 1 Original, plain paper, A4, 3 Copies, Direct, Cassette 2, Memory copying, Center tray
Main motor (M1)

Feed motor (M3)
Scanner motor (M11)
Lamp 1/2 (FL1/FL2)
Cassette 2 pickup sensor (CL3)

LED exposure
F02-103-02 Basic Sequence of Operations (memory copying)
1.4 Main Motor (M1) Control Circuit

1.4.1 Outline
The functions for the main motor driver circuit are as shown in the following table, and
are arranged as shown in the following block diagram:
Item Description
Power supply 24 VDC, 5 VDC from a low-voltage power supply.
Drive signal MAMTR from the DC controller PCB.
Operation/drive units Photosensitive drum, developing assembly
Control a. Turns on/off the main motor.
b. Controls the speed of the main motor.
c. Detects an error.
T02-104-01
+24V
Low-voltage 0V Drive
power supply Main motor
circuit
+5V (M1)
Clock pulse
generation
MAMTR*
circuit
DC Control
controller MAMTR_LD* circuit
PCB Reference signal
Main motor driver PCB
F02-104-01
a. Turning On and Off the Main Motor

When the main motor drive signal (MAMTR*) goes ‘0’, the activation of the control cir-
cuit on the main motor driver PCB generates drive current to drive the main motor.
When the drive signal goes ‘1’, on the other hand, the output of the control signal stops,
and the absence of the drive signal keeps the motor still.
b. Controlling the Main Motor to a Constant Speed

The machine’s main motor is controlled to a constant speed. The motor is controlled by
the driver PCB, which causes the reference pulse signals from the main motor PCB and the
clock pulses generated by the rotation of the motor to match in terms of frequency and
phase.
At this time, the signal (MAMTR_LD*=0) is sent to the DC controller PCB to indicate
that the main motor is rotating at a constant speed.
c. Detecting an Error (E01)

If a discrepancy occurs in the rotation of the main motor for some reason, the signal used
to indicate rotation at a constant speed (MAMTR_LD*) goes ‘1’, causing the machine to
stop all operations for an error in the main motor and indicate ‘E010’ on the control panel.
1.5 Feed Motor (M3) Control Circuit

1.5.1 Outline
The functions of the feed motor driver circuit are as shown in the following table, and are
arranged as shown in the following block diagram:
Item Description
Power supply 24 VDC and 5 VDC from a low-voltage power supply.
Drive signal From the DC controller PCB (PEMTR).
Drive assemblies Registration roller, vertical path roller, feed assembly, feed roller, pickup
roller, separation roller, multifeeder pickup roller
Control a. Turning on and off the feed motor.
b. Controlling the feed motor to a constant speed.
c. Detecting an error.
T02-105-01
+24V
Low-voltage 0V Drive
power supply Feed motor
+5V
circuit
(M3)
Clock pulse
PEMTR* generation
circuit
DC PEMTRCLK Control
controller circuit
PCB PEMTR_LD*
Feed motor driver PCB
F02-105-01
a. Turning On and Off the Feed Motor

When the feed motor drive signal (PEMTR*) goes ‘0’, the activation of the control circuit
on the feed motor driver PCB generates drive current to turn on the feed motor.
When the drive signal goes ‘1’, on the other hand, the output of the control signal stops,
and the absence of drive current keeps the feed motor still.
b. Controlling the Feed Motor to a Constant Speed

The machine controls the feed motor to a constant speed, ensuring that its rotation is con-
stant.
The driver PCB controls the rotation of the feed motor by ensuring that the reference
pulse signals (PEMTR_CLK) that arrive at the feed motor PCB and the clock pulses gener-
ated by the rotation of the motor match in terms of the frequency and the phase of the clock
pulses.
The signal PEMTR_LD*=0 is sent to the DC controller PCB to indicate that the feed mo-
tor is rotating at a constant speed.
c. Detecting an Error (E014)

If a discrepancy occurs in the rotation of the feed motor for some reason, the signal used
to indicate rotation at a constant speed (PEMTR_LD*) goes ‘1’, causing the machine to stop
all operations and indicate ‘E014’ on the control panel.
1.6 Inputs to and Outputs from the Major PCBs

The machine’s major PCBs (e.g., DC controller PCB, scanner controller PCB, DC driver
PCB, control panel CPU PCB) use the following input/output signals:
Main power
lamp PCB Control
panel
CPU PCB
LCD contrast
adjustment
PCB
CN702 J205
Control panel
inverter
PCB
LCD panel
(LCD) DC controller
PCB
CCD unit Scanner CN13 J223
control
Inverter power PCB
supply
J552 J212
DC driver
PCB
CN302 J201
High-voltage
PCB
CN2 J221
LED HEAD
J562 J209
Motor driver
PCB
F02-106-01
1.6.1 Inputs to the Major PCBs

Inputs to the DC controller PCB (1/6)
DC controller PCB
J79 J76 J216 5 V

-1 -B3
Multifeeder -2 -B2 MP_ENT* When paper is present over the
paper sensor PS1 -3 -B1
sensor, ‘0’. (The light-blocking plate
is at PS1.)
J77 J216 5 V
-1 -B6
Paper entry -2 -B5 P_ENT1* When paper is present over the
sensor 1 PS2 -3 -B4 sensor, ‘0’. (The light-blocking plate
is at PS2.)
J78 J216 5 V
-1 -B9
Paper entry -2 -B8 P_ENT2* When paper has moved past the
sensor 2 PS3 -3 -B7 sensor, ‘0’. (The light-blocking plate
is at PS3.)
J190 J202 5 V
-1 -A9
Fixing outlet -2 -A8 F_EXIT* When paper has moved past the
sensor PS5 -3 -A7 sensor, ‘0’. (The light-blocking plate
is at PS5.)
J97 J156 J204 5 V

-1 -B6
Delivery -2 -B5 OUTEXIT* When paper has moved past the
sensor PS8 -3 -B4 sensor, ‘0’. (The light-blocking plate
is at PS8.)
J87 J151 J202 5 V
-1 -B12
Duplex inlet -2 -B11 BSP_ENT* When paper has moved past the
sensor PS38 -3 -B10 sensor, ‘0’. (The light-blocking plate
is at PS38.)
J181 J173 J212
Manual feed -1 -3 MP_SZDT (analog signal)
paper width -2 -2 5V Detects the width of paper placed
sensor VR1 -3 -1 on the manual feed tray.
J89 J88 J204 5 V

-1 -B9
Separation -2 -B8 P_SEPR* When paper has moved past the
sensor 1 PS4 -3 -B7
sensor, ‘0’. (The light-blocking plate
is at PS4.)
F02-106-02
Inputs to the DC Controller PCB (2/6)
DC controller PCB
J163 J150 J202 5V

-1 -B3
Internal tray
delivery sensor 1 -2 -B2 When paper has moved past the sensor,
INEXIT1*
PS6 -3 -B1 ‘0’. (The light-blocking plate is at PS6.)
J161 J202 5V
-1 -B6
Internal tray
delivery sensor 2 -2 -B5
INEXIT2* When paper has moved past the sensor,
PS7 -3 -B4 ‘0’. (The light-blocking plate is at PS7.)
J160 J202 5V
-1 -B9
Internal tray
-2 -B8
full sensor ITP_FULL When a full condition is detected, ‘0’.
PS29 -3 -B7
J564 J562
J71 J40 J57
-1 -3 J209
Paper end 5V
-2 -2 -4 -A4 When paper has moved past the sensor,
sensor BSP_END*
PS36 -3 -1 ‘0’. (The light-blocking plate is at PS36.)
GND
J72
-1 -6 J209
Stationary paper 5V
sensor -2 -5 -5 -A3
BS_STY* When paper is present over the sensor,
PS37 -3 -4 GND ‘0’. (The light-blocking plate is at PS37.)
J561
Motor -5
24V
driver -4
PCB -3 5V
J210 5V
J58 J93
-1 -A12
Developing
assembly -2 -A11 When the developing assembly is at its
DP_HP*
push-on sensor PS30 -3 -A10 home position, ‘0’. (The light-blocking
plate is at PS30.)
J210 5V
J68 J65
-1 -A3
-2 -A2
DEV_TNR1* The toner inside the developing assembly
TLS1 -3 -A1 is below a specific level, ‘0’.
J66 J210 5V
-1 -A9
Toner bottle
set sensor -2 -A8
TB_ST When the toner bottle is set, ‘1’.
PS31 -3 -A7 (The light-blocking plate is at PS31.)
J140 J204 5V
-1 -B3
Fixing assembly
-2 -B2 When the fixing assembly is set, ‘0’.
sensor PU_ST*
PS32 -3 -B1 (The light-blocking plate is at PS32.)
F02-106-03
DC controller PCB
High-voltage CN302 J210

power supply -6 -B4 HV1_ST* In the presence of an error, ‘0’.
-7 -B3 TR_ST* In the presence of an error, ‘0’.
-8 -B2 SEP_ST* In the presence of an error, ‘0’.
-9 -B1 DBIASST* In the presence of an error, ‘0’.
J125 J206
-5 -A6 C_SZDT3
-4 -A7 C_SZDT2
Cassette 2 paper -A8 See “Identifying the Paper
-3 CS_DGT1
size switch Size” in Chapter 6.
-2 -A9 C_SZDT1
-1 -A10 C_SZDT0
SW4
J126 J206
-5 -B1 C_SZDT3
-4 -B2 C_SZDT2
Cassette 3 paper -3 See “Identifying the Paper
-B3 CS_DGT2
-2 -B4 C_SZDT1
-1 -B5 C_SZDT0
SW5
J127 J206
-5 -B6 C_SZDT3
-4 -B7 C_SZDT2
Cassette 4 power -3 See “Identifying the Paper
-B8 CS_DGT3
-2 -B9 C_SZDT1
-1 -B10 C_SZDT0
SW6
F02-106-04
DC controller PCB
J134A J84A J207 5V

-1 -A6
Cassette 1
-2 -A5
pickup sensor CPF_CHK1* When paper is present over the sensor, ‘0’.
PS21 -3 -A4 (The light-blocking plate is not at PS21.)
J83A J207 5V
-1 -A3
Vertical feed 1
sensor -2 -A2 When paper is present over the sensor,
P_CHK1*
PS9 -3 -A1 ‘0’. (The light-blocking plate is not at PS9.)
J132B J84B J207 5V

-1 -B12
Cassette 2
paper surface -2 -B11 When paper is set, ‘1’.
P_LVL2
sensor PS14 -3 -B10 (The light-blocking plate is not at PS14.)
J133B J207 5V
Cassette 2 -1 -B9
paper absent -2 -B8 When paper is in the cassette, ‘0’.
P_EMP2*
sensor PS18 -3 -B7 (The light-blocking plate is at PS18.)
J134B J207 5V
-1 -B6
Cassette 2
-2 -B5
pickup sensor CPF_CHK2* When paper is present over the sensor, ‘0’.
PS22 -3 -B4 (The light-blocking plate is not at PS22.)
J83B J207 5V
Vertical feed 2 -1 -B3
sensor -2 -B2 P_CHK2* When paper is present over the sensor, ‘0’.
PS10 -3 -B1 (The light-blocking plate is not at PS10.)
F02-106-05
DC controller PCB
J132C J84C J208 5 V

Cassette 3 -1 -A12
paper surface -2 -A11 P_LVL3
When paper is set, ‘1’.
sensor PS15 -3 -A10
(The light-blocking plate is not
at PS15.)
J133C J208 5 V
Cassette 3 -1 -A9
paper absent -2 -A8 P_EMP3* When paper is in the cassette,
sensor PS19 -3 -A7 ‘0’. (The light-blocking plate is
at PS19.)
J134C J208 5 V
Cassette 3 -1 -A6
pickup sensor -2 -A5 CPF_CHK3* When paper is over the sensor,
PS23 -3 -A4 ‘0’. (The light-blocking plate is
not at PS23.)
J83C J208 5 V
Vertical feed 3 -1 -A3
sensor -2 -A2 P_CHK3* When paper is present over the
PS11 -3 -A1 sensor, ‘0’. (The light-blocking
plate is not at PS11.)
J132D J84D J208 5 V

Cassette 4 -1 -B12
paper surface -2 -B11 P_LVL4 When paper is set, ‘1’.
sensor PS16 -3 -B10 (The light-blocking plate is not
at PS16.)
J133D J208 5 V
Cassette 4 -1 -B9
paper absent -2 -B8 When paper is in the cassette,
P_EMP4*
sensor PS20 -3 -B7 ‘0’. (The light-blocking plate is
at PS20.)
J134D J208 5 V
Cassette 4 -1 -B6
pickup sensor -2 -B5 CPF_CHK4* When paper is present over the
PS24 -3 -B4 sensor, ‘0’. (The light-blocking
J83D J208 5 V
-1 -B3
Vertical feed When paper is present over the
-2 -B2 P_CHK4*
4 sensor -B1 sensor, ‘0’. (The light-blocking
PS12 -3
F02-106-06
DC controller PCB
J109 J155 J216 5 V

Cassette 2 -1 -A9
-2 -A8 C2_PL1
paper level
PS27 -3 -A7
sensor 1
See “Detecting the Level of
Paper” in Chapter 6.
J177 J216 5 V
Cassette 2 -1 -A12
paper level -2 -A11 C2_PL2
PS28 -3 -A10
sensor 2
J62 J204
Temperature TH1 -B11
detecting F_TEMP1
-B10
thermistor 1
See “Controlling the Fixing
Temperature TH2 -B13 F_TEMP2 Temperature” in Chapter 7.
detecting -B12
thermistor 2
F02-106-07
Inputs to the Scanner Control PCB (1/2)
Scanner control PCB
J800 J803 CN1

Scanner -1 -22
home position -2 -23 JNT
CRHP
5V
When the scanner is in its home
PS44 -3 -24 JNT 5VG
sensor position, ‘1’.
(The light-blocking plate is at PS44.)
J801 J804 CN1
Copyboard -1 -19
JNT 5V
-2 -20 COVER CLOSE When the copyboard cover/feeder
cover sensor -3 -21 JNT 5VG
PS43 is closed, ‘1’.
(The light-blocking plate is at PS43.)
J807 CN1
-1 -25 S1 OUT1
Original -2 -26 S1 OUT2
sensor 1 PS45 -3 -27 S1 OUT3
-4 -28 JNT 5VG
-5 -29 JNT 5V
J808 CN1
-1 -30 S2 OUT1
Original
-2 -31 S2 OUT2
sensor 2
PS46 -3 -32 S2 OUT3 See “Detecting the Original Size”
-4 -33 JNT 5VG in Chapter 3.
-5 -34 JNT 5V
J809 CN1
Original -1 -35 S3 OUT1
-2 -36 S1 OUT2
sensor 3 S3 OUT3
PS47 -3 -37
-4 -38 JNT 5VG
-5 -39 JNT 5V
F02-106-08
Inputs to the Scanner Control PCB (2/2)

Scanner control PCB
J805 CN4
-1 -1 D5V
-2 -2 A5V
-3 -3 A5V
CCD unit -4 -4 A5V
-5 -5 CCD1 PTG
-6 -6 GND
-7 -7 CCD2 PTG
-8 -8 GND
-9 -9 CCD CP
-10 -10 GND
-11 -11 CCD RS
-12 -12 GND
-13 -13 CCD1 PH
-14 -14 GND
-15 -15 CCD2 PH
-16 -16 GND
-17 -17 E2P CS CMOS
-18 -18 SCLK CMOS
-19 -19 GND
-20 -20 SDATA CMOS
-21 -21 E2P DOUT CCD
-22 -22 GND
J806 CN3
-1 -1 GND(ANG)
-2 -2 CCD1 VA EVN
-3 -3 GND(ANG)
-4 -4 CCD1 VA ODD
-5 -5 GND(ANG)
-6 -6 (NG)
-7 -7 GND(ANG)
-8 -8 A12V
-9 -9 GND(ANG)
-10 -10 A12V
-11 -11 GND(ANG)
-12 -12 A12V
-13 -13 GND(ANG)
-14 -14 A10C
-15 -15 (NG)
-16 -16 GND(ANG)
-17 -17 CCD2 VA EVN
-18 -18 GND(ANG)
-19 -19 CCD2 VA 0DD
-20 -20 GND(ANG)
F02-106-09
Inputs to the DC Driver PCB
DC driver PCB
J111 J556 5V
Cassette 3 -1 -3
paper level -2 -2 C3_PL1
sensor 1 PS39 -3 -1
J178 J556 5V
-1 -6
Cassette 3
-2 -5 C3_PL2
paper level
PS40 -3 -4
sensor 2
J113 J556 5V See “Detecting the Level of

Cassette 4 -1 -9 Paper” in Chapter 6.
sensor 1 PS41 -3 -7
J179 J556 5V
Cassette 4 -1 -12
sensor 2 PS42 -3 -10
F02-106-10
1.6.2 Outputs from the Major PCBs

Outputs from the DC Controller PCB
DC controller PCB
J902
J905 J209 +5 V
Main motor -B8
-B6
MAMTR_LD*
M1
-B7 See “Main Motor Control Circuit”
MAMTR*
in Chapter 2.
CN501 24V
GND
J901
J56 J209
-B1 PEMTRCLK
Feed motor -B2 PEMTR* See “Feed Motor Control Circuit”
M3 -B3 PEMTR_LD* in Chapter 2.
-B4 5V
-B5
CN601
24V
GND
J162
J192 J273 J272 J40 J57 J209
Duplex feed motor -A7 BSMTRCLK
-A6 BSMTR_DIR See “Making Double-Sided
M9
-A5 BSMTR_OE Copies” in Chapter 6.
J29 J215 24V

-3
DC power supply -2 While the fan is rotating, ‘0’.
cooling fan -1 DPCFM*
FM1
24V
J202
J185 J174
-A4
Total copy
counter 1 CNT1 -A3 CPY_CNT1* (when ‘0’, incremented)
24V
J202
J186
-A6
Total copy
counter 2 CNT2 -A5 CPY_CNT2* (when ‘0’, incremented)
F02-106-11
Outputs from the DC Driver PCB (1/3)
DC driver PCB
J154 24V
J108 J559-A3
Cassette 2 When LMTR2* is ‘0’, M5
lift up M5 -A4 LMTR2* turns on to move up the paper.
24V
J112 J559-A5
Cassette 3 When LMTR3* is ‘0’, M6 turns
lift up M6 -A6 LMTR3* on to move up the paper.
24V
J114 J559-A7
Cassette 4 When LMTR4* is ‘0’, M7 turns
lift up M7 A8 LMTR4* on to move up the paper.
J70 J553-8 DPMTR+

When DPMTR+ is ‘1’ and
Developing assembly M10 -9 DPMTR- DPMTR- is ‘0’, M10 turns on.
push-on motor
J302 J301 J110 When WCMTR+ is ‘1’, and
J553-2 WCMTR+ WCMTR- is ‘0’, rotation is
Wire cleaning
M2 -3 WCMTR- clockwise.
motor
24V When WCMTR+ is ‘0’ and
J94J65 J93
J553-6 WCMTR- is ‘1’, rotation is
counterclockwise.
Toner supply M8 -7 HOP_MTR* When ‘0’, M8 turns on.
motor
24V
J80 J86 J559-B8
Registration roller
drive clutch CL6 -B7 FEED_CL5* When ‘0’, MC6 turns on.
24V
J172 J559-B6
Manual feed pickup
roller drive clutch CL1 -B5 MFFEDCL* When ‘0’, MC1 turns on.
J81 24V
Multifeeder J559-B4
pickup roller
DOWN SL1 -B3 MFPU_SL* When ‘0’, SL1 turns on.
solenoid
J121 24V
J560-A9
Delivery
flapper drive SL10 -A8 PF_SL1* When ‘0’, SL10 turns on.
(side) solenoid
J122 24V
Delivery J560-A7
flapper drive SL11 -A6 PF_SL2* When ‘0’, SL11 turns on.
(duplex tray)
solenoid
F02-106-12
DC driver PCB
24V
J131A J128A
J557-6
Cassette 1
reversing roller UP SL6 When ‘0’, SL6 turns on.
-5 REV_SL1*
solenoid
24V
J130B J128B
Cassette 2 J557-8
pickup roller SL3
DOWN solenoid -7 PKUP_SL2* When ‘0’, SL3 turns on.
24V
J143B J557-10
Cassette 2
pickup drive clutch CL3 -9 FEED_CL2* When ‘0’, SL 3 turns on.
24V
J131B
J557-12
Cassette 2
reversing roller UP SL7 -11 REV_SL2* When ‘0’, SL7 turns on.
solenoid
24V
J130C J128C
J558-8
Cassette 3
pickup roller SL4 -7 PKUP_SL3* When ‘0’, SL4 turns on.
DOWN solenoid
24V
J143C J558-10
Cassette 3
pickup drive clutch CL4 -9 FEED_CL3* When ‘0’, CL4 turns on.
24V
J131C
J557-12
Cassette 3
reversing roller UP SL8 -11 REV_SL3* When ‘0’, SL8 turns on.
solenoid
F02-106-13
DC driver PCB
24V
J130D J128D
Cassette 4 J558-2
pickup roller SL5
DOWN solenoid -1 PKUP_SL4* When ‘0’, SL5 turns on.
24V
J143D J558-4
Cassette 4
CL5
pickup drive clutch -3 FEED_CL4* When ‘0’, CL5 turns on.
24V
J131D
Cassette 4 J558-6
reversing roller UP SL9
-5 REV_SL4* When ‘0’, SL9 turns on.
solenoid
24V
J55
J560-B9
Exhaust fan -B8 EXFM* While the fan is rotating, EXFM is ‘0’.
-B7 EXFM_ST* While the fan is rotating, EXFM_SET is ‘0’.
24V
FM2 J147
J560-B6
Delivery feeding
-B5 PEXFM* While the fan is rotating, PEXFM is ‘0’.
assembly cooling fan
-B4 PEXFM_ST* White the fan is rotating, PEXFM_SET is ‘0’.
FM3 24V
J90 J91
J560-A5
Separation blower While the fan is rotating, SEP_BLW is ‘0’.
-A4 SEP_BLW*
-A3 SEPBLWST* While the fan is rotating, SEP_BLWST is ‘0’.
BL1 24V
J180
J561-4
Process assembly While the fan is rotating, P_BLW is ‘0’.
cooling blower -7 P_BLW*
BL2 24V
J301 J110
J553-4
Pre-exposure
lamp -5 E_LAMP* When E_LAMP is ‘0’, it is on.
24V
J331 J92 J91
J560-A2
Transfer lamp
-A1 TR_LAMP* When TR_LAMP is ‘0’, it is on.
24V
J243 J86
J559-B10
Manual feed
reversing roller SL12
B9 MFPU_SL2* When MFPU_SL2 is ‘0’, it is on.
pressure reducing
solenoid
F02-106-14
Outputs from the Scanner Control PCB
Scanner control PCB
24V
CN5
-1
Scanner control -2 FAN ALRM* While the fan is rotating,
circuit PCB cooling -3 FAN ALARM returns ‘0’
fan to the PCB.
FM4
J811 J810 CN1

-1 -1 -1 -2 MTPH U F
M11 -2 -2 -2 -4 MTPF W F See “Scanner Drive System”
-3 -3 -3 -6 MTPH V F in Chapter 3.
Scanner motor
CN 1AP CN1
-1 -4 -4 -7 LMP 24VF
-2 -5 -5 -8 LMP 24VG
Inverter
CN 2AP
power -1 -6 -6 -9 *LMP ON
supply -2 -7 -7 -10 JNT 5VG
See “Turning On and Off the

CN AP CN1 Scanning Lamp” in Chapter 3.
-1 -11 HTR 24VF
-2 -12 HTR 24VF
Carrier -3 -13 LMP 24VG
relay -4 -14 LMP 24VG
-5 -15 JNT 5VG
PCB
-6 -16 THRM IN
F02-106-15
CHAPTER 3
ORIGINAL EXPOSURE
1 Outline of Operations
1.1 Outline
The major components of the original exposure system include the lamp 1 and the lamp 2,
the No. 1 mirror base and the No. 2 mirror base (which form the optical path running from
the copyboard to the CCD), and the scanner motor used to drive the scanner.
The reproduction ratio in main scanning direction is changed as part of image processing
using line memory; that in sub scanning direction is changed by varying the speed at which
the No. 1 mirror mount is moved.
Lamp unit
Exposure lamp unit
Original reading system
Lamp 2 Lamp 1
No. 2 mirror CCD unit
No. 1 mirror
base
No. 3 mirror
No. 2 mirror base Lens CCD PCB
Scanner control
PCB
F03-101-01
1.2 Basic Sequence of Operations of the Original Exposure

System
a. Initial Operations
When power is supplied, the No. 1 mirror base and the No. 2 mirror base move to home
position, and the scanning lamp is turned on, standing by for the next operation. A specific
period of time thereafter, the scanning lamp is turned off (held in home position).
When the heater of the scanning lamp reaches a specific temperature, the scanning lamp is
turned on in home position; then, the No. 1 mirror base and the No. 2 mirror base are moved
so that the standard white plate may be read. The mirror bases are made to go back and forth
twice (for shading correction), and the scanning lamp is turned off (held in home position).
b. Reading an Original
When the Start key is pressed, the scanning lamp is turned on in home position; then, the
No. 1 mirror base and the No. 2 mirror base are moved so that the standard white plate may
be read; they are farther moved so that the original may be read starting at a specific point.
When the original has been read, the No. 1 mirror base and the No. 2 mirror base are re-
tuned to home position and made to stand by for the next operation.
The light from the lamp of the No. 1 mirror base is directed to the surface of the original,
and the reflected light is guided through the No. 1 mirror on the No. 1 mirror base and the
No. 2 mirror on the No. 2 mirror base and then through lenses to ultimately reach the CCD,
in which the light is converted into electric signals (photoconversion).
INTR1 STBY INTR2 SCAN PRINT SCAN PRINT SCAN PRINT LSTR STBY SLEEP
Forward Reverse Forward Reverse Forward Reverse

Scanner motor (M11)
Scanner home position
sensor (MS44)
Lamp 1,2 (FL1,FL2)
F03-102-01
2 Scanner Drive System

The No. 1 mirror base and the No. 2 mirror base are driven by the scanner motor (M11).
The scanner motor is a stepping motor, and is controlled by the scanner control PCB.
The position of the No. 1 mirror base is monitored by the scanner home position sensor
(PS44).
Scanner home position sensor

PS44
No. 2 mirror base

Relay connector
CN1
J800 Lamp unit

J803
(reverse)
Scanner control PCB
(forward)
11
J8
Relay connector
No. 1 mirror base

CN1
J810
Scanner motor
M11
F03-200-01
3 Turning On and Off the Scanning Lamp

3.1 Outline
The scanning lamp is a fluorescent lamp, and is turned on or off by the scanner control
PCB, which has the following functions:
• Pre-heats the lamp.
• Turns on/off the lamp.
Scanner control
PCB
J810
CN1A Inverter Carrier Lamp
CN1 CN2A CN3A CNB CND CNF CNG
power supply relay relay
PCB PCB 1
CNA CNC CNE
(w/ thermistor)
Lamp 2 FL2
Lamp 1 FL1
Lamp heater unit 1

CNH
Lamp unit 2
Lamp CNK
rely CNL
PCB 2 CNM
F03-301-01
3.2 Pre-Heating the Scanning Lamp

The scanning lamp is supplied with power so that its intensity will reach an optimum
level faster than otherwise after the Start key is pressed, and this function is called “pre-heat-
ing.”
3.3 Turning On and Off the Scanning Lamp

The scanning lamp is turned on or off in response to the control signal from the scanner
control PCB, used to determine the voltage applied to the lamp.
3.4 Detecting an Error

If the scanning lamp fails to turn off in response to the control signal or another fault ex-
ists, the scanner control PCB turns off the power supplied to the scanning lamp, and stops
the machine operation.
As a result, the control panel will indicate any of the following codes:
E201
When the power is turned on or while the No. 1 mirror base and the No. 2
mirror base are returned after a reading operation, the home position sensor
does not generate a signal with the motor operating at a specific number of
pulses.
The motor fuse has melted.
E222
The reading of the thermistor is 0 (or less) 2 min after the lamp heater unit
1 is supplied with power.
E225
When the output of the lamp is received by the CCD, the output after A/D
conversion is under the slice line, which is used to ensure a specific level of
image quality.
E226
The scanner control PCB cooling fan is still.
The lamp fuse has melted.
4 Identifying the Sizes of Originals

4.1 Outline
The size of an original may be identified by either of two ways: using reflection-type sen-
sors mounted under the copyboard glass or using the original width/length sensor of the
feeder.
4.2 Identification by Reflection-Type Sensors

Reflection type sensors are mounted under the copyboard glass, and they are used to
monitor specific points of the copyboard at all times.
When an original is placed on the copyboard glass, the sensors either remain off or turn
on, indicating the presence/absence of paper. See T03-402-01.
The following diagram shows the relationship between the points of measurement and
different original sizes. (Each point of measurement is indicted by a circle .)
A2R 594mm
A4,A5R 210
A3,A4R 297
B4,B5R 257
B4R 364
A3R 420
B3R 515
B5 182
A5 148
Original size sensor 1

S1OUT1 S1OUT2 S1OUT3
195.5 233.5 271.5
A5R 148
S2OUT3 S2OUT2 S2OUT1
B5R 182
196.5
A5, A4R 210

234.5
B5, B4R 257

272.5

A4, A3R 297
S3OUT2
337.1
B4, B3R 364

S3OUT1
390.9
A3, A2R 420 mm
F03-402-01 Points of Measurement Used to Identify Original Sizes
The machine’s size detection mechanism is turned on when the copyboard cover is
brought down to 30° turning on the sensor (PS43) mounted at the rear or when the Start key
is pressed.
(side)
Coated white
Copyboard cover
sensor PS43
Reflection-type sensor:
original size sensors
1 through 3
F03-402-02
Breadthwise direction Lengthwise direction

Original Original
Original size Original size sensor 2 size Original size sensor 1 size
sensor 3 sensor 3
S2OUT1 S2OUT2 S2OUT3 S3OUT1 S1OUT1 S1OUT2 S1OUT3 S3OUT2
A2 (420 × 597) √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √
B3 (364 × 515) √ √ √ √ √ √ √
A3 (297 × 420) √ √ √ √ √ √
A3 (420 × 297) √ √ √ √ √ √ √
B4 (257 × 364) √ √ √ √ √
B4 (364 × 257) √ √ √ √ √
A4 (210 × 297) √ √ √ √
A4 (297 × 210) √ √ √ √
B5 (182 × 257) √ √
B5 (257 × 182) √ √
A5 (148 × 210) √
A5 (210 × 148) √
Note: The symbol √ indicates the presence of paper.
T03-402-01 States of the Original Size Sensors
4.3 Detection by the Feeder

The feeder, available as an accessory, is designed to identify the sizes of originals with
reference to the size guide plate (width) and the length of each original (feed length). It
identifies the size of an original at time of pickup, and it is capable of identifying the follow-
ing sizes:
A-configuration: A2 , A3 , A3 , A4 , A4 , A5
For the definition of paper orientation, see 2.6 of Chapter 1.
5 Disassembly/Assembly
The machine has the mechanical features and operations as described herein, and may be
disassembled or assembled as shown; be sure to observe the following whenever disassem-
bling or assembling the machine:
1. Disconnect the power plug for safety before the work.

2. Unless otherwise noted, reverse the steps used to disassemble the machine for assembly.
3. Identify the screws by type (length, diameter) and location.
4. As a rule, do not operate the machine with any of its parts removed.
5. Do not throw toner into fire to avoid explosion.
6. Do not touch the screws that are paint-locked.
5.1 Removing the Copyboard Glass

1) Remove the four screws [1], and detach [3] [1]
the horizontal size plate [2].
2) Remove the four screws [3], and detach
the vertical size plate [4].
3) Remove the copyboard glass [5].
When mounting the horizontal

[4]
size plate, place a sheet of paper
on the glass to make sure that [2]
the horizontal size plate is at a [5]
right angle in relation to the ver-
tical size plate.
When mounting the copyboard F03-501-01
glass, take care not to leave
dust, dirt, or fingerprints on it;
take extra care not to soil the
standard white plate and the
read area. (Dust or dirt, if any,
on the standard white plate can
cause vertical lines on copies.)
5.2 Replacing the Motor/Belt
Do not start the work if the mo-

tor is warm.
1) Remove the rear cover.

2) Disconnect the three connectors [1], and
remove the spring [2]. [1]
[2]
F03-502-01
3) Remove the three screws [3], and detach [5]

the motor [4] together with the motor [7]
fixing [5]. Then, detach the belt [6].
[6]
When mounting the belt and the
motor, pay attention to the en-
gagement of the fixing groove
[7] of the PCB.
[3]
Tighten the three screws [3]
used to keep the motor fixing in [4]
place after mounting the spring
to keep the belt taut. F03-502-02
4) Disconnect the connector [8] from the

motor; then, remove the two screws [9],
and detach the motor from the motor [8]
fixing.
[9]
F03-502-03
5.3 Replacing the Scanning Lamp Unit
The scanning lamp is extremely

hot while it remains powered,
and takes time to cool down af-
ter the power is removed. Be
sure it is cool enough before
starting the work.
1) Remove the copyboard glass.

2) Remove the four screws [1], and detach [2]
the upper front cover [2].
[1]
F03-503-01
3) Lift the No. 1 mirror base [3], and move [4]

it to the cut-off [4] in the side plate.
[3]
[4]
F03-503-02
4) Disconnect the two connectors [5].
[5]
F03-503-03
5) Remove the two screws [6], and detach

the scanning lamp unit [7].
[6]
[7]
F03-503-04
5.4 Replacing the Scanning Lamp/Lamp Heater
The scanning lamp unit is ex-

tremely hot while it remains
powered, and takes time to cool
down after the power is re-
moved. Be sure it is cool
enough before starting the
work.
1) Perform steps 1) through 3) of “Replac-

ing the Scanning Lamp Unit.”
the lamp cover [2].
[2]
[1]
F03-504-01
3) Disconnect the connector [4] of the [4]

lamp heater [3], and disconnect the con- (2P)
nector [6] of the lamp heater S [5].
[6]
(4P)
The lamp heater [3] is found on
the left, and the lamp heater S [3]
[5] is found on the right, when
you face the control panel.
[5]
F03-504-02
4) Turn the scanning lamps [7] [8] 90° and [3]

lift them together with the heater [3] [5]
and the heater S [5].
[8] [7]
F03-504-03
5) Detach the lamp hater from the scan-

ning lamp.
[6]
Take note of the following when [9]
(4P)
mounting the lamp heaters:
1. The lamp heaters have differ-
ent numbers of connector
pins; and the lamp heater
connector [4] has two pins, [4]
(2P)
while the lamp heater S con-
nector [6] has 4 pins.
2. As shown, be sure to fit the F03-504-04
lamp heater so that its edge
is secured in the cut-in [9].
3. Pay attention to the orienta-
tion of the aperture of the
lamp.
5.5 Preparing for the Replacement of the No. 1 Mirror Base

(front of the machine)
The scanning lamp unit is ex-

tremely hot while it remains
powered, and takes time to cool
down after the power is re-
moved. Be sure it is cool
enough before starting the work.

2) Remove the following externals: upper
front cover, upper right cover, rear
cover, left rear cover, left upper cover,
control panel left cover, control panel
right cover, right rear cover, right inside
cover, right rear cover, right inside
cover, right upper cover, right front
cover, upper rear cover, front cover. [2]
3) Remove the screw [1], and detach the
counter cover [2].
Claws are used under the

counter cover.
[1]
F03-505-01

the switch base [3]. [4]
[4]
[3]
F03-505-02
5) Remove the ten screws [6], and detach

[6]
the front panel [5]. [6]
[6]
[6]
[5] [6]
F03-505-03
5.6 Preparing for the Replacement of the No. 1 Mirror Base

(rear of the machine)
1) Remove the two screws (each), and de- [2]
tach the left/right rear cover fixing [1].
[1]
F03-506-01
2) Remove the five screws [4] (each), and

detach the left/right hinge base unit [3].
[4]
The left and right units are not
identical. Pay attention when
[4]
mounting them back.
[3]
F03-506-02
3) Remove the two screws [6], and discon-

[5] [6]
nect the two connectors [7]; then, de-
tach the ADF connector mounting plate
[5].
[7]
[6] [7]
F03-506-03
4) Perform steps 1) through 3) of “Replac-

ing the Motor/Belt.” [9]
5) Loosen the setscrew [8], and detach the
pulley [9] and the bearing [10].
[8]
[10]
[8]
F03-506-04
6) Disconnect the five connectors [11]. [13] [13] [13] [12] [13]
7) Remove the ten screws [13], and detach
the rear panel [12].
[13] [11] [13]
F03-506-05
5.7 Replacing the No. 1 Mirror Base

1) Remove the scanning lamp unit.
the cable retainer [1]; then, remove the [2]
[3]
screw [4], and detach the cable retainer
[3]. [2]
[4]
[1]
F03-507-01
3) Disconnect the connector [5], detach the

lamp carrier cable [7] together with the [6]
[8]
lamp relay PCB [6]; then, detach the [7]
cable guide [8]. (1 screw [9])
[5]
[9]
F03-507-02
4) Remove the scanner cable fixing [10],

and detach the No. 1 mirror base [11]. [10]
(screws [12], 1 each at front and rear)
5) To mount, reverse the above steps, but
with the following in mind:
The No. 1 mirror base must be

positioned using a mirror posi-
tioning tool. (See “Replacing [12]
the Scanner Cable.”) [11]
After all have been assembled,

the orthogonal adjustment is F03-507-03
needed. (See “Making Orthogo-
nal Adjustments.”)
5.8 Replacing the No. 2 Mirror Base

1) Remove the No. 1 mirror base.
2) Move the No. 2 mirror base [1] to the [2]
[3]
left edge. [4]
3) Fit the mirror positioning tool (front,
rear) [2] to the rail [3]. (Use the two
screws [4] of the tool set.)
[2]
[3]
[1]
F03-508-01
4) Engage the No. 2 mirror base [1] with

[5]
the positioning pin [5] of the mirror po-
[1]
sitioning tool [3].
[2]
F03-508-02
5) Fit the pulley clip of the tool set to fix

the scanner cable [6] to the drive pulley.
[8]
For details, see “Replacing the Scanner
Cable.”
6) Remove the two scanner cable springs
[8]. [6]
[7]
F03-508-03
7) Of the two screws used to fix the scan-

ner cable fixing [9] in place, loosen the [9]
one on the side [10] where the scanner [12]
cable is hooked, and remove the other
screw [11]. [11]
8) Turn the scanner cable fixing in the di-
rection of the arrow [12] 90° to detach
the scanner cable from the scanner cable
fixing.
9) Remove the No. 2 mirror base [13].
[13]
[10]
F03-508-04
10) To mount, reverse the above steps but

The No. 1 and No. 2 mirror

bases must be positioned using
a mirror positioning tool. (See
“Replacing the Scanner Cable.”)
After all have been mounted,

orthogonal adjustment is
5.9 Replacing the Scanner Cable Pulley

2) Remove the four screws [2], and dis-
connect the four E-rings [3] then, de-
[2]
tach the four scanner pulleys [1]. [1]
3) To mount, reverse the above steps but
The No. 1 and No. 2 mirror

bases must be positioned using
a mirror position tool. (See “Re-
[3]
placing the Scanner Cable.”)
When all have been assembled,

orthogonal adjustment is F03-509-01
5.10 Replacing the Scanner Cable
When either of the scanner

cables needs replacement, both
front and rear cables must be
replaced at the same time. Fur-
ther, the following tools are re-
quired when routing the scanner
cables:
1. Mirror positioning tool
(FY9-3050-000)
2. Pulley clip (FY9-3049-000)

3) Remove the front and rear scanner
cables.
4) Remove the E-ring [1], and loosen the [2] [3]
setscrew [2]; then, detach the drive pul-
ley [3] (both front and rear).
[1] [2]
[5]
F03-510-01
5) Put the steel ball into the hole in the top

of the drive pulley, and wind it 1.25
times to the right and 5.75 times to the
left so the new scanner cable is wound
on the drive pulley; then, secure it in
place with the pulley clip [4] (both front
and rear).
6) While keeping the cable in place with
the pulley clips, insert the drive pulley
into the drive shaft [5] by reversing the
above steps, and fit the E-ring.
At this time, do not tighten the

setscrew [2].
[7]
[10]
(front)
[9]
[11]
[12]
[8]
(front)
(rear)
Put the steel ball into the

[4] hole in the pulley. Wind it
1.25 times clockwise
(rear) and 5.75 times
counterclockwise
(facing the control panel);
then, fit the pulley clips.
Wind in the same

direction for both front
and rear, NOT symmetric.
F03-510-02
7) Move the No. 2 mirror base [6] to the [8]

[6]
left, and fit the mirror positioning tools
([7] at front, [8] at rear) to position the
No. 2 mirror base.
[13]
8) As shown in the figure, route the scan-
ner cable: [9], [10], [11], [12].
[7]
At this time, make sure that the

two screws [14] of the scanner [14]
cable fixing [13] are loose so
[14]
that the scanner cable is kept
taut.
F03-510-03
9) Remove the pulley clips.

10) Detach the mirror positioning tools
(front and rear).
11) Move the No. 2 mirror base [7] back
[6] [15]
and forth once to even out the scanner
cable in relation to the drive pulley.
12) Move the No. 2 mirror base [6] to the
left edge.
13) Fix the mirror position tool (front) [7]
in place to the rail (front) by tightening
[19]
the screw.
14) Fit the No. 1 mirror base [15] to the po- [16]
sitioning pin [16] of the mirror position-
[7]
ing tool (front) [7] on the right, and
place it on the rail.
F03-510-04
15) Fit the positioning pin [17] on the right

of the mirror position tool (rear) [8] to [18] [15]
the No. 1 mirror base [15], and fix it in [6]
place to the rail (rear) by tightening the
screw.
16) Engage the No. 2 mirror base [6] with
the positioning pin [18] on the left of
the mirror positioning tool (rear) [8].
17) Tighten the two screws [14] of the scan-
ner cable fixing [13].
18) Tighten the setscrew (1 each) of the [8] [17]
drive pulley.
19) Fit the scanner cable fixing [19], and
secure the No. 1 mirror base in place to F03-510-05
the scanner cable.
20) Remove the mirror positioning tool
(front, rear).
21) To mount, reverse the steps under “Re-
placing the No. 1 Mirror Base.”
When all have been assembled,

5.11 Replacing the Carrier Relay PCB

2) Move the No. 1/No. 2 mirror base to the
left edge.
3) Disconnect the connector [1] from the
[4]
cable [2] (2 locations).
[2] [1] [6]
4) Disconnect the connectors [3] [4].
carrier relay PCB [6] and the fixing [7].
6) Remove the screw [8], and detach the [2] [8]
carrier relay PCB [6] from the fixing
[7].
Fit the cut-in in the carrier relay [7] [3]

PCB to the hole in the fixing; at
the same time, check to make
F03-511-01
sure that it is properly in the re-
cess of the fixing.
In addition, be sure to engage
the hook of the fixing on the [4]
hole in the base frame.
[6]
[5]
[7]
F03-511-02
5.12 Replacing the Lamp Relay PCB 1

2) Remove the screw [1], and detach the [2] [1]
cable fixing [2].
3) Disconnect the cable [4] from the con- [5]
[4]
nector [3] (2 locations).
lamp relay PCB 1 [6].
[6]
[3]
F03-512-01
5.13 Replacing the Lamp Relay PCB 2

1) Remove the scanning lamp unit, and de-
tach the lamp cover.
2) Disconnect the connector [1] (4 loca- [2]
tions). [1]
[1]
lamp relay PCB 2 [3].
When mounting the PCB, be

sure to pay attention to the hook [3]
[4].
[4]
F03-513-01
5.14 Replacing the Slider A
If any of the sliders needs re-

placement, be sure to replace all
four sliders. In addition, take
care not to tighten the self-tap-
ping screw more than necessary.

2) Remove the lamp relay PCB 1 [1]. [2]
3) While holding down the No. 1 mirror
[1]
base [2], detach the slider A [4].
[3]
[3]
[4]
[4]
F05-514-01
5.15 Replacing the Slider B

2) As in the case of the slider A, hold
down the No. 2 mirror base, remove the
screws and detach the slider B.
5.16 Replacing the Original Size Sensor

2) Remove the four screws [1], and de- [2]
tached the cable cover [2].
[1]
[1]
F03-516-01
3) Remove the screw [4] and disconnect

the connector [5]; then, detach the origi-
nal size sensor [3] from the cable.
[3] [4]
[3]
[5]
[3]
F03-516-02
5.17 Replacing the Scanner Home Position Sensor

[2]
2) Disconnect the connector [1], and de-
tach the scanner home position sensor
[2].
[1]
F03-517-01
5.18 Replacing the Lamp Carrier Cable

cable fixing [2].
[1]
3) Disconnect the connector [3] (2 loca- [4]
tions), and detach the lamp carrier cable
[4]. [2]
When mounting the lamp carrier

cable, be sure to pay attention to
the orientation of the terminal.
Be sure to push it fully in. In
addition, take care when mount- [3]
ing the cable fixing (hook).
F03-518-01
6 Making Adjustments
<Sequence of Adjustments>
When making adjustments, be sure to go through the following sequence; it is important
to perform all adjustments that follow the desired one:
1. Orthogonal adjustment
↓
2. Reproduction ratio
↓
3. Image read start position
EX 1
If you have adjusted the orthogonal level, you will need to make the following adjust-
ments in the indicated sequence:
1. orthogonal adjustment, 2. reproduction ratio adjustment, and

3. image read start position adjustment
EX 2
If you have adjusted the reproduction ratio, you will need to make the following adjust-
1. ratio adjustment, 2. image read start position
6.1 Making Orthogonal Adjustments

If you have replaced any of the following parts, be sure to check the orthogonal level and
make necessary adjustments:
No. Part name

1 CCD unit assembly
2 No. 1 mirror base
3 Slider A
4 No. 2 mirror base
5 Slider B
6 Scanner cable
7 Scanner cable pulley
T03-601-01
6.1.1 Definition of the Orthogonal Level

The larger of δ1 or δ2 is used to represent the orthogonal level of the lines in question.
A2 original A2 copy
Line of reference
δ1
The corners and the

lines in lengthwise
direction are matched
to obtain δ1.
The corners and the

lines in lengthwise
to obtain δ2.
δ2
F03-601-01
6.1.2 Adjusting the Orthogonal Level

Use Test Pattern No. 1.
Generate Test Pattern No. 1 (A2).
Copy Test Pattern No. 1 (A2).
Put the two sheets together, and obtain δ1 and δ2.
If δ1/δ2 is greater No No adjustment

than 1.4 mm, is needed.
Yes
Loosen the CCD unit fixing screw.
Loosen the CCD unit fixing screw (F03-601-03).
Make adjustments.
Turn the adjusting screw with a flat-bladed screwdriver, and adjust the
orthogonal level.
<Guide to Adjustment Amount>

A full turn translates to about 0.43 mm.
For the direction of the turn, see
F03-601-04.
Make a copy of the test pattern on A2 paper, and check the output.
F03-601-02
Generating PG Test Print No.1 in Service Mode
Start service mode, and make the following selections: COPIER → Test → PG →
TYPE; enter ‘1’, and press the Start key.
Obtaining a Darker PG Test Print

Start service mode, and make the following selections: COPIER → Adjust
REF.
→ EXP-LED → LED-STRB; enter ‘35’, and make a copy. (Be sure to take
notes of the initial setting, and enter it once again after generating the test
pattern.)
Before After
adjustment adjustment
Adjusting pin
Before After
CCD unit fixing screws
F03-601-03 F03-601-04
Adjusting Pin and the Screw Direction of the Turn
CCD Unit Fixing
6.2 Adjusting the Reproduction Ratio

6.2.1 Adjusting the Reproduction Ratio in Main Scanning Direction
1) Make a copy of Test Pattern No. 1, and match the squares of the original and the copy;
adjust the parameters for the reproduction ratio in main scanning direction so that the
displacements match.
Start service mode, and make the following selections: COPIER → Adjust → ADJ-XY
→ ADJ-MAGY; enter the data, and press ‘OK’.
2) Record the new data settings on the service label.
6.2.2 Adjusting the Reproduction Ratio in Sub Scanning Direction

adjust the parameters for the reproduction ratio in sub scanning direction so that the dis-
placements match.
Start service mode, and make the following selections: COPIER → Adjust>ADJ-XY →
ADJ-MAGX; enter the data, and press ‘OK’.
6.3 Adjusting the Image Read Start Position

Execute auto adjustment in service mode so that the read start position on the leading
edge and the read start position on the left edge match those of the original.
1) The machine must remain in standby state, and the copyboard or the DADF must remain
fully open; do not place anything on the copyboard glass.
Start service mode, and make the following selections: COPIER → Function → MISC-
R → ADJ-OFST; then press ‘OK’.
2) The data under ADJUST ADJ-XY ADJ-X, ADJ-Y will be updated at the end of the auto
adjustment.
CHAPTER 4
IMAGE PROCESSING
1 Outline
In the image processing system, the optical image guided to the CCD is converted into
electric signals (image signals) for correction and processing on the PCBs shown in the fol-
lowing diagram; each PCB, at the end of its processing work, sends the result to the PCB
next in line:
CCD1 CCD2
CCD unit
Shading correction
Background color correction
Image processing PCB
Gamma correction
CCD seam correction
Enlargement/reduction
Smoothing Mirror
Image area identification Scanner control PCB
Edge emphasis
Dither processing
Error diffusion
Binary processing
Density processing
Image memory Multiple sets
Shift
Rotation
Reduced/enlarged page
composition
Image exposure system
F04-100-01
2 CCD Unit
2.1 Outline
The CCD consists of CCD1 and CCD2, which are controlled by the image processing
PCB.
CCD unit Image processing PCB
CCD1 Shading correction
CCD control
CCD2 Shading correction
F04-201-01
2.2 CCD
A single CCD is a 1-line image sensor, consisting of 5150 photocells, and each CCD cov-
ers about 1/2 of a line in main scanning direction. The signals photo-converted by its light-
receiving block are subjected to A/D conversion so that they may be expressed in 8-bit data.
2.3 Linking the CCDs

The machine uses a pair of CCDs to collect optical information in main scanning direc-
tion: CCD1 and CCD2. The use of two linked CCDs offers more photocells, enabling higher
resolutions, larger copy sizes, and higher copying speeds.
Main scanning direction
Sub
scanning
direction
CCD2
CCD1
F04-203-01
3 Image Processing PCB

3.1 Outline
The image processing PCB has the following functions: CCD control, shading correction,
background correction, density correction, CCD seam correction, and enlargement/reduc-
tion.
Sensor Image processing PCB Scanner

unit control
PCB
CCD1
CCD
CCD Shading Background seam Enlargement/
control correction correction correction reduction
CCD2
F04-301-01
3.2 Control
The CCD1 and the CCD2 of the CCD unit are controlled by appropriate control signals.
3.3 Shading Correction

The CCD output cannot be uniform even if the original has a uniform density and the
light reflected by it is uniform for the following factors:
• The sensitivity of each CCD pixel is different from that of another.

• The degree of transmission of light through a lens differs between the center and the pe-
ripheral of the lens.
• The intensity of the scanning lamp differs between its middle and edges.
• The scanning lamp deteriorates.
Shading correction is executed to correct these factors. The light reflected by the standard
white plate is stored in SRAM as white reference data, and the intensity occurring when the
scanning lamp is off is stored as black reference data. The image signals are then corrected
when an original is read using these sets of data.
White White
standard
Image Image
signal signal
Black Black
standard
Before shading correction After shading correction
F04-303-01
3.4 Background Correction

When the density adjustmetn is set to auto, background correction (V’/W’) is applied to
the image signal. W’ is varied according to a pre-established coefficient when the image sig-
nal V’ is judged to represent the background color.
3.5 CCD Seam Correction

Processing preceding this block is based on a 1/2 line in scanning direction (pipeline).
This block serves to integrate the 1/2-line image signals into whole-line image signals.
To make the seam between the image from the CCD1 and the CCD2 less conspicuous,
weighting is executed using units of 63 pixels (in main scanning direction).
3.6 Enlargement/Reduction Processing

The read start position in main scanning direction is subjected to processing. The image
signals of adjacent dots are once converted into data representing a resolution eight times as
high (bi-linear correcton). The result is then processed using a built-in conversion table to
skip a specific number of dots.
For sub scanning direction, the speed at which the scanner is moved is varied to change
the width of the scanning line in relation to the original, consequently changing the repro-
duction ratio.
Owing to the limit imposed on the speed of the movement of the scanner, data units are
also skipped when they are written to memory for sub scanning direction if a ratio lower
than 40% is selected.
4 Scanner Control PCB

4.1 Outline
The scanner control PCB has the following functions: smoothing, edge emphasis, density
processing, dither processing, error diffusion, and image memory control.
The use of image memory enables such extra functions as multiple sets, sort, overlay, re-
duced page composition, and rotation.
Image Scanner control PCB

processing Printer
PCB
Dither
processing
Edge Density Image memory
Smoothing
emphasis processing processing
Error
diffusion
Image memory
F04-401-01
4.2 Smoothing
In smoothing, pixels adjacent to the pixel in question are subjected to computation to re-
move noise that may exist in the image.
4.3 Edge Emphasis

In edge emphasis, differences between the pixels adjacent to the pixel in question are used
to generate a thicker line for emphasis.
4.4 Density Processing

The density correction curve used for density processing changes in keeping with the fol-
lowing factors:
• Setting of the Copy Density key on the control panel
• Selection of text, text/photo, or photo mode
a. Copy Density Key

The density correction curve changes as follows according to the setting of the key:
Copy density
Key operation
Darker Lighter
Original density
F04-404-01
b. Text, Text/Photo, Photo Mode

When text mode is selected, the machine uses a density correction curve possessing a
steep angle so as to increase the contrast. When text/photo or photo mode is selected, on the
other hand, a curve that ensures faithful reproduction of the density of the original with
good gradation is selected.
Copy density
Text mode
Text/photo
and photo
mode
Original density
F04-404-02
4.5 Dither Processing

In dither processing, noise (i.e. dither) of a fixed value is added to the image signal, and
the result is subjected to binary processing using a specific slice level. This processing is
used in photo mode.
4.6 Error Diffusion

In error diffusion, noise is added to the image signal, and the result is subjected to binary
processing using a specific slice level. Unlike dither processing, however, the noise is deter-
mined by the image signal itself. This processing is used in text mode and text/photo mode.
4.7 Image Memory Control

The machine is equipped with an image memory, and image data is once stored in the
memory (memory copying) except when making a single copy of a single original (direct
copying).
The image memory may be either a compression memory (in which compressed image
data is stored on a page-by-page basis) or a page memory (in which scanned images are
temporarily stored or developed compressed data is temporarily stored).
Image processing PCB

Image memory (32 MB, standard)
Page Compression
memory memory
Image memory (32 MB, expanded)
Compression memory
Image memory (32 MB, expanded)
Compression memory
F04-407-01

5.1 CCD Unit

2) Move the No. 1 and No. 2 mirror bases [3]
[1] [2]
[1] to the left edge. [3]
3) Remove the eight screws [3], and detach
the shield cover [2].
[3]
F04-501-01

the CCD cable cover [5]. [6]
5) Remove the screw [7] used to secure the [4]
CCD-FG plate [6] in place.
[7]
[5]
F04-501-02
6) Remove the CCD cable 1 [8] and the

CCD cable 2 [9]. [8]
[9]
F04-501-03
7) Remove the two screws [11] and the

two screws [12] (w/ collar); then, detach
the CCD unit [10]. [10]
8) To mount the CCD unit, reverse the
steps used to remove it. Be sure to pay
attention to the orientation of the termi-
[11]
nal when fitting the CCD cable.
After all have been mounted,

[12]
nal Adjustment” in Chapter 3.)
F04-501-04
5.2 Scanner Control PCB

1) Perform steps 1) through 4) under 5.1
for the CCD unit.
2) Disconnect the printer interface connec- [3]
tor [1].
3) Disconnect the connector [2] of the [2]
power supply harness and the connector
[3] of the signal harness.
[1]
[4]
F04-502-01
4) Remove the five screws [4], and detach

[5] [7]
the scanner control PCB/image process- [8]
ing PCB [5]. [6]
nect the connector [7] of the fan [6];
then, detach the scanner control PCB.
[8]
[4]
F04-502-02
5.3 Image Processing PCB

1) Remove the scanner control PCB.
2) Disconnect the connectors of the power
supply harness and the signal harness. [2]
3) Remove the six screws [2], and detach
the image processing PCB [1].
If any additional memory is

mounted, be sure to relocate it
to the new scanner control PCB.
[1]
F04-503-01
5.4 Fan
1) Remove the CCD unit.
2) Disconnect the connector of the fan,
and detach the fan.
3) To mount, reverse the steps used to re-
move it. Take care, however, to mount
the fan so that the side from which air is
exhausted faces out.
5.5 Additional Memory

5.5.1 Installing Additional Memory
1) Remove the shield cover.
2) Install the additional memory to the slot
CN4/CN5 on the image processing
PCB. (If you are installing one memory, Match against the
be sure to use the slot CN4.) groove.
3) Insert the additional memory into the
slot at an angle.
4) Shift down the additional memory.
Be sure to shift it in the direc- CN4

tion of the arrow until a click is
heard. Take care, however, not CN5
to use excessive force.
F04-505-01
5.5.2 Removing the Additional Memory

2) While freeing the claws of the slot, lift
the additional memory to detach.
CN4
Spread
both sides.
CN5
F04-505-02
CHAPTER 5
IMAGE FORMATION
1 Outline of Processes
1.1 Outline
The image formation system is constructed as shown in the following figure.
The image formation system repeats the following processes in sequence to form images:
pre-exposure → primary charging → LED image exposure → development →
transfer/separation
Each of the high-voltage loads is controlled by the high-voltage transformer circuit on the
high-voltage power supply PCB based on the control signal from the DC controller PCB.
Process unit
LED exposure unit

Primary charging assembly
Pre-exposure lamp
Photosensitive Developing
drum assembly
Fixing assembly
HV1 HV2 HV3 OUT2 OUT1 OUT3 OUT4
Separation charging
assembly High-voltage Transfer
transformer circuit charging
Auxiliary lamp assembly
High-voltage power supply PCB
Control signal
DC driver
DC controller PCB
PCB
F05-101-01
5-2
A4, Plain paper, Direct, Copyboard, 1 Set, Cassette 2, Center tray

Main motor (M1)

Feed motor (M3)
1.2 Basic Sequence of Operations

LED exposure
F05-102-01
2 Primary Charging Assembly

2.1 Outline
The machine’s charging method is a corona type, which makes use of a charging wire.
The following circuit is associated with the control of the primary charging assembly, and
it has the following functions:
1. Turning on and of the current of the primary charging assembly.
2. Controlling the current of the primary charging assembly to a specific level (constant
current control).
3. Cutting off the output of the primary charging assembly in response to a short circuit.
4. Monitoring the output of current from the primary charging assembly.
The level of charging of the photosensitive drum is proportional to the level of current
that flows to it. The machine uses the following circuitry to make sure that a specific level of
charging potential may be obtained even when the level of corona charging fluctuates be-
cause of changes in the environment.
The output of the corona current is turned on and off in response to the signal HV1 from
the DC controller PCB.
J210-B9 HV1 CN302-1

DC controller High-voltage power
J210-B4 HV1_ST CN302-6 Output
PCB supply PCB
F05-201-01
2.2 Operations
1. When HV1=1, the high-voltage power supply (HVP1) is off.
When HV1=0, the high-voltage power supply (HVP1) is on.
2. If, for instance, corona current of a level higher than specified flows from the primary
charging assembly because of a change in the environment, the current control circuit of
the high-voltage power supply PCB operates to decrease the output voltage, thereby
controlling the flow of current to the primary charging assembly to a specific level.
3. In the event of a short circuit in the high-voltage output or electrical leakage, the ma-
chine will detect overcurrent and will cut off the output immediately. The machine is re-
set when HV1=1 (off).
4. The current output to the primary charging assembly is normal: HV1_SET=1.
The current output to the primary charging assembly is faulty, HV1_SET=0.
2.3 Checking the Operations

Connect the meter to the check points CP-11 and CP-COM on the PCB.
Operate the primary charging assembly using PART-CHK in service mode or by making a
copy.
If the primary charging assembly is operating normally, about 1 V of voltage must be at
the check points. The voltage is 0 V when the primary charging assembly remains at rest.
CP21 CP22 High-voltage power supply

PCB
CP11
CP42
CP41
CP31
CP-COM
CP32
F05-203-01
2.4 Cleaning Mechanism for the Primary Charging Wire

2.4.1 Outline
The machine is equipped with a mechanism that automatically cleans the primary charg-
ing assembly.
The primary charging wire is cleaned by turning a screw (driven by a small-size motor)
that rotates to move pads back and forth.
The primary charging wire is cleaned under the following conditions:

1. The surface temperature of the roller of the fixing assembly is 40°C or lower (immedi-
ately after the main power switch is turned on).
2. When ‘adjust /clean’ in user mode is executed to clean the wire.
3. The cleaning mode is executed. (The intervals may be 100, 200, or 300 counts, i.e., the
number of copying operations, in service mode: OPTION>BODY>WIRE-CLN. At time
of shipment, '0' is selected so that cleaning is executed only immediately after the main
power switch is turned on.)
Cleaning pads
Primary charging wires
Worm gear
Screws
Small-size motor
F05-204-01
3 Transfer Charging Assembly

3.1 Outline
The machine’s transfer method is a static transfer type that uses corona charging.
The following circuitry is used to control the transfer charging assembly, and it has the
following functions:
1. Turning on and off the current of the transfer charging assembly.
2. Controlling the current of the transfer charging assembly to a specific level (constant
current control).
3. Controlling the current of the transfer charging assembly to a specific level.
4. Cutting off the output in response to a short circuit.
5. Detecting the level of current of the transfer charging assembly.
The transfer characteristics are determined by the level of transfer current flowing to the
transfer charging assembly, and the output of the machine’s transfer charging assembly is
controlled so that stable transfer characteristics may be obtained even if the level of corona
charging fluctuates because of changes in the environment.
The output of the corona current is turned on or off using the signal HV_XFR from the
DC controller PCB.
J210-B8 HVXFR CN302-2
DC controller J211-3 TR_ANLG CN303-2 High-voltage power

Output
PCB supply PCB
J210-B3 TR_ST CN302-7
F05-301-01
3.2 Operations
1. When HV_XFR=1, the high-voltage power supply (HVP2) is off.
When HV_XFR=0, the high-voltage power supply (HVP2) is on.
2. If, for instance, corona current of a level higher than specified flows from transfer charg-
ing assembly because of a change in the environment, the current control circuit of the
high-voltage power supply PCB operates to decrease the output voltage, thereby con-
trolling the flow of current to the transfer charging assembly to a specific level.
3. Controlling the Level of the Current of the Transfer Charging Assembly
The voltage level of the TR_ANLG signal is used to control the level of current let to
flow to the transfer charging assembly.
The voltage level of the TR_ANLG signal is set in service mode.
chine will detect the resulting overcurrent and will cut off the output.
The machine is reset when HV_XFR=1 (off).
5. When the output of current to the transfer charging assembly is normal, TR-ST=1.
When the output of current to the transfer charging assembly is faulty, TR_SET=0.

Connect the meter to the check points CP-21 and CP-22.
Operate the transfer charging assembly using PART-CHK in service mode or by making a
copy.
If the transfer charging assembly is operating normally, a voltage of about 1 V must be
present at the check points. The voltage is 0 V while the transfer charging assembly is at
rest. (For the high-voltage power supply PCB, see F05-203-01.)
4 Separation Charging Assembly

4.1 Outline
The machine’s separation method is a static elimination type that uses corona charging.
The following circuitry is associated with the control of the separation charging assembly,
and it has the following functions:
1. Turning on and off the voltage of the separation charging assembly.
2. Controlling the voltage of the separation charging assembly to a specific level.
3. Controlling the output in response to a short circuit.
4. Monitoring the output of the separation charging assembly.
The output of the corona voltage is turned on or off using the signal HV_SEP from the
DC controller PCB.
J210-B7 HV_SEP CN302-3

Output
PCB J210-B2 SEP_SP CN302-8 supply PCB
F05-401-01
4.2 Operations
1. When HV_SEP=1, the high-voltage power supply (HVP3) is off.
When HV_SEP=0, the high-voltage power supply (HVP3) is on.
2. To ensure that only the primary voltage of the high-voltage current is kept to a specific
level, the return voltage of the primary side is fed to the voltage control circuit, thereby
controlling the drive circuit of the separation charging assembly.
chine will detect the resulting overcurrent and will stop the output.
The machine is reset when HV-SEP=1.
4. If the output of current to the separation charging assembly is normal, SEP-SET=1.
If the output of current to the separation charging assembly is faulty, SEP-SET=0.

Connect the meter to the check points CP-31 and CP-32 on the PCB.
Operate the separation charging assembly using PART-CHK in service mode or by mak-
ing a copy.
If the separation charging assembly is operating normally, a voltage of about 4 V must be
present at the check points. The voltage is 0 V when the separation charging assembly is not
operating. (Fro the high-voltage power supply PCB, see F05-203-01.)
4.4 Separation Auxiliary Exposure

The separation auxiliary exposure mechanism is located under the separation charging as-
sembly, and is used to increase the separation efficiency by removing the potential of the
photosensitive drum.
DC controller J560-A1 TR_LAMP J331-2 Auxiliary exposure

PCB PCB
F05-404-01
5 Developing Assembly
5.1 Outline
The machine’s developing assembly uses a contact developing method (with a length of
contact of 5 to 6 mm), in which the developing cylinder is brought into firm contact with the
photosensitive drum (by means of a rubber roller).
The machine's developing system is also equipped with a mechanism to collect toner re-
maining from transfer while development takes place (photosensitive drum cleaning mecha-
nism). The machine's highly efficient transfer process leaves little toner at the end of trans-
fer, whose amount, if any, will not affect the charging/exposure process that follows.
Any residual toner will be collected into the developing assembly during the develop-
ment, not allowing the previous image to affect the next image and, ultimately, enabling a
cleanerless cycle of operations.
The major components of the developing assembly are the developing cylinder, supply
roller, roller blade, toner level sensor (TLS1), and toner stirring rod. All of these except the
sensor are rotated by the drive from the main motor (M1).
When the developing assembly push-on motor (M1) rotates, the developing locking cam
rotates, and the encoder attached to the shaft of the cam brings the developing assembly to a
stop at a specific position so that it may be locked in place.
The toner is a non-magnetic, single-component toner, and is deposited in a thin layer on
the developing cylinder by the work of static electricity.
M1
Roller blade
Roller blade middle bias
High-voltage power supply
Bias control signal Roller blade edge bias

DC controller PCB
Bias polarity signal Photosensitive

drum
Negative bias
level control signal
Negative polarity Developing roller bias

output detection
Supply roller bias
Toner level detection signal
(DEV_TNR1)
Developing cylinder Toner level sensor
Supply roller
F05-501-01
5.2 Controlling the Developing Bias

5.2.1 Outline
Of the components of the developing assembly, a developing bias is applied to the devel-
oping cylinder, supply roller, roller blade edges, and roller blade middle.
When the drum makes an initial rotation, a positive output is applied from when the area
with primary charging potential reaches the nip area of the developing assembly, thereby
preventing deposit of toner on the photosensitive drum. Then, the output is made negative
from the area where primary charging potential exits to develop the exposed image area.
Thereafter, a positive output is applied from when the area where primary charging stops
reaches the nip area; this continues until the last rotation ends and the main motor stops.
The machine uses negative toner so that the image is developed on the photosensitive
drum when the drum is positive (in relation to the developing cylinder); when the photosen-
sitive drum is negative (in relation to the developing cylinder), on the other hand, the toner
is collected to the developing sleeve from the drum, and the drum is cleaned.
power supply
High-voltage
LED exposure unit
Primary charging
assembly
Time t
Developing cylinder
Photosensitive
drum
F05-502-01
Initial Last
rotation Copying rotation
Main motor M1
Primary charging
assembly
Developing bias
output control
+350V
Positive
Developing bias
polarity Negative -250V
t t
t: Time (from primary charging
assembly to developing sleeve)
Area of Area of
exposure exposure
during during
Drum charging copying copying Developing
potential in relation 0V Development bias
to the position of the
developing sleeve
Cleaning
-750 V
(approx.)
F05-502-02
5.2.2 Functions of the Developing Biases

A developing bias of a different voltage level is applied to the supply roller, roller blade
edge, and roller blade middle (in relation to the developing cylinder), each having its own
function.
Supply roller Potential −350 V in relation to the developing cylinder

Function Collects the toner remaining on the developing
sleeve after development; the toner is replaced with
new toner for a new supply.
Roller blade (middle) Potential Same as that on the developing cylinder
Function Deposits a thin, even layer of toner on the
developing cylinder.
Roller blade (ends) Potential +400 V in relation to the developing cylinder.
Function Collects toner remaining on the developing cylinder,
thereby preventing the formation of a layer of toner
on the edges of the developing cylinder.
The toner is colleted by the roller blade so that no layer of toner will be formed on the
edges of the developing cylinder.
Scraper
Roller blade
Supply roller
Edge of the developing

cylinder
F05-502-03
5.3 Developing Bias Control Circuit

5.3.1 Outline
A DC bias is applied to the developing cylinder during copying, and the DC bias is kept
to about −250 V.
5.3.2 Developing Bias Control Circuit

The following circuitry is used to control the developing bias, and has the following func-
tions:
1. Turning on and off the developing bias.
2. Switching the developing bias between positive and negative.
3. Controlling the voltage of the negative developing bias to a specific level.
4. Cutting the output in response to a short circuit.
5. Detecting a negative output of the developing bias output 2.
J210-B6 D_BIAS* CN302-4 Output 1

J210-B5 BAISCH* CN302-5 Output 2
PCB J211-1 BN_ANLG CN303-3 supply PCB Output 4
J210-B1 BDBIAS_ST CN302-9
F05-503-01
5.3.3 Operations
1., 2. Turning on and off the developing bias.
When D_BIAS=0, the developing bias is ON.
When BIASCH=1, the developing bias is positive.
When BIASCH=0, the developing bias is negative.
When D_BIAS=1, the developing bias is OFF.
3. Controlling the Voltage of the Negative Developing Bias to a Specific Level
The voltage level of the BN_ANLG signal is used to control the voltage level of the
negative developing bias.
The voltage level of the BN_ANLG signal, in turn, is set in service mode.
4. If the output of the developing bias 2 short-circuits or electrical leakage occurs, the ma-
chine will detect overcurrent and immediately cut off the output. The machine may be
reset when D_BIAS=1.
5. If the negative output of the developing bias output 2 is normal, DBIASST=1.
If the negative output of the developing bias output 2 is faulty, DBIASST=0.
5.3.4 Checking the Operations

Connect the positive probe of the meter to the check point CP-41 and the negative probe
to CP-42.
Using PART-CHK in service mode, generate a positive or negative developing bias; or
make a single copy. The developing bias will be positive at first, change to negative, and
then change back to positive before the operation stops.
As long as the output of the developing bias is normal, the voltage must be about +0.35 V
when the bias is positive and about −0.25 V when negative.
5.4 Developing Assembly Locking Mechanism

The machine’s developing cylinder is made of a rubber-like material.
The machine is designed so that the developing assembly is pushed by means of a cam
from its rear, and it uses a mechanism to allow for a specific length running across the area
of contact between the photopositive drum and a rubber roller.
If the rubber roller is forced against the photosensitive drum when the machine remains
out of use for a long period, it can cause lines or dents in the surface of the photosensitive
drum. To avoid such a problem, the developing assembly push-on motor is rotated using the
charge stored in advance in the capacitor, thereby releasing the pressure cam and, conse-
quently, the developing assembly from the photosensitive drum.
If the machine is left alone for a long time (about 3 months or more) in a high-tempera-
ture/-humidity environment, certain ingredient of the toner can adhere to the area of contact
between the developing cylinder and the supply roller/roller blade, causing lines on copies.
If such a problem is noted, dry wipe the white lines on the developing cylinder with lint-free
paper, thus removing the deposit.
5.5 Controlling the Supply of Toner

5.5.1 Outline
A piezoelectric oscillation type toner sensor (TLS1) is mounted inside the developing as-
sembly to monitor the level of toner inside it.
When the toner inside the developing assembly is at a specific level or more, the output of
the toner sensor is ‘1’; when it drops under the level, output will be ‘0’.
When the absence of toner continues for 4 sec or more while the main motor is operating,
the condition will be detected and the toner supply motor will be turned on to supply toner
from the toner cartridge to the developing assembly. The supply of toner is stopped when
the presence of toner is detected.
In the absence of toner, supply of toner is continued for 5 sec and then is stopped; if the
absence continues for 4 sec or more thereafter, the supply is started once again. The supply
is always stopped as soon as the main motor stops.
5.5.2 Absence of Toner

If the toner sensor detects the absence of toner for 90 sec or more (in terms of a cumula-
tive value over a period during which the main motor is operating), the machine will assume
the absence of toner in the toner cartridge, indicating a message on the control panel to
prompt the replacement of the toner cartridge.
The count may increase by as much as 200 (equivalent of 100 copies of A2, horizontal,
6% chart) after the absence of toner is identified and the Replace Later key is pressed; how-
ever, the message will appear on the control panel at the end of each job.
When as much as 200 counts have been taken after the identification of the absence of
toner, the machine will disable the Start key.
5.5.3 Resetting (toner absent)

When the machine identifies the absence of toner, it will execute a specific operation to
determine whether it may allow the condition to be reset after “the front door is opened, the
toner cartridge is slid out and then in, and the front door is closed” or after “the power is
turned off and then on.”
The machine turns on the toner supply motor to supply toner from the toner cartridge to
the developing assembly; if the developing assembly becomes full with toner, the machine
will reset itself.
6 LED Exposure
6.1 Outline
Of the LEDs on the LED exposure unit, those over the area on the surface of the photo-
sensitive drum corresponding to the black area of the original turn on to remove the charge
from the area.
On the other hand, those LEDs outside the area in question (i.e., corresponding to the
white area of the original) remain off, leaving the charge on the drum.
LED exposure unit
Optical image
LED dark area LED light area
F05-601-01 F05-601-02
CN2 J221 PCB

LED exposure unit
Images
DC
DC5V DC5V controller
CN1 CN3 PCB
Power supply
J903
DC relay PCB
LED
Selfoc lens array
F05-601-03 F05-601-04

7.1 Process Unit

1) Open the front cover [1].
[1]
F05-701-01
2) Turn the toner cartridge [2] counter-

clockwise to release.
[2]
F05-701-02
3) Turn the lever [3] counterclockwise to

release the feed unit [4].
[4]
[3]
F05-701-03
4) Remove the three screws [5], and detach

the process cover [6].
[6]
[5]
F05-701-04
5) Slide out the process unit [7].
[7]
F05-701-05
7.2 Developing Assembly

7.2.1 Removing the Developing Assembly
1) Slide out the process unit.
2) Loosen the two screws [1], and pull the
developing assembly fixing plate [2]
fully in the direction of the arrow.
3) Disconnect the connector [3].
[3]
[2]
[1]
F05-702-01
4) Holding the developing assembly with

your hands at the designated locations
of the assembly, lift it to detach.
F05-702-02
For notes on how to hold the developing

assembly, see the diagram on the right.
Hold here.
Do not hold
here (motor).
F05-702-03
Rear of the Developing Assembly
Do not hold here.
Hold here (bottom).
F05-702-04
Front of the Developing Assembly
You must never hold the devel-

oping assembly by the top of
the toner cartridge slot or the
motor cover area found at the
rear.
7.2.2 Mounting the Developing Assembly

1) Check to make sure that the developing
assembly fixing plate [1] is released.
[1]
F05-702-05
2) Place the developing assembly so that

the ribs on its back are inside the guide
[2] of the process frame.
[3]
[2]
F05-702-06
3) Move the developing assembly to the

drum side, and check to make sure that
the pin of the developing assembly is in
the block [3] (both sides).
4) Move the developing assembly fixing

plate [4] to the front to fix it in place.
5) Connect the connector [5].
[5]
[4]
F05-702-07
6) If the gear of the developing assembly

and the gear of the drum are not en-
gaged, turn the drum for engagement.
If the process unit cannot be

fully put back when mounting it
back to the machine, slide it
back out and then turn the drum
shaft slightly by hand for
smooth insertion.
Or, remove the developing as-
sembly, rotate the photosensi-
tive drum, and then push the
process unit into the machine.
Repeat this until the process
unit settles fully inside; then,
mount the developing assembly.
7.2.3 Toner Level Sensor

1) Remove the developing assembly.
2) Remove the two screws [1] on the back [2] [3]
of the developing assembly.
3) Disconnect the connector [2], and re-
move the toner level sensor [3].
[1]
F05-702-08
Take care. Removing the toner

level sensor will let the toner to
flow out of the developing as-
sembly.
7.2.4 Toner Bottle Set Sensor

2) Disconnect the two connectors [1] [2] [1]
on the right side of the back the devel-
[2]
oping assembly.
F05-702-09
3) Remove the seven screws [3], and de- [3]

tach the cover [4].
[3]
[4]
F05-702-10
4) Remove the sensor [5] found on the [5]

right side of the inside of the machine.
F05-702-11
7.2.5 Toner Supply Motor

[1] [3]
the motor [3].
[2]
F05-702-12
7.2.6 Scraper
1) Take out the developing assembly.
2) Remove the four screws [1] from the
front of the developing assembly, and
detach the roller cover [2].
[1]
[2]
F05-702-13
3) Remove the five screws [3], and detach

the scraper [4].
[3]
[4]
F5-702-14
7.2.7 Developing Cylinder

1) Remove the developoing assembly.
2) Remove the scraper.
3) Remove the three screws [1] from the
rear of the developing assembly, and
remove the screw [2]; then, detach the [2]
bias block [3].
4) Remove the C-ring [4], and remove the [1] [5]
washer; then, detach the gear [5].
Remove the E-ring [6], and detach the
bearing [7]. [7]
Take care not to drop the parallel pin. [6]
[1] [3] [4]
F05-702-15
5) Loosen the two screws [8] on the front

of the developing assembly; then, re-
move the gear [9], E-ring [10], and
bearing [11].
[8]
[9]
[11]
[10]
[8]
F05-702-16
6) Slide out the shaft of the developing

cylinder [12] found near the rear of the
developing assembly.
[12]
F05-702-17
7) Move the developing cylinder to the

rear to detach.
Tilt the developing assembly

toward the rear. If you try to re-
move the developing cylinder
while keeping the developing
assembly level, a large amount
of toner will flow out of it.
7.2.8 Removing the Toner

1) Disconnect the connectors [1] [2], and
remove the wire clamp [3]; then, free
[5]
the harness [4] from the cartridge cover [4]
[5]. [1]
[2]
[3]
F05-702-18
2) Remove the two screws [6] and the five [7]

screws [7]; then, detach the cartridge
cover [5] and the cartridge base [8].
[5] [6]
F05-702-19
[8]
F05-702-20
3) Obtain a large bag, and turn over the

developing assembly to empty the toner
into it.
The toner tends to fly astray.

Avoid performing this work in a
windy area.
7.2.9 Removing the Supply Roller and the Roller Blade

1) Remove the developing cylinder.
2) Empty the toner.
3) Remove the screws [1] (2 each at front [1]
and rear), and detach the blade pressure [3]
spring [2] and the stay [3].
[2]
[1]
[2]
F05-702-21
4) Remove the E-ring [4] and the double

gear [5]; then, loosen the two set screws
each, and detach the 28T gear [6] and
the 34T gear [7].
[6]
[7]
[5] [4]
F05-702-22
5) Remove the E-ring [8] and the three [9]

[10]
screws [9]; then, remove the screw [10],
and detach the auxiliary side plate [11].
[8]
[11] [9]
F05-702-23
6) Remove the E-ring [12] (1 each); then,

detach the supply roller [13] and the
roller blade [14].
[12]
[14]
[13] [12]
F05-702-24
On each side of the supply

roller are found two plastic film
washers, while on each side of
the roller blade is found one
plastic film washer.
7.2.10 Replacing the Stickers

1) Remove the developing cylinder.
2) Empty the toner.
3) Remove the supply roller and the roller
blade.
4) Remove the stickers (8) [2], stickers (3)
[4]
[3], toner receptacle [4], and stickers (9)
[5] from the developing frame [1].
[1]
[2]
[3]
F05-702-25
[5]
F05-702-26
5) Clean the areas where the stickers have

been removed; then, attach new stickers.
6) Remove the stickers (10) [7], stickers

(11) [8], stickers (3) [9], and toner re- [9]
ceptacle [4] from the auxiliary side [4]
plate [6].
[8]
[7]
[6]
F05-702-27
7) Clean the areas where the stickers have

been removed; then, attach new stickers.
Be sure to clean the area where

the stickers are attached thor-
oughly, making sure it is com-
pletely free of dust and oil.
When attaching the stickers, be
sure to fully press the stickers to
ensure good adhesion.
7.3 Photosensitive Drum

3) Holding the photosensitive drum [1] by
its both sides, and take it out.
[1]
F05-703-01
4) Open the shipping box [2] containing

the photosensitive drum. [3]
5) Holding it by the flange [3], take it out
of the box.
[2]
F05-703-02
6) Fit the process unit with its gear side

toward the rear.
Take care not to damage the

photosensitive drum.
The photosensitive drum is
highly susceptible to light, and
exposure to room light is
enough to cause white spots or
black lines. Observe the follow-
ing when handling the drum:
• When removing a jam, try to
finish the work within 5 min.
• If the process unit must be
kept out of the machine dur-
ing servicing work, keep it F05-703-03
protected by means of fresh
copy paper.
• Do not touch the surface of
the photosensitive drum.
7.3.1 Cleaning
If the surface of the photosensitive drum
is soiled, clean it with a flannel cloth coated
with toner. Do NOT use paper, lint-free or
otherwise.
Do not dry wipe or do not use

solvent to clean the photosensi-
tive drum.
Never use drum cleaning pow-
der.
7.4 Primary Charging Assembly

7.4.1 Removing the Primary Charging Assembly
1) Slide Out the process unit.
2) Remove the screw [1] (1 each on both
sides), and take out the primary charg-
ing assembly [2].
[1]
[2]
F05-704-01
7.4.2 Replacing the Primary Charging Wire

1) Remove the primary charging assembly.
2) Remove the spring [1] used to keep the [1]
grid plate taut.
F05-704-02

the connecting plate [2]; then, detach
the grid plate [4]. [4] [2]
[3]
[3]
F05-704-03

the head cover [5].
[5]
[6]
F05-704-04
[6] [5]
F05-704-05
5) Remove the wire spring [7], and replace [7]

the charging wire [8].
[8]
F05-704-06
Take care not to lose the wire

spring. The machine is not
equipped with a height adjust-
ing mechanism.
7.4.3 Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Motor

2) Free the hook claw [1], and detach the
motor cover [2]. [4]
3) Disconnect the motor connector [3].
4) Remove the cleaning motor.
[3] [1]
[1]
[2]
F05-704-07
7.5 Transfer/Separation Charging Assembly

7.5.1 Removing the Transfer/Charging Assembly
1) Open the front cover.
2) Remove the screw [1].
3) Shift the lever [2] slightly, and pull out [1]
the transfer/separation charging assem-
bly [3].
[3]
[2]
F05-705-01
Do not shift back the lever

while pulling out the transfer/
separation charging assembly;
otherwise, the gear at the rear
can damage the drum.
7.5.2 Replacing the Transfer/Separation Charging Wire

1) Remove the transfer/separation charging
assembly.
2) Push the claw [1], and detach the co- [2]
rona guard [2].
The corona guard tends to break

easily. Take extra care when
handling it. [1]
F05-705-02
3) Remove the head cover [3]. (both sides) [3]
F05-705-03
4) Remove the wire spring [4], and replace [4]

the charging wire [5]. [5]
F05-705-04
Take care not to lose the wire

spring.
4) Turn the screw to adjust the height of

[6]
the charging wire. Be sure that it is of
the same height between the rear and
the front.
C
A=13±0.2mm
B=12±0.2mm
[6] C=10±0.2mm
F05-705-05
7.6 Main Motor

1) Disconnect the power plug; then, detach
the rear cover, DC controller, and DC
controller PCB (together with the DC
controller base).
2) Remove the spring [1]. [4]
3) Loosen the four screws [2], and detach [1]
the timing belt [3].
[3]
When mounting, be sure to
tighten the four screws while
the belt is kept taut by the
spring.
[2]
4) Disconnect the connector [4], and free
the harness from the clamp. F05-706-01
5) Loosen the setscrew [5], and detach the

pulley [6]. [6] [7]
the motor base [8]. [7]
7) Remove the motor together with the [7]
motor base.
[5] [8]
[7]
F05-706-02
7.7 Developing Assembly Push-On Motor

1) Disconnect the power plug; then, re-
move the rear cover, DC controller
PCB, and DC controller PCB (together
with the DC controller base).
2) Remove the three screws [1], and dis-
connect the connector [2]; then, remove
the developing assembly push-on motor [3]
[3].
[2]
[1]
F05-707-01
7.8 LED Exposure Unit

1) Remove the process unit.
2) Disconnect the two connectors [1] of
the harness of the power supply, and [2] [1]
disconnect the signal connector [2]. [1]
3) Remove the two screws [3], detach the
[6]
LED head [4] by pulling it to the front. [3]
At this time, do not remove the

screw [6] next to it. [5]
Unless properly handled, the
LED exposure unit can go out [4]
of focus. Take care no to touch
the Selfoc lens.
F05-708-01
4) Push in the LED exposure unit along

the rail slowly until a click is heard to
indicate engagement with the key hole
at the rear; then, temporarily tighten the
two screws [3].
5) Connect the connector of the harness.
6) Mount the processing unit; with the unit [3]

closed, force the protrusion [7] of the
LED exposure unit in the direction of
the arrow (lower right), and fully
tighten the two screws [3] that have
been temporarily tightened.
If you have replaced the LED [7]

exposure unit with a new one,
consider the possibility of varia-
tion, which can lead to a differ-
ent copy density. As necessary, F05-708-02
adjust the period of LED expo-
sure.
Change the setting in service

mode as necessary:
ADJUST>EXP-LED>LED-
STRB.
CHAPTER 6
PICKUP/FEED
1.1 Outline
The machine’s pick-up/feed system includes a three-cassette unit, duplex unit, and
multifeeder, and the machine uses center reference, in which paper is moved along the cen-
ter of the machine’s pickup/feed path.
After it is picked up from the cassette or the multifeeder, a sheet of paper is controlled so
that it will match the leading edge of the image on the photosensitive drum with reference to
the output of the paper entry sensor 1 (inside), and is then sent to the transfer, separation,
feed, and fixing processes to finally reach the delivery tray.
As many as 22 sensors are used to monitor the movement of paper.
F06-101-01 shows the arrangement of sensors (electric input components), and F06-101-
02 provides a conceptual diagram to show how motors and clutches/solenoids (electric out-
put components) are driven; the mechanisms used to drive the cassettes are excluded.
Sensor notation Name Signal Pin notation

PS1* multifeeder paper sensor MP_ENT J216-B2
PS2* paper entry sensor 1 (inside) P_ENT1 J216-B5
PS3 paper entry sensor 2 (outside) P_ENT2 J216-B8
PS4* separation sensor 1 P_SEPR1 J204-B8
PS5* fixing outlet sensor F_EXIT J202-A8
PS6* internal tray delivery sensor 1 I_EXIT1 J202-B2
PS7* internal tray delivery sensor 2 I_EXIT2 J202-B5
PS8* delivery sensor O_EXIT J204-B5
PS9* vertical feed 1 sensor P_CHK1 J207-A2
PS10* vertical feed 2 sensor P_CHK2 J207-B2
PS11* vertical feed 3 sensor P_CHK3 J208-A2
PS12* vertical feed 4 sensor P_CHK4 J208-B2
PS18 cassette 2 paper absent sensor P_EMP2 J207-B8
PS19 cassette 3 paper absent sensor P_EMP3 J208-A8
PS20 cassette 4 paper absent sensor P_EMP4 J208-B8
PS21* cassette 1 pickup sensor CPF_CHK1 J207-A5
PS22* cassette 2 pickup sensor CPF_CHK2 J207-B5
PS23* cassette 3 pickup sensor CPF_CHK3 J208-A5
PS24* cassette 4 pickup sensor CPF_CHK4 J208-B5
PS36* paper end sensor BSP_END J208-A4
PS37* paper stationary sensor BSP_STY J209-A3
PS38* duplex inlet sensor BSP_ENT J202-B11
* Used to detect jams.
T06-101-01 Pickup/Feed Sensors
PS7
PS6
PS5 PS3
PS8
PS4 PS2
PS38 PS1
PS21 PS9
PS37
PS36 PS10
PS18
PS22
PS11
PS19 PS23
PS12
PS20
PS24
F06-101-01 Pickup/Feed Sensors
Load Name
CL1 Multifeeder
CL3 Cassette 2 pickup clutch
CL6 Registration roller clutch
SL1 Manual pickup roller DOWN solenoid
SL3 Cassette 2 pickup roller DOWN solenoid
SL6 Cassette 1 reversing roller UP solenoid
SL10 Delivery flapper solenoid
SL11 Delivery flapper solenoid (duplex tray)
SL12 Manual feed reversing roller de-pressure reducing solenoid
M3 Feed motor
M9 Duplex feed motor
M5 Cassette 2 lifter UP motor
T06-101-02 Pickup/Feed Motors, Clutches, and Solenoids
DC controller PCB
J209
J209
-16
-20
-15
-19
-14
-18
-42
-43
-30
-29
-28
-38
-27
-24
-24
-25
-47
-33
-32
J513
-16
-20
-15
-19
-14
-18
-42
-43
-30
-29
-28
-38
-27
-24
-24
-25
-47
-33
-32
J552
DC driver PCB
J560-A6
J558-11
J559-A8
J558-1
J559-A6
J558-7
J559-A4
J557-7
J560-A8
J558-5
J557-11
J559-B7
J557-5
J557-9
J558-9
J558-3
J559-B9
J559-B5
J559-B3
J563 J562
Motor driver PCB
M3
SL10
SL11
CL6
CL1
SL1
SL12
SL6
M9
SL3 CL3
SL7
M5
SL4 CL4
SL8
M6
SL5 CL5
SL9
M7
F06-101-02 Pickup/Feed Motors, Clutches, and Solenoids
1.2 Basic Operations of Pickup from the Cassette

1.2.1 Pickup Operations
The paper inside the cassette is held up by means of a lifter so that the paper and the
pickup roller remain in contact with each other at time of pickup.
The pickup roller is driven by the feed motor (M3). The pickup roller moves down in ref-
erence to the feed roller, and it comes into contact with paper in time for pickup.
The pickup roller is moved down by the pickup roller DOWN solenoid (SL3 through
SL5).
The paper is moved forward, and the feed roller and the separation roller operate to make
sure that only one sheet of paper is moved into the paper path.
The sheet is then moved as far as the No. 2 registration roller by the work of the vertical
path roller and the No. 1 registration roller.
The drive of the No. 1 registration roller is obtained from the feed motor (M3), and is
transmitted through the registration roller clutch (CL6). (See the figure below.)
The following is a table of sensors and sensor signals related to the electric components in
the cassette pickup assembly; a conceptual diagram of how they are driven follows.
Component Name Signal DC controller

M3 Feed motor PEMTR J209-B2
CL6 Registration roller clutch FEED_CL5 J559-B7
SL3 Cassette 2 pickup roller DOWN solenoid PKUP_SL2 J557-7
T06-102-01 Loads in the Cassette Pickup Assembly
DC controller PCB
J209
-20
-19
-18
-38
J512
-20
-19
-18
-38
J552
DC driver PCB
J558-1
J558-7
J557-7
Registration roller 2
J559-B7 Multifeeder pickup roller
Multifeeder Feed motor

Photosensitive feed roller M3
drum
Multifeeder
separation roller
Registration roller 1 CL6
Vertical path roller 1
Relay roller
Pickup roller 2
Vertical path roller 2
SL3 CL3
Feed roller 2
Lifter Pickup roller 3 Vertical path roller 3
SL4 CL4
Feed roller 3
Lifter Pickup roller 4 Vertical roller 4
SL5 CL5
Liter Feed roller 4
F06-102-01 Conceptual Diagram of the Pickup Unit
Sensor notation Name Signal Pin notation*

PS18 Cassette 2 paper absent sensor P_EMP2 J207-B8
PS19 Cassette 3 paper absent sensor P_EMP3 J208-A8
PS20 Cassette 4 paper absent sensor P_EMP4 J208-B8
PS27 Cassette 2 paper level sensor 1 C2_PL1 J216-A8
PS28 Cassette 2 paper level sensor 2 C2_PL2 J216-A11
PS39 Cassette 3 paper level sensor 1 C3_PL1 J556-2
*Pin Nos. for the signal lines on the DC controller PCB and the DC driver PCB.
T06-102-02 Sensors on the Cassette Pickup PCB (pickup unit)
1.2.2 Basic Sequence of Operations

Cassette 2, A4, 2 copies, Continuous
Start key ON
INTR PRINT LSTR
Cassette 2 pickup roller

DOWN solenoid (SL3)
Feed motor (M3)
F06-102-02 Sequence of Operations (pickup from the cassette)
1.2.3 Operation of the Cassette Lifter

The cassette lifter is operated while the cassette is in the machine, and is driven as needed
to keep the top surface of the stack of paper at a specific level.
a. Driving the Lifter During Copying Operation

The cassette lifter is controlled by the stop plate designed to operate in conjunction with
the up/down movement of the pickup roller.
The stop plate is equipped with a flag, and the lifter is operated for a specific period of
time each time the flag blocks the paper surface sensor (photointerrupter).
1. The pickup roller moves down each time the pickup roller DOWN solenoid turns on to
initiate pickup operation.
The height of the pickup roller changes according to the level of paper.
2. When the level of paper decreases and, as a consequence, the height to which the pickup
roller moves down lowers, the flag of the paper surface sensor blocks the paper surface
sensor, causing the liftup motor to operate for a specific period of time.
3. The rotation of the liftup motor causes the coupling on the motor shaft to rotate, thereby
rotating the lifter shaft. This series of operations in turn rotates the lifter attached to the
lifter shaft, thereby moving up the lifter plate.
4. When the lifter plate moves up, the level of the stack of paper also moves up and, conse-
quently, the height to which the pickup roller moves down rises, causing the flag on the
stop plate operating in conjunction with the pickup roller to stop blocking the pickup
level sensor.
The foregoing operations are repeated until the cassette runs out of paper; all cassette
pickup operations end when the paper absent sensor detects the absence of paper.
Pickup DOWN solenoid

SL3
Paper surface sensor
Feed roller
Pickup rollers
Light-blocking plate
Separation roller
Stop plate
Copy paper Lifter shaft Lifter
Liftup motor Lifter plate
Paper surface sensor

Stop plate
Feed roller
Pickup roller
Pickup DOWN solenoid
F06-102-03 Operation of the Cassette Lifter
b. Releasing the Lifter

The lifter is released mechanically when the cassette is slid out. A spring pin that fits itself
in the coupling of the liftup motor serves to keep the height of the stack to a specific level
by preventing the lifter shaft from rotating.
When the machine is in standby state, the spring pin is supported by the coupling of the
liftup motor; when the cassette is slid out, on the other hand, the spring pin frees itself from
the coupling, letting the lifter plate move down on its own weight.
F06-102-04
1.2.4 Pickup from the Cassette

a. Rotary Drive for the Pickup Unit
The rotary drive for the pickup unit is obtained from the paper feed motor through gears
and a timing belt.
b. Pickup Roller
The drive of the paper feed motor arriving at the pickup unit is used to drive the pickup
roller through the pickup clutch mounted to each holder of the pickup unit.
c. Reference for the Pickup Roller

The pickup roller is moved down or the lifter is moved up when the cassette is slid into
the machine with reference to the position of the feed roller shaft to which the pickup clutch
is mounted.
Feed roller Pickup roller
Pickup clutch
Pickup input shaft
F06-102-05
d. Moving Up and Down the Pickup Roller

The pickup roller is supported by the pickup holder, and is operated round the feed roller
shaft. The up and down movement of the pickup roller is driven by the pickup retaining
plate 1/2, which is controlled by the pickup roller DOWN solenoid.
1. When the pickup roller DOWN solenoid turns on, the pickup retaining plate 1 rotates
the pickup retaining plate 2.
2. When the pickup retaining plate 2 rotates, the pickup roller moves down to come into
contact with the paper, and starts pickup using the drive from the feed motor.
3. When the solenoid turns off, the spring attached to the pickup retaining plate 2 causes
the pickup roller to move up.
Feed roller
Pickup roller Pickup retaining plate 2
Pickup retaining plate 1
Pickup up DOWN solenoid
Feed roller shaft
Direction of activation (solenoid)

Pickup holder
F06-102-06
e. Movement of the Separation Roller

The separation roller turns on when the pickup clutch turns on using the support fixing as
its fulcrum. The separation roller is moved up and down using the separation roller retaining
plate (controlled by the separation roller locking solenoid), spring, and separation roller
locking fixing.
1. When the separation roller locking solenoid turns on, the separation roller retaining
plate starts to rotate.
2. The separation roller retaining plate rotates the separation roller locking fixing through a
spring to force the separation roller against the feed roller.
3. When the separation roller locking solenoid turns off, the separation roller moves down
on its own weight.
Separation roller locking fixing

Separation roller
Separation roller retaining plate
Separation roller locking solenoid
Direction of rotation (pickup clutch)
21.3±0.3mm
F06-102-07
If you have replaced the separation roller locking solenoid, be sure to make
adjustments so that the internal dimension of the spring is 21.3 ± 0.3 mm
using the long hole.
f. Detecting the Absence of Paper in the Cassette

When the cassette runs out of paper, the paper detecting arm drops through the detecting
hole of the cassette. The paper detecting arm is equipped with a flag, which will block the
paper absent sensor (photointerrupter), identifying the absence of paper inside the cassette.
Paper absent sensor
F06-102-08
g. Pickup Re-Try Operation

If the pickup sensor detects a delay (e.g., caused by wear on the pickup roller), the ma-
chine will execute a pickup re-try operation. If a delay is still detected after re-tries (twice),
a Jam message will be indicated on the control panel.
Pickup sensor
Arm
F06-102-09
Conditions for Detecting a Delay

Paper does not reach the pickup sensor within a specific period of time after it has moved
past the pickup roller DOWN solenoid (SL3).
Start key ON Re-try start
Cassette 2 pickup roller DOWN

solenoid (SL3)
Feed motor (M3)
Hereafter, the normal
Cassette 2 pickup sensor (PS22) *1 sequence of pickup
operations is used.
Vertical feed paper 2 sensor (PS10)
*1: A re-try operation is initiated if paper does not arrive during detection of about 1 sec.
F06-102-10
h. Paper Entry Sensor

The paper entry sensor 1 [1] is located at the center of the registration unit, while the pa-
per entry sensor 2 [2] is located 155 mm from the center (paper center).
The paper entry sensor 2 [2] does not detect paper smaller than A3 horizontal (A4).
This arrangement is in consideration of the fact that the stapler sorter and the duplexing
unit do not support paper larger than the above; the machine will force paper larger than that
(width) out to the center tray or the copy tray (in the case of the stapler sorter, to the center
tray).
[1]
[2]
F06-102-11
1.3 Standby Operations (non-pickup)

The machine operates as follows when the cassette is slid into or out of it.
1.3.1 Moving Down the Pickup Roller/Moving Up the Lifter (sliding in the
cassette)
a. Moving Down the Pickup Roller
When the cassette is slid into the machine while the main power is on, the pickup roller
moves down until it comes into contact with paper in response to the following:
• The size switching dial mounted to the cassette cover mechanically pushes the cassette
paper size detecting switch found on the bottom right of the machine.
• When the cassette size detection mechanism turns on, the pickup roller DOWN solenoid
turns on to move down the pickup roller.
b. Moving Up the Lifter

When the main power is turned on with the cassette inside the machine (or if the cassette
is slid inside while the machine is in standby state), the flag of the retaining plate blocks the
paper sensor as the pickup roller moves down.
The condition cause the liftup motor to turn on, moving up the lifter plate. When the
pickup roller, which is in contact with the paper, moves up to a specific level, the flag of the
retaining plate stops blocking the paper sensor, and the condition causes the lifter motor to
stop, the pickup roller to move back to its uppermost position, and the lifter stops to move
up.
1.4 Detecting the Level of Paper

The machine is equipped with a mechanism to detect the level of paper remaining in the
cassette, indicating the result in four levels on its control panel.
The level of paper is detected with reference to the flag blocking the paper level sensor
(i.e., the distance over which the lifter moves up).
When the cassette starts to run out of paper, the lifter moves up; when it runs out of paper,
the paper absent sensor (e.g., PH18 of cassette 2) detects the absence of paper.
The following chart shows the relationship between the lifter and the paper level sensor
together with the levels indicated in response to the result of detection.
Level Condition of lifter Indication
and paper level sensor
500
to
250
sheets
250
to
50
sheets
50
sheets
or
less
The absence of paper is detected by the paper absent sensor.
T06-104-01
1.5 Identifying the Size of Paper

1.5.1 Outline
The size of paper is identified by the machine in reference to the setting for the dial on the
cassette by the user.
a. Detecting the Size of Paper

The dial of the cassette may be set to any of 8 settings as shown in the figure below; as
can be seen, the protrusions and the recesses of the size detecting arm engage in different
combinations.
When the dial is set to suit a specific paper size and the cassette is slid into the machine,
the four cassette size detecting switches (for each cassette holder) find out the size of the pa-
per inside the cassette with reference to which protrusions and recesses are engaged, en-
abling the machine’s CPU to identify the size of the paper.
F06-105-01
1.5.2 Cassette Size Detecting Switch and Paper Sizes

The following table shows the states of the cassette size detecting switches and the paper
sizes that can be detected.
4-bit detecting switch

S cassette L cassette
1 2 3 4
A5 A4 1 1 0 1
A5 A3 1 1 1 1
A4 A3 1 1 1 0
A4 A2 1 0 1 0
A3 B4 1 0 1 1
B5 B3 1 0 0 1
B5 1 0 0 0
B4 1 1 0 0
Tray open Tray open 0 0 0 0
T06-105-01
iR75W
S cassette Cassette 2
Cassette 3
L cassette
Cassette 4
T06-105-02
4-bit (S4)
3-bit (S3)
2-bit (S2)
1-bit (S1)
Cassette Detecting Switch
F06-105-02
For the orientation of paper, see 2.6 in Chapter 1.
1.5.3 Paper Width and Paper Length

The width and the length of paper is detected by the machine’s CPU in reference to the
settings of the dial on the cassette by the user. The following shows the rotary label attached
to the dial, while the following table shows the sizes of paper that can be detected by the
machine.
Main scanning direction Sub scanning direction

Model Cassette
(mm) (mm)
AB A5 210 148
A5 148 210
A4 297 210
A4 210 297
A3 297 420
A3 420 297
B5 257 182
B5 182 257
B4 364 257
B4 257 364
B3 364 514
A2 420 594
T06-105-03 Rotary Label
For S cassette For L cassette
F06-105-03
For the orientation of paper, see 2.6 in Chapter 1.
1.5.4 Cassette Sizes

The S cassette differs from the L cassette in terms of size. (See T06-105-02.)
The S cassette is capable of accommodating A3 or smaller.
On the other hand, the L cassette holds paper between A4 and A2.
The inside of the cassette is equipped with side guide plates (side and rear) that must be
manually adjusted.
The side guide plate is not equipped with a sensor, requiring correct adjustment of the
aforementioned rotary switch.
F06-105-04 S/L Cassette Size
F06-105-05 Side Guide Plate
1.6 Multifeeder
1.6.1 Outline
The multifeeder is a mechanism designed to continuously feed sheets of paper stacked on
the multifeeder tray.
The paper stacked on the table is moved by the work of the pickup roller to the feed roller
and then the separation roller.
The pickup roller, feed roller, and separation roller are operated by the drive from the
feeder motor (M3) coming through the multifeeder pickup clutch (CL1).
The work of the feed roller and the separation roller makes sure that only one sheet of pa-
per is picked up and sent to the registration roller 1.
The foregoing series of operations is executed for each pickup of paper.
DC controller PCB
PEMTR*
DC driver PCB
J209
MFPU-SL2*
MFPU-SL1*
MFFEDCL*
J559-B5
J559-B3
J559-B9
Feed motor
Paper entry sensor 1 M3
(inside; PS2) Multifeeder
Registration pickup roller
roller 2 CL1
Multifeeder
Photosensitive feed roller SL1
drum Paper
SL12
Registration
roller 1 Multifeeder Multifeeder tray
separation roller
Multifeeder paper
roller sensor (PS1)
F06-106-01
1.6.2 Adjusting the Manual Feed Paper Width Sensor (VR1)

■ Detecting the Width of Paper
The width of paper is detected by means of a variable resistor (VR1) operating in con-
junction with the movement of the slide guide. The slide guides are set when the user
moves them on the multifeeder tray to suit the size of the paper.
Variable resistor
Multifeeder tray
Slide guide (rear)
Slide guide (front)

F06-106-02
Points to Note When Replacing the Sensor
When mounting the sensor,

measure the resistance between
pin No. 1 [5] and pin No. 3 [6] [6]
with the guide plates slid to the
minimum width (in the direc-
[7]
tion of the arrows); adjust the
gear so that the reading is 9K Ω
±5%. Thereafter, tighten the
screw so that the teeth of the [5]
gear are not displaced a distance
of two teeth or more. As a refer-
ence, refer to a point directly
above the cut-off [7] shown in
the figure. F06-106-03
Details of the Manual Paper Width Size Sensor (VR1)
Step Service mode Checks Yes/No Action

1 Reading under While the machine is in standby, slide NO Replace the sensor
WIDTH-MF in the manual feed guide. Does the output (VR1); however, be
<CST-STS> of voltage change linearly? sure the sensor
service mode reading of output between J22-3 and mounting base is
(in mm) J212-1: normal.
between about 0.7 VDC and about +4 VDC ±3%
(457 mm) (98 mm)
2 While the machine is in standby, slide YES The gear of the
the manual feed guide. Is the output sensor has
normal when the guide is at its mini- disengaged from the
mum (inside) and its maximum manual feed guide;
(outside)? correct the data in
• Minimum (98 mm): service mode
about +4.1 VDC ±3% <CST-ADJ>.
• Maximum (457 mm): NO The sensor
about +0.7 VDC ±3% mounting base is not
normal because of
the displacement of
the gear of the
sensor; disassemble
the multifeeder, and
re-mount the sensor.
3 Are the sensor mounting base and the NO Replace any faulty
manual feed guide (inside the multi- parts.
feeder) normal?
T06-106-01
■ Adjusting the Horizontal Registration for the Multifeeder

For adjustment of multifeeder pickup in rear/front direction, see the descriptions of ser-
vice mode. ADJUST>FEED-ADJ>ADJ-MF
■ Detection of the Length of Paper
The length of paper is detected with reference to the length of time during which the pa-
per entry sensor 1 (inside; PS2; P ENT1) remains on during copying operation.
Paper Entry Sensor 1 (inside; PS2)

The movement of paper is controlled so that it will match the image on the photosensi-
tive drum at a specific point with reference to the ON signal of the paper entry sensor 1
(inside; PS2; P ENT1).
1.6.3 Sequence of Operations (multifeeder; A4, 2 copies)

Multifeeder, A4, 2 Copies
Start key ON
SCAN PRINT LSTR
Manual pickup roller DOWN solenoid (SL1)

Manual pickup drive clutch (CL1)
Feed motor (M3)
F06-106-04
1.6.4 Manual Feed Reversing Roller Pressure Reducing Solenoid

When thick paper moves past, impact can occur as the trailing edge of paper moves
through the area of contact between the multifeeder feed roller and the manual feed revers-
ing roller, reaching the area where the paper is in contact with the drum and, consequently,
adversely affecting the image.
To limit such impact, the manual feed reversing roller is moved away from the multifeeder
feed roller by means of a solenoid before the leading edge of paper reaches the drum.
The solenoid turns on as soon as the leading edge of paper hits the paper entry sensor 1
(inside), and it turns off when the trailing edge of the paper moves past the sensor.
DC controller PCB
J559
Photosensitive drum
Paper entry sensor 1 (inside)
Registration
roller 2
Multifeeder feed roller
SL12
Manual feed reversing roller
Registration roller 1
Manual feed reversing
roller pressure
reducing solenoid
F06-106-05
A2 B3 B3 A3 A3 B4 B4 A4 A4 B5 B5 A5 A5 A6 A6
Size Remarks
Spec yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes
yes :
Use of no no no yes yes yes yes no yes no yes no no no no
solenoid
applicable
Note Note Note Note Note Note Note Note Note
control
1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2
T06-106-02
Note 1: The image will not be affected even if the solenoid is not pulled away, so that the
solenoid is not controlled.
Note 2: The trailing edge of paper moves past the roller before its leading edge reaches the
photosensitive drum, not requiring the control of the solenoid.
1.7 Making Overlay Copies

The machine takes advantage of its image memory when making overlay copies, using
the same path used when making single-sided copies.
1.8 Making Double-Sided Copies

1.8.1 Outline
The following figure shows the path used by the machine when making double-sided cop-
ies.
After copying on one side, the delivery solenoid (SL11; duplex tray) is turned on to oper-
ate the flapper, thereby moving the paper to the duplex unit.
Inside the duplex unit, the duplex feed motor rotates in reverse when the paper has moved
past the paper end sensor (PS36), sending it out of the duplex unit for copying on the other
side.
SL11
SL10
PS7
PS6
PS3
PS8
PS4
PS21 PS9
PS37
PS36
Duplexing flapper
PS18
Switch-back area
PS11
PS19
F06-108-01
6-30
1 Original, Plain paper, A4, 3 Copies, Direct, Cassette 2, Double-sided copying, Center tray
Main motor (M1)

Feed motor (M3)
Fixing heater (H1)
LED exposure
Duplex feed motor (M9)
Duplex feed motor reverse signal
Duplex inlet detection (PS38)
End sensor
1.8.2 Sequence of Operations (double-sided copying)
F06-108-02 Printer Operations
1.8.3 Through-Path Operations

a. Outline
In double-side copying, the sheet to which an image has been copied and fixed on one
side is moved to the duplex unit by the work of the flapper operating in response to the acti-
vation of the solenoid (SL11).
The duplex feed motor (M9) rotates in reverse inside the duplex unit so that the sheet is
switched back and is sent out of the unit for copying on the other side.
At all times, no more than one sheet of paper can exist inside the duplexing unit.
b. Sequence of Operations
For instance, when 6 A4 pages are cop-
ied, the following takes place:
1. The 1st sheet is picked up from the cas-
sette.
F06-108-03
2. The 2nd side is printed on the 1st sheet.
F06-108-04
3. As soon as the 1st sheet enters the du-

plex unit, the 2nd sheet is picked up
from the cassette.
2
F06-108-05
4. The 4th page is copied on the 2nd sheet.

The 1st sheet is caused to make a U-
turn, and made to stand by.
F06-108-06
5. When the 1st sheet has been switched

back and picked up, the 2nd sheet is
made to enter the duplex unit.
2
4
F06-108-07
6. The 1st side is printed on the 1st sheet.

The 2nd sheet is caused to make a U-
turn inside the duplex unit, and is made
to stand by.
1 2
F06-108-08
7. The 1st sheet is delivered.

The 2nd sheet is picked up.
1
F06-108-09
8. The 3rd page is printed on the 2nd

sheet.
1
2
3 4
F06-108-10
9. The 2nd sheet is delivered.

The 3rd sheet is picked up from the cas-
sette. 1
2
3
4
F06-108-11
10. The 6th page is printed on the 3rd sheet.

3
4 1
2
F-06-108-12
11. The 3rd sheet is made to enter the du-

plex unit. 3
4 1
2
6
F06-108-13
12. The 3rd sheet is switched back and

picked up; then, the 5th page is printed. 3
4 1
2
5 6
F06-108-14
13. The 3rd sheet is delivered. 5

6 3
4 1
2
F06-108-15
c. Adjusting the Horizontal Registration (service mode)

If a discrepancy occurs in front/rear direction when the 2nd side is picked up for overlay/
double-sided copying, adjust the horizontal registration in service mode: ADJUST>Feed-
ADJ>ADJ-R-C2/C3/C4.
1.9 Delivery Assembly

1.9.1 Outline
The machine offers a choice of the following two in service mode for the mode of paper
delivery:
a. Face-down delivery
b. Face-up delivery
a. Face-Down delivery
In this mode, the copied side of a single copy or the odd page of a double-sided copy
faces down upon delivery.
When the sheet moves through the fixing assembly, the delivery flapper solenoid (SL10;
copy tray) remains off so that the sheet will be moved to the center tray.
b. Face-Up Delivery
In this mode, the copied side of a single-sided copy or the odd page of a double-sided
copy faces up upon delivery.
When the sheet is moved to the copy tray (option)/sorter (option) through the fixing as-
sembly, the flapper solenoid (SL10) turns on to guide it to the copy tray/sorter.
Normally, the delivery flapper solenoid (SL10; copy tray) remains off. It
turns on when paper is moved from the fixing assembly to the delivery as-
Memo sembly.
SL10
SL10
F06-109-01 F06-109-02
Face-Down Delivery Face-Up Delivery
(delivery flapper solenoid, i.e., copy (delivery flapper solenoid, i.e., copy
tray mode in user mode, OFF) tray mode in user mode, ON)
1.10 Detecting Jams

1.10.1 Outline
The machine uses as many as 18 sensors to monitor the movement of paper, thus detecting
jams and ensuring proper paper movement (F06-110-01).
The presence/absence of paper or a jam is detected in terms of the presence/absence of pa-
per at appropriate sensors at such times as stored in the CPU on the DC controller PCB.
If the machine detects a jam, it will turn off the feed motor and indicate the presence of a
jam on its control panel.
PS7
PS6
PS5 PS2
PS8
PS4
PS38 PS1
PS21 PS9
PS37
PS36 PS10
PS22
PS11
PS23
PS12
PS24
F06-110-01
1.10.2 Type of Jams

The machine identifies the following six types of jams:
a. Delay Jam
Paper does not reach the sensor area within a specific period of time (i.e., the sensor does
not turn on).
b. Stationary Jam
After the sensor detects paper, the paper does not leave the sensor within a specific period
of time.
c. Timing Jam
The sensor detects paper before a specific time.
d. Residual Jam
Paper exits in the sensor area at time of power-on.
e. Door Open Jam During Copying Operation

The front cover, right lower cover, or delivery cover is opened during copying operation.
f. Size Error Jam

The size of the paper is smaller than that selected by the switch.
1.10.3 Sequence of Operations

The following are some typical sequences of operations:
a. Delay Jam
1. Cassette 2 Pickup Delay Jam
Paper does not reach the cassette 2 pickup sensor (PS22) within a specific period of time
after the cassette 2 pickup roller DOWN solenoid (SL3) turns on.
Start key ON Re-try start Jam indication
INTR
DOWN solenoid sensor
(SL3)
Feed motor (M3)
Cassette 1 pickup
sensor (PS22)
F06-110-02
2. Fixing Outlet Delay Jam

Paper does not reach the fixing outlet sensor (PS5) within a specific period of time after
the paper entry sensor (PS2) turns on.
Start key ON 2nd sheet pickup Jam indication
Paper entry sensor

(PS2)
Jam check
Fixing outlet sensor Normal Error

(PS5)
Feed motor (M3)
F06-110-03
3. Vertical Feed 1 Double-Sided Delay Jam

Paper does not reach the vertical feed 1 sensor (PS9) within a specific period of time af-
ter the double-sided feed motor reversal signal (J209-A6) turns on.
Double-feed motor
reversal signal (J209-A6)
Jam check
Vertical feed 1 sensor Normal Error

(PS9)
Double-sided feed motor
(M9)
F06-110-04
b. Stationary Jam
1. Cassette 2 Pickup Stationary Jam
Paper does not move past the cassette 2 pickup sensor (PS22) within a specific period of
time after the cassette 2 pickup sensor turns on.
Start key ON Jam indication
Note 1 Note 1
Cassette 2 pickup
sensor (PS22)
Normal Error
Jam check
Feed motor (M3)
Note 1: The interval varies depending on the length of paper.
F06-110-05
2. Separation Stationary Jam

Paper does not move past the separation sensor (PS4) within a specific period of time
after the separation sensor turns on.
Start key ON Jam indication
Note 1 Note 1
Separation sensor 1
(PS4)
Normal Error
Jam check
Feed motor (M3)
Note 1: The interval varies depending on the length of paper.
F06-110-06
c. Timing Jam
1. Cassette 3 Pickup Timing Jam
Paper reaches the cassette 3 pickup sensor (PS23) before a specific time after the cas-
sette 3 pickup roller DOWN solenoid (SL4) turns on.

DOWN solenoid (SL4)
Jam check
Cassette 3 pickup sensor Normal Error

(PS23)
Feed motor (M3)
F06-110-07
2. Paper Entry Timing Jam

Paper reaches the paper entry sensor (PS2) before a specific time after the vertical feed 1
sensor (PS9) turns on.
Vertical feed 1 sensor

(PS9)
Jam check
Paper entry sensor (PS2) Normal Error
Feed motor (M3)
F06-110-08
1.10.4 Jam History

The machine keeps track of jams that occur in its memory, allowing you to check a jam
history in service mode.
Jam history DISPLAY>JAM

Jam history clear FUNCTION>CLEAR>JAM-HIST
T06-110-01 Service Mode Related to Jams
The machine retains the following data after a jam:

• remaining number of copies
• copying mode
Making use of the data, the machine makes the remaining number of copies using the pre-
viously selected copying mode.
The message “Return the Originals and Press the Start Key” appearing at
times on the control panel after removal of a jam asks the user to place the
Memo original found on the top of the stack delivered by the feeder to the bottom
of the originals set in the feeder.

2.1 Pickup Assembly

2.1.1 Removing the Pickup Unit
1) Slide out the cassette fully.
2) Open the right lower cover. [2]
3) Remove the 2 screws, and detach the [1]
right lower cover inside cover F [1].
4) Remove the screw, and detach the right
lower cover inside cover R [2].
F06-201-01
5) Disconnect the two connectors [3].

6) Loosen the two screws [4] on the left.
[4]
[3]
[4]
F06-201-02
7) Remove the two screws [5] on the right.

8) Slide out the pickup unit [6] while
keeping it level.
[5]
[6]
F06-201-03
2.1.2 Removing the Pickup Clutch

1) Remove the pickup unit.
2) Remove the screw [1], and release the
clutch claw.
[2]
3) Disconnect the connector [2], and pull
out the clutch [3] in the axial direction.
[3]
[1]
F06-201-04
2.1.3 Removing the Pickup/Feed Roller

2) Remove the pickup clutch. [1]
3) Remove the resin clamp [1], and pull
out the feed roller shaft [2] in the direc-
tion of the arrow; then, detach the
pickup holder.
4) Remove the resin clamp [3], and detach [2]
the pickup roller [4].
[4]
[3]
F06-201-05
2.1.4 Removing the Separation Roller

2) Remove the resin clamp [1].
3) Pull out the separation roller [2] in the
axial direction.
[2]
[1]
F06-201-06
2.1.5 Removing the Pickup Roller DOWN Solenoid

2) Remove the two screws [2], and detach [2]
the feed guide plate [1]. [1]
the upper feed guide plate [3]. [4]
move the wire clamp [6].
5) Remove the two screws [7]; then, lift
the harness cover [8] to detach the
pickup roller DOWN solenoid [9]. (2
screws [10])
[3]
Mark the position of the screw
and the long hole for replace- F06-201-07
ment of the solenoid.
[10] [9]
[8]
[5]
[7]
[7] [6]
F06-201-08
2.1.6 Removing the Separation Roller Locking Solenoid

2) Disconnect the connector [1]. [1]
3) Remove the spring [2].
4) Remove the two screws, and detach the
separation roller locking solenoid [3].
[2] [3]
F06-201-09
2.1.7 Removing the Lifter Motor

2) Disconnect the 11 connectors from the
DC driver PCB [1], and disconnect the
relay connector [2]. [1]
3) Remove the four screws [3] used to
[3]
mount the DC driver PCB.
4) Remove the DC driver PCB together
with the fixing.
[3]
[3]
[2]
F06-201-10
a. Cassette 2 Liftup Motor

the lifter mounting fixing [2].
2) Remove the two screws [3], and discon- [2]
[1]
nect the connector [4]; then, detach the [3]
lifter motor [5].
[4]
[3]
[5]
F06-201-11
b. Cassette 3/4 Liftup Motor

nect the connector [2]; then, detach the
lifter motor [3].
[3]
[1] [2]
F06-201-12
2.1.8 Removing the Sensors

a. Removing the Paper Surface Sensor
2) Remove the three screws, and detach [1]
the upper feed plate [1].
F06-201-13
3) Remove the screw [2] of the harness [2]

cover.
4) Remove the screw, and detach the paper
surface sensor [3].
[4] [3]
F06-201-14
b. Removing the Pickup Sensor

[3]
3) Remove the screw [2], and detach the [1]
pickup sensor base [3].
4) Remove the pickup sensor.
F06-201-15
c. Removing the Paper Absent Sensor

paper absent sensor base [3].
4) Remove the paper absent sensor.
[3]
[1]
F06-201-16
d. Removing the Vertical Feed Sensor

2) Removes the upper feed guide plate.
4) Remove the screw, and detach the verti-
cal feed sensor [2].
[2] [1]
F06-201-17
2.1.9 Removing the Paper Level Sensor

Remove the DC driver PCB.
a. Cassette 2 Paper Level Sensor

1) Remove the cassette 2 liftup motor.
2) Remove the sensor [1] from the back of
the mounting fixing.
[1]
F06-201-18
b. Cassette 3 Paper Level Sensor

the lifter mounting fixing [2].
[2]
[1]
F06-201-19
2) Remove the sensor [3] from the back of

the mounting fixing.
[3]
F06-201-20
2.2 Feeding Assembly

2.2.1 Removing the Inside Feed Unit
1) Remove the registration unit, and re-
move the photosensitive drum. (See the
appropriate instructions for removal.)
Remove the feeding assembly lever [1]
and the inside panel (2) [2].
[1]
When you have removed the in-

side panel (2), you may mount
the feeding assembly lever but
be sure to keep the inside feed [2]
unit lifted in the direction of en-
gagement.
Further, take care not to lose the
parallel pin. F06-202-01
You may remove the transfer/

separation charging assembly to
Memo facilitate the work of removing
the inside feed unit.

Remove the two screws [3], and detach
the filter base [4].
[3]
[4]
F06-202-02
3) Detach the drive belt [5].
[5]
F6-202-03
4) Disconnect the high-voltage wire con-

nector [6] (2 locations).
[6]
[6]
F06-202-04
5) Disconnect the connectors (1) [7] and [9] [7]

(2) [8], and free the harness [9] from all
clamps.
[8]
F06-202-05

the bracket [11].
[11]
[10]
F06-202-06

support fixing [13].
When removing the unit, take it

out to the front with care, avoid-
ing damage to the actuator at
the center and the leaf spring at
the rear of the inside feed unit. [13]
[12]
F6-202-07
2.2.2 Removing the Separation Sensor

1) Remove the inside feed unit, and place
it after turning it over.
Move the feed belts [1] to the sides;
[1]
then, disconnect the connector [2], and [2]
remove the screw to detach the sensor
[3].
When you are placing the unit

after turning it over, be sure to
pay attention so that the leaf [3]
spring at the rear of the unit will [1]
not bend.
When removing the sensor, fur-
ther, take care not to damage the
feed belts. F06-202-08
2.2.3 Removing the Separation Blower

1) Remove the inside feed unit, and place
it after turning it over.
2) Disconnect the two screws [1], and dis-
connect the connector [2]. [1]
When you are placing the unit

after turning it over, pay atten- [2]
tion not to bend the leaf spring
at the rear of the unit. [1]
F06-202-09
3) Move the feed belt to the inside, and re-

move the threes screws [3]; then, detach
the separation blower [4] in the direc-
tion of the arrow. [3] [3]
[4]
When detaching the separation
blower, take care not to damage
[3]
the feed belt.
F06-202-10
2.2.4 Removing the Feed Belt

1) Remove the inside feed unit, and re-
move the six screws [1]. [2]
Take care not to deform the

grounding plate [2].
[1] [1]
F06-202-11
[1]
F06-202-12
2) Place the inside feed unit after turning it

[4]
over, and remove the separation sensor
(“Removing the Separation Sensor” in
Chapter 2); then, remove the screw [3], [3]
and detach the transfer charging assem-
bly rail [4].
F06-202-13
3) While taking care to avoid damage, pull

out the feed belts one by one [5].
[5]
F06-202-14
2.3 Registration Roller Assembly

2.3.1 Removing the Sensor and the Roller
1) Open the multifeeder.
[2]
the right inside cover [2].
[1]
[1]
F06-203-01
3) Remove the screw [3], and disconnect [3]

[4]
the connector; then, remove the sensor
[4].
F06-203-02
4) Remove the resin clamp [5], and slide [6]

the roller cover [6] and the roller [7] in [7]
[5]
the direction of the arrow to detach.
F06-203-03
2.3.2 Removing the Reversing Roller

1) Open the right lower cover.
2) While looking from under, remove the
resin clamp [1], and slide the reversing
roller [2] in the direction of the arrow to
detach.
[1] [2]
F06-203-04
2.3.3 Removing the Multifeeder

1) Remove the front cover.
2) Remove the screw, and remove the tab
[1].
[1]
F06-203-05
3) Open the multifeeder [2], and detach

the right front cover [3], right rear cover [5]
[4], and right inside cover [5].
When mounting the right rear

[4]
cover [4], keep the multifeeder
[2] so as not to trap the wire. [3]
[2]
F06-203-06

fixing [7].
[6]
[7]
F06-203-07
5) Remove the resin clamp [8].
[8]
F06-203-08
[9]
F06-203-09
7) Move the multifeeder to the left, and

detach it from the right fulcrum.
Be sure to keep the multifeeder

up at 45° (approx.) when sliding
it.
2.3.4 Removing the Registration Unit

1) Remove the multifeeder.
fulcrum pin [2]. [2]
Check to make sure that the

feed assembly lever is shifted [1]
up.
F06-203-10
3) Disconnect the connector [3]. (Free it

also from the clamp.)
[6]
the fixing [5].
5) Remove the screw [6] used to keep the [3]
registration unit in place (both sides).
[4]
[5]
F06-203-11
6) To avoid contact with the input gear

found at the rear of the machine, detach
the registration unit while slanting it as
shown.
When mounting the registration

unit, it will be easier if the rear
Memo of the unit is lifted and inserted
first.
F06-203-12
2.3.5 Removing the Sensors and Clutches

the sensors [2].
[1]
[1]
When detaching and attaching
the sensor, take care not to dis-
engage the hook of the coil
spring.
[2]
F06-203-13

move the screw; then, detach the clutch
[4].
[4]
[3]
F06-203-14
2.3.6 Removing the Multifeeder Paper Sensor

1) Remove the multifeeder, and remove
the five screws [1].
Keep the guide plate to its mini-

mum width.
[1]
F06-203-15
2) Turn over the multifeeder.

The claws are engaged. Work as if to
shift it in the direction of the arrow to
detach the manual feed cover.
F06-203-16

nect the connector [3]; then, detach the [2]
[3]
sensor [4].
[2]
[4]
F06-203-17
When mounting, keep the guide

plate to the minimum width (in
[6]
the direction of the arrows).
Measure the resistance between
No. 1 pin [5] and No. 3 pin [6] [7]
of the sensor, and adjust the
gear so that the reading is 9 K Ω
±5%. Then, tighten the screw so
[5]
that the displacement, if any,
will not be larger than an
equivalent of two teeth. (As a
guide, keep in mind that it will
stop more or less directly above
the cut-off [7] as shown in the F06-203-18
figure.
2.3.7 Removing the Manual Feed Pickup Roller DOWN Solenoid

1) Open the multifeeder.
2) Open the right lower cover. [1]
solenoid cover [1].
F06-203-19

solenoid bracket [3]. [2] [2]
F06-203-20
5) Disconnect the connector [4], and free

the harness from the clamp [5]. [4]
[5]
F06-203-21

the solenoid [7].
Before detaching the solenoid,

keep note of the index [8] at the
edge of the solenoid; then, be
sure to mount it back to its
[8] [6]
original position.
F06-203-22
2.4 Delivery Assembly

2.4.1 Removing the Delivery Cover
1) Remove the left rear cover.
2) Disconnect the connector, and remove
the grounding wire [2] (1 screw w/
washer).
[1]
When removing the grounding [2]
wire, take care not to lose the
washer.
F06-204-01
3) Open the delivery cover [3], and remove [4]

the band [4] of the machine (1 screw [4]
each; both sides).
[3]
F06-204-02
4) Pull out the KL clip [6] from the sup-

port shaft [5] of the delivery cover.
(both sides) [6]
5) While supporting the delivery cover by
hand, pull out the support shaft (both [5]
sides), and detach the delivery cover.
F06-204-03
2.4.2 Replacing the Cover Sheet (1)

1) Open the delivery cover.
2) Replace the cover sheet (1) [1]. Match this surface against
[2] [1] the double-sided tape.
When replacing the cover sheet
(1), be sure to clean the area of
attachment on the paper guide
[2] with alcohol.
F06-204-04
2.4.3 Replacing the Static Eliminating Brush

1) Remove the delivery cover.
2) Remove the spring [2] from the flapper [2] [1]
[1].
3) Remove the screw [4], and remove the
flapper mounting plate [3]; then, detach
the flapper.
[3]
[4]
F06-204-05
4) Peel off the static eliminating brush [5]

from the flapper.
Keep note of the fact that the

static brush [6] in the middle
has a unique position.
[6]
[5]
F06-204-06
2.4.4 Replacing the Cover Sheet (2)

2) Remove the flapper.
3) Replace the cover sheet (2) [1]. Match this area
for attachment.
[2]
[1]
F06-204-07
2.4.5 Removing the Deliver Flapper Solenoid

2) Remove the paper guide [1]. (2 screws
[2], 4 screws [3]) [2] [1]
[3] [3]
F06-204-08

4) Disconnect the 2P connector [4] and the
3P connector [5].
[4]
[5]
F06-204-09
5) Remove the solenoid mounting fixing [6]

[7]. (2 screws [7], 1 from back)
[7]
F06-204-10

move the delivery flapper solenoid [9] [8] [9]
[10].
[10]
When mounting the solenoid,
tighten the screw while forcing
it against the top.
Route the harness between the
solenoids.
[11]
Be sure also to mount the sole-
noid and the solenoid mounting
plate in reference to the mark- F06-204-11
ings [11].
Position as seen from Type of Operation

delivery cover side connector
Delivery flapper solenoid Front 2P (upper) OFF: center tray delivery
(copy tray) [9] ON: copy tray delivery
Delivery flapper solenoid Rear 3P (lower) OFF: single-sided copying
(duplex tray) [10] ON: double-sided copying
T06-204-01
2.4.6 Removing the Sensor

The delivery assembly is equipped with five paper sensors and one inside tray full sensor.
Delivery Sensor
[4] [1]
2) Remove the screw [2], and remove the
sensor mounting fixing [1].
tach the delivery sensor [4]. [3]
[2]
F06-204-12
Inside Tray Delivery Sensor 1

1) Remove the paper guide. (See the in-
structions on how to remove the sole-
noid.)
2) Remove the screw, and detach the sen-
sor mounting fixing [1].
[1]
F06-204-13
3) Disconnect the connector, and detach

the inside tray delivery sensor 1 [2].
[2]
F06-204-14
Inside Tray Delivery Sensor 2

noid.)
[1]
F06-204-15

the inside tray delivery sensor 2 [2].
[2]
F06-204-16
Inside Tray Full Sensor

noid.)
sor mounting fixing.
the inside tray full sensor [1]. (1 screw) [1]
F06-204-17
Duplex Inlet Sensor

1) Remove the paper guide.
2) Remove the screw, and detach the sen- [1]
F06-204-18

the duplex inlet sensor [2].
[2]
F06-204-19
Fixing Outlet Sensor

1) Remove the left front cover. (See the
instructions on how to remove the exter-
nals.)
2) Remove the screw, and detach the sen- [1]
When mounting the sensor

mounting fixing, check to make
sure that the actuator operates
normally.
F06-204-20
2.5 Feed Motor Base

2.5.1 Removing the Motor Base
2) Remove the spring [1]. (2 locations)
3) Remove the E-ring, and remove the
flange [2]. [1]
4) Detach the timing belt [4]. (2 locations) [4]
the drive relay plate [5].
[6]
If the belt for manual feed be-
comes displaced during assem-
[4]
bly work, detach the bracket of
[5]
the DC controller PCB before [3]
putting it back into position. [1]
[2]
F06-205-01
6) Remove the E-ring [7], and detach the

gear [8].
At this time, take care not to

lose the parallel pin [9].
[9]
[7] [8]
F06-205-02
7) Disconnect the connector [10] of the

motor.
[10]
F06-205-03
8) Remove the four screws [12] of the mo-

[11]
tor mounting case [11].
[12] [12]
F06-205-04
9) Free the three clamps [14], and detach

the high-voltage cable [13] found on the
right side of the motor mounting base.
[14]
When removing the motor
mounting base, be sure to de-
tach the relay shaft and the
bushing at the same time to
avoid dropping them.
[13]
F06-205-05
10) Remove the motor mounting base. [18] [16]

11) Remove the three gears [15] and the
[15]
flange [16].
(Remove the setscrew [17] for one loca-
tion, and remove the E-ring [18] for two
locations.)
When mounting the setscrew, be

[15]
sure to secure it in place to the
D-cut area of the shaft.
[18] [17]
F06-205-06
12) Remove the four screws [20], and de- [20]

tach the motor [19].
[19]
[20]
F06-205-07
2.6 Duplex Unit

2.6.1 Removing the Duplex Unit
1) Open the right lower cover, and slide
[2]
out the topmost cassette fully; then, re-
move the two screws [1]. [3]
2) Open the drive unit [2], and remove the [1]
two screws [3]; then, detach the duplex
unit [4] from the rail.
[4]
F06-206-01
2.6.2 Removing the Motor Driver PCB

out the topmost cassette.
the PCB cover [2].
[1]
F06-206-02
3) Disconnect the four connectors [3], and

remove the two screws [4]; then, detach [5]
[4]
the motor driver PCB [5].
[4]
[3]
F06-206-03
2.6.3 Removing the Actuator

1) Remove the duplex unit.
2) Remove the band [1]. (screw [2] w/ [3]
washer) [2]
[3]
the guide A [4].
[1]
[4]
F06-206-04
4) Remove the four screws [5], and shift

the guide B [6] in the direction of the
fulcrum shaft; then, detach the actuator
[7]. [5]
[7]
[6]
F06-206-05
2.6.4 Removing the Stationary Paper Sensor

out the topmost cassette; then, open the
drive unit [1].
2) Remove the screw [2], and disconnect [3]
the connector [3]; then, detach the sta-
tionary paper sensor [4].
[4]
[1]
[2]
F06-206-06
2.6.5 Removing the Duplex Feed Motor

1) Remove the duplex unit, and detach the
PCB cover and the guide A [1]. [1]
2) Open the drive unit [2], and remove the [4]
three screws [3]; then, detach the side [2]
plate cover [4].
[3]
F06-206-07
3) Remove the grounding wire [5] on the

motor side; then, disconnect the connec-
tor [6] of the motor. (1 screw [7] w/
washer)
4) Remove the KL clip [8] (both left and
right) at the front and the rear; then, [8]
fully open the drive unit. [7]
[5]
[6]
F06-206-08
5) Detach the timing belt [9], and detach

the motor [10] together with the [9]
bracket. (4 screws [11])
6) Detach the motor from the bracket.
[11]
[10]
F06-206-09
2.6.6 Removing the Path Flapper

PCB cover, side plate cover, and guide [3] [4]
[2]
A. [1]
2) Remove the grounding wire on the mo-
[4]
tor side, and disconnect the connector
of the motor.
3) Remove the KL clip, and fully open the
drive unit.
4) Remove the paper guide D [1]. (6
screws [2], 2 screws [3], 2 screws [4])
5) Detach the path flapper [6] from the [2] [3]
path flapper holder [5].
F06-206-10
[5]
[6]
F06-206-11
2.6.7 Removing the Paper End Sensor

PCB cover, side plate cover, guide A, [2]
[4]
and paper guide D.
[3]
the path flapper holder [2].
tach the paper end sensor [4]. [1]
F06-206-12
2.7 Pickup Assembly Duplex Outlet Relay Unit

The duplex outlet relay unit is mounted
in place of the pickup unit for a model de- Pickup rollers
signed to process double-sided copies.
The duplex unit outlet relay unit is
equipped with a mechanism to unlock
(lock) the counter roller to prevent guillo-
tine jams otherwise possibly occurring Bushing
when removing jams. Counter plate
When paper enters the reversing case, the rollers
locking solenoid turns on to force the
counter roller against the feed roller; it turns Counter roller
off when the leading edge of the paper hits locking solenoid
the vertical feed check sensor.
F06-207-01
2.7.1 Removing the Duplex Outlet Relay Unit

1) Remove it in the same way the pickup
unit is removed.
2.7.2 Removing the Counter Roller Locking Solenoid

1) Remove the duplex outlet relay unit.
2) Remove the feed guide mounting fixing
[1] (1 screw), and detach the lower feed
guide.
[2]
[1]
F06-207-02
3) Remove the lower stay [3]. (6 screws)
[3]
F06-207-03

the counter roller locking solenoid [4]. [4]
(2 screws)
F06-207-04
2.7.3 Removing the Pickup Sensor

3) Remove the pickup sensor [2]. (1 screw)
[1]
[2]
F06-207-05
2.7.4 Removing the Vertical Feed Sensor

2) Remove the upper feed guide plate [1].
(3 screws)
[1]
F06-207-06

the vertical sensor [2]. (1 screw)
[2]
F06-207-07
CHAPTER 7
FIXING
CHAPTER 7 FIXING
1.1 Outline
The major functions of the fixing unit are as shown in the following table, and its major
components are as shown in the figure that follows:
Item Description
Method Heat roller method *1
Fixing drive Belt moved by feed motor
Fixing heater 1200 W (230 V)
Fixing temperature By thermistor 1 (TH1)
detection
Cleaning By cleaning roller (kept in contact with pressure roller at all times)
Protective mechanism The following are used to check for a fault; upon detection, the power to
the fixing heater will be cut:
• Thermal switch
• Triac
• Thermistor 1 (TH1) temperature detection
• Thermistor 2 (TH2) temperature detection
Error code E000 The fixing temperature fails to increase.
E001 The fixing temperature has increased abnormally.
E002 The fixing temperature is abnormal.
E003 The triac has a short circuit.
E014 The feed motor fails to rotate at a constant speed. *2
Service mode DISPLAY>ANALOG>FIX-E fixing temperature
(major items) DISPLAY>ERROR error history
FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR error clear
ADJUST>FIXING>FIX-P plain paper fixing temperature setting
ADJUST>FIXING>FIX-S1 tracing paper fixing temperature setting
ADJUST>FIXING>FIX-S2 film fixing temperature setting
ADJUST>FIXING>FIX-S3 thick paper fixing temperature setting
T07-101-01 Major Functions of the Fixing Unit
*1: Piping (3 heat pipes in which water is sealed) is built inside the paper fixing roller in
longitudinal direction, ensuring that the fixing temperature in longitudinal direction re-
mains even.
*2: The upper fixing roller is driven by feed motor (M3).
CHAPTER 7 FIXING
[7]
[1]
[2] [6]
[5]
[8] [4]
[3]
[1] Thermal switch [5] Upper fixing roller

[2] Heater [6] Thermistor 1
[3] Lower fixing roller [7] Thermistor 2
[4] Fixing inlet guide [8] Cleaning roller
F07-101-01 Components of the Fixing Mechanisms
CHAPTER 7 FIXING
1.2 Controlling the Fixing Temperature

1.2.1 Outline
The surface temperature of the machine’s upper fixing roller is monitored by the fixing
assembly temperature thermistor (TH1*, TH2*), and is controlled by the DC-CPU, which
uses the readings of the thermistor to vary the heater control signal (F_LAMP1).
TH1: for controlling the temperature.

TH2: for detecting overheating.
DC controller PCB S1
Door switch
Thermal
switch
Upper fixing roller TS1 DS1
F_TEMP1
TH1
H1
Main power
switch
TH2 SW1
F_TEMP2
Leakage
Error F_LAMP1
AC driver PCB breaker
detection
TR1_ERR
circuit
F07-102-01 Major Components of the Fixing Temperature Control Mechanism
CHAPTER 7 FIXING
1.2.2 Controlling the Temperature

When the main switch is turned on, the heater turns on, and remains on until the tempera-
ture is 10°C higher than the setting.
When the selected temperature has been reached after the “overshoot,” the heater is made
to repeat turning on and off, thereby maintaining the selected temperature.
Normal printing is possible at the temperature setting ±5°C.
Control
temperature
±2˚C
Heater
Plain paper Tracing paper Film Thick paper
Control 170˚C 165˚C 160˚C 175˚C

temperature
F07-102-02
CHAPTER 7 FIXING
1.2.3 Power Save Mode

In user mode, the fixing temperature used after printing may be set to any of three set-
tings; a press on the Power Save key causes the machine to enter power save mode, lowering
the fixing temperature to the selected setting and starting sleep state.
Setting Rate of saving Fixing assembly temperature Time

1 -10% 165°C about 60 sec or less
No return time 2 sec or less
T07-102-01
CHAPTER 7 FIXING
1.3 Protective Mechanisms for the Fixing System

The machine is equipped with the following protective mechanisms to prevent overheat-
ing of the fixing heater.
The DC-CPU monitors each unit for a fault, and turns off the heater control signal upon
detection of a fault while at the same time indicating an error code on the LCD; it will then
turn off the main power switch.
While an overheating condition exists, the delivery/feed assembly cooling fan is operated
to exhaust the air from around the fixing assembly.
You must execute error clear in service mode (FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERROR) if any of
the follwoing error codes is indicated: see the table and the block diagram that follow for
details:
*DC-CPU: CPU for the DC controller (mounted on the DC controller PCB).
Condition Error code Description

The reading of the thermistor E000 The reading of the thermistor does not reach 70°C 150
(TH1) does not indicate a sec after the main power switch is turned on.
specific rise in temperature.
The reading of the thermistor E002 The output of the thermistor is any of the following:
(TH1) does not indicate a • 150 sec or more from 0° to 70°C.
specific rise in temperature. • 120 sec or more from 70° to 150°C.
• 130 sec or more from 150° to 170°C.
The thermistor 1 (TH1) E001 The output of the thermistor 1 exceeds 200°C, and this
detects overheating. condition turns off the heater control signal.
The thermistor 2 (TH2) E001 The output of the thermistor 2 exceeds 200°C, and the
detects overheating. condition turns off the heater control signal.
The reading of the E003 The thermistor (TH1, TH2) detects a drop in
thermistor (TH1, TH2) temperature to 70°C or below after the wait-up period.
indicates an abnormal drop.
A short circuit has been E004 A short circuit in the triac caused the following
detected in the triac. symptoms; this condition turns off the main switch
(SW1):
• The fixing heater fails to turn off.
• The fixing temperature rises abnormally.
T07-103-01 Protective Mechanisms
CHAPTER 7 FIXING
DC controller PCB
Main Thermistor Overheating Detection Block Diagram
Overheating detection signal 1 (analog)
Overheating
J204-B11 Timer
TH1 detection
circuit circuit
Sub Thermistor Overheating Detection Auto

Block Diagram power-off
drive circuit
Overheating detection signal 2 (analog)
Overheating
TH2 J204-B13 detection
circuit
DC-CPU
SSR-OFF
error indication
Triac Short Circuit Detection Block Diagram
AC driver
PCB
Heater ON
TR_ERR1 Heater ON: H To DC-CPU
detection
circuit
Timer
circuit
To DC -CPU
F_LAMP1
F07-103-01 Circuitry Used to Monitor the Fixing Heater for a Fault
CHAPTER 7 FIXING
CHAPTER 7 FIXING
2.1 Fixing Assembly

2.1.1 Removing the Fixing Assembly
1) Open the front cover [1].
[1]
F07-201-01
2) Remove the stopper [2] of the fixing as-

sembly. (1 screw [3])
[2] [3]
F07-201-02
3) Holding the grip of the fixing assembly

[4], slide out the assembly to the front.
4) Supporting the bottom of the fixing as-
sembly [5], take the assembly out of the
machine.
[4]
[5]
F07-201-03
CHAPTER 7 FIXING
2.1.2 Removing the Fixing Heater

1) Remove the fixing assembly from the [1]
machine.
2) Remove the front cover [1]. (2 screws
[2])
[2]
[2]
F07-201-04
3) Remove the upper fixing cover [3]. (2 [4]

screws [4])
[3]
[4]
F07-201-05
4) Remove the screw M4 [5] used to se-

cure the heater terminal in place.
[5]
F07-201-06
CHAPTER 7 FIXING
5) Remove the faston [6] of the heater ter-

minal.
[6]
F07-201-07
6) Remove the plate [7]. (screw [8])

[8]
[7]
F07-201-08

plate [9]; then, pull out the heater [11]. [10]
[9]
[11]
F07-201-09
CHAPTER 7 FIXING
When mounting the fixing

heater, take note of the follow-
ing: Heater
a. Do not touch the surface of
the heater.
b. The side with the round ter-
minal on the lead wire is the
front.
c. Be sure to mount the heater
so that it is on the left side
when viewed from the front
of the fixing assembly.
F07-201-10
2.1.3 Removing the Upper Fixing Roller

1) Remove the fixing assembly from the
machine.
2) Remove the fixing heater.
3) Remove the pressure adjusting plate [1],
and release the roller pressure.
[1]
F07-201-11
CHAPTER 7 FIXING
4) Open the delivery cover [2], and release

the separation claw assembly.
[2]
F07-201-12
5) Remove the C-ring [3] used to fix the

upper fixing roller in place; then, re-
move the gear [4], bearing [5], and heat
insulating bush [6]. [7]
[5] [3]
6) Remove the upper fixing roller [7]. [6] [4]
[3] [6]
[5]
F07-201-13
■ Points to Note When Mounting the Up-
per Fixing Roller
1. To avoid soiling or scratching the sur-
face of the roller, try wrapping the roller
with paper.
2. Pay attention to make sure that the C-
ring, gear, heat-insulating bush, and
bearing are mounted in the correct ori-
entation.
3. Keep in mind that the side with the
longer bushing of the upper fixing roller
is at the rear.
4. Take care not to leave out the C-ring.
CHAPTER 7 FIXING
2.1.4 Removing the Lower Fixing Assembly

machine.
2) Remove the upper fixing roller.
3) Disengage the spring [2] on the fixing
inlet guide [1] from the hook. (both
sides)
[1]
[2]
F07-201-14
4) Loosen the screw [3], and remove the

fixing inlet guide [1].
[3]
F07-201-15
5) Remove the sub thermistor mounting [5]

[4]
fixing [4]. (screw [5])
F07-201-16
CHAPTER 7 FIXING
6) Remove the handle [6], handle seat [7],

spacer [8], and the spring [9]. (screw
[10])
When loosening the screw, try

inserting a small screwdriver
into the hole of the shaft to keep
it from turning.
[7]
[9]
[8]
[6]
[10]
F07-201-17
7) Remove the lower fixing roller [11] to-

gether with the bearing. [11]
F07-201-18
■ Points to Note When Mounting the

Lower Fixing Roller
1. Pay special attention to the orientation
of the bearing.
2. The side with the longer bushing on the
lower fixing roller is the front.
CHAPTER 7 FIXING
■ Position of the Fixing Inlet Guide

[1]
The position of the fixing inlet guide [1] [2]
is adjusted by the screw [2] found at the
center of the inlet guide, not requiring
adjustment if the inlet guide is mounted
on its own.
F07-201-19
Do not loosen the screw found at the

center of the inlet guide unless the posi-
tion for the inlet guide must be ad-
[3]
justed. If you must loosen the screw, be
sure to take note of the index [3] on the
inner side of the fixing side plate at the
front.
F07-201-20
2.1.5 Removing the Lower Separation Claw Assembly

1) Slide the fixing assembly out of the ma-
chine.
the lower separation claw unit [2] (2
pc.).
[1]
F07-201-21
CHAPTER 7 FIXING
4) Detach the spring [4] from the claw

holder, and detach the lower separation
claw [5].
[5]
[3]
[4]
F07-201-22
2.1.6 Removing the Upper Separation Claw Assembly

1) Slide the fixing assembly out of the ma-
chine.
upper separation claw unit [2].
[1]
[2]
F07-201-23
[2]
F07-201-24
CHAPTER 7 FIXING
2.1.7 Removing the Cleaning Roller

1) Remove the fixing assembly out of the
machine.
2) Remove the upper fixing roller.
3) Remove the lower fixing roller.
4) Remove the cleaning roller [1].
[1]
F07-201-25
2.1.8 Fine-Tuning the Position of the Upper Separation Claws

The position of the upper separation
claws may be shifted 3 mm by moving the
positioning plate mounted at the front,
thereby preventing the upper separation
claws from remaining in contact with the
fixing roller at the same points.

machine.
[3]
3) Remove the positioning plate [1] found
at the front (screw [2]). [2]
4) Shift the claw base [3] to the front, and
relocate the positioning plate to the rear.
(screw [2])
[1]
F07-201-26
CHAPTER 7 FIXING
2.1.9 Removing the Main Thermistor/Sub Thermistor

machine.
2) Remove the upper fixing cover.
3) Remove the connector mounting base
[1] (2 screws), and disconnect the 3P
connector of the main thermistor.
[1]
F07-201-27

[2]
main thermistor [3].
[3]
F07-201-28
CHAPTER 7 FIXING
5) Disconnect the 4P connector of the sub

thermistor from the connector mounting [4]
base. [5]
sub thermistor mounting base [5].
sub thermistor.
Check to make sure that the area of detec- [7]

tion of the main thermistor/sub thermistor is
in even contact with the upper fixing roller
[7] and remains level. F07-201-29
In addition, take care so as not to route
the lead wire from the thermistor with
force.
The position for the thermistor

need not be adjusted. If the con-
Memo tact is not even, check the ther-
mistor spring for deformation.
Be sure not to confuse the main
thermistor and the sub ther-
mistor when mounting them:
the main thermistor has a 3P ter-
minal, while the sub thermistor
has a 4P terminal.
CHAPTER 7 FIXING
2.1.10 Removing the Thermal Switch Unit

machine.
[1]
2) Remove the two screws [1] of the har-
ness.
thermal switch unit [3].
[1]
Different types of screws are

used, requiring care during
mounting work.
Be sure to clean or replace the [2]
thermal switch by handling the [3]
thermal switch unit as a whole.
Detaching and attaching the F07-201-30
thermal switch on its own can
deform the spring, and must be
avoided.
After mounting the thermal
switch unit, make sure that it is
in even contact with the surface
of the upper fixing roller and
remains level.
The position of the thermal [3]

switch need not be adjusted. If
Memo the contact is not even, check
F07-201-31
the thermal switch spring for
deformation.
CHAPTER 7 FIXING
2.1.11 Adjusting the Pressure of the Lower Fixing Roller (nip)

If paper tends to wrinkle or fixing faults
occur, make the following adjustments: if
the fixing roller is cold when you are taking
measurements, wait for 15 min after the end
of the wait period, make 20 copies, and take
measurements.
Taking Measurements
1) Make an A2 solid black copy using the
outside tray; turn off the machine as
soon as the paper comes out of the de-
livery slot. Then, pull it out another 100
mm or so, and wait for 20 sec; thereaf-
ter, fully pull out the paper.
2) Measure the width of the area where c
toner is shiny (shaded in F07-201-32).
Standard
A2paper
at a 9.0±0.5mm
Paper Middle
at b 8.5±0.5mm b
movement of paper
at c 9.0±0.5mm
difference between a and c 0.5mm or less
10mm
100mm a
T07-201-01
a and c are points 10 mm from

the edges of the copy paper. F07-201-32
CHAPTER 7 FIXING
3) If the measurements are not as indi-

cated, loosen the stop nut found at the
rear and the front of the fixing assem-
bly, and turn the pressure adjusting Weaker Stronger
screw [1] to make adjustments.
[1]
T07-201-33
2.1.12 Lubrication
Apply heat-resisting grease (CK-0427) to the following on a periodical basis:
• engagement of the gears (on the side of the flat teeth)
CHAPTER 8
EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY CONTROLS
1 Control Panel
1.1 Outline
The machine’s control panel is equipped with a liquid crystal display (LCD) possessing a
resolution of 320 x 240 dots, and it has the following functions:
1. Data communication
2. LCD processing
3. LCD contrast adjustment
4. Touch switch input processing
DC controller PCB DC-CPU
Control panel Control panel CPU PCB

inverter PCB
LCD panel Control panel CPU
Power LCD contrast

supply adjustment PCB
indication PCB
Control panel
F08-101-01
1.2 Operations
1.2.1 Data Communication
The communication of data is controlled by the DC-CPU.
DC-CPU: CPU for the DC controller PCB.
1.2.2 LCD Processing

The DC-CPU sends data (display information) to the control panel CPU PCB as in-
structed by the pre-stored program. The control panel PCB then forwards the data to the
LCD panel.
1.2.3 LCD Contrast Adjustment

The machine is equipped with a dial on its control panel to allow the user to adjust the
contrast of the LCD.
1.2.4 Functions of the Control Panel CPU

• Monitoring key inputs: i.e., communicates the inputs from the keypad, touch panel, and
function keys to the DC-CPU.
• Controlling the buzzer sound.
• Controlling the activation of the control panel LCD.
2 Fans
2.1 Arrangement and Functions of the Fans
The names and the functions of the fans used in the machine are as follows:
No. Name Function E code

FM1 DC power supply cooling fan Cools the DC power supply. E804
FM2*1 Exhaust fan Exhausts ozone from the processes; E805-0002
exhausts heat from around the fixing
assembly.
FM3*2 Delivery/feeding assembly cooling fan Exhausts heat from around the fixing E805-0003
assembly.
FM4 Scanner controller PCB cooling fan Cools the scanner controller PCB. E226
BL1*3 Separation blower Prevents curling of paper, improves E805-0001
feeding and removes ozone from
inside the machine.
BL2 Process cooling blower Removes ozone from inside the
machine.
T08-201-01
*1: Starts to rotate when the reading of the fixing temperature thermistor TH1 reaches
140°C.
*2: Starts to rotate when the fixing temperature setting is reached or when the machine be-
comes ready for operation; it also starts to rotate when the reading of the fixing tem-
perature thermistor TH2 indicates overheating.
*3: Rotates in silent mode for 20 sec after the end of copying, and then stops.
The fans are arranged as follows:
BL2
FM4
FM2
BL1
FM3
FM1
F08-201-01 Direction of Air Current (1/3) F08-201-02 Direction of Air Current (2/3)
Each fan has its own direction of air current, requiring care when disassembling the unit
or replacing the fan.
Fan
(direction of air current)
(direction of rotation)
F08-201-03
2.2 Sequence of Operations

2.2.1 2-Speed Control
Of the fans used in the machine, some are designed to rotate in silent mode during
standby (T08-201-01, F08-201-01, F08-201-02). The switch-over between full-speed rota-
tion and silent mode rotation is made by the DC-CPU by means of pulse signals.
DC-CPU: CPU for the DC controller (mounted on the DC controller PCB).
Rotation speed Timing Supply voltage SEP-BLW

Full-speed rotation During copying +24V 0
Half-speed rotation During standby +24V Pulse
0 or pulses
SEP_BLW SEPBLWST
DC-CPU
+24V
DC controller PCB DC driver PCB
F08-202-01
2.2.2 Basic Sequence of Operations of the Fans

INTR1 STBY INTR2 COPY STBY SLEEP

*1
Heat exhaust fan (FM2)
Delivery/feeding assembly cooling fan (FM3)
*2
*3
Scanner controller PCB cooling fan (FM4)
3sec
*1 after the heater reaches 70˚C
: full-speed rotation
*2 for 20 sec after the copying ends,
: low-speed rotation
OFF for 80 msec/ON for 10 msec.
*3 from when the lamp turns on until 2 sec after
the end of scanning, full-speed rotation; otherwise,
turns on and off every 20 msec.
F08-202-02
3 Power Supply
3.1 Outline of the Power Supply
The following is a block diagram showing how power is distributed in the machine.
Anti-condensation
heater
Cassette
Leakage Inside AC driver heater
P breaker
SW1
DC power supply (single output)
Control panel controller PCB Main power switch

Phase control PCB DC power supply
LED head (multiple outputs)
DC driver PCB +5.1V
DC controller PCB
Scanner controller PCB 5-V
generation
+12V
DC carrier PCB 12-V
Scanner CCD gene- +24VB Sorter
ration ADF
+24VA Scanner controller PCB
DC controller PCB
DC driver PCB RY1
Main motor
+24-V generation
DC driver PCB
Transformer
Motor driver PCB

(PW7156)
High-voltage power
supply unit
Feed motor
DS1 DS2 DS3
Door switch Door switch

(right lower (delivery
THSW cover) cover)
Door switch
TR (front cover)
H1
Inside AC DC
driver AC
F08-301-01
3.2 Power Supply Circuit

The machine’s DC power supply is generated within the multiple-output power supply
and the single-output power supply.
Power supply Output

generation Rated
Tolerance Destination
PCB output voltage
DC power supply +12V ±0.5% DC controller PCB, DC driver PCB,
(multiple output) DC power supply cooling fan, Counter 1,
Counter 2, Pre-exposure PCB, Transfer lamp
PCB, Delivery/feed cooling fan
+12V ±3% Scanner controller PCB (CCD), DC controller
PCB (charging wire cleaning motor)
+5.1V ±5% DC controller PCB, DC driver PCB, Motor driver
PCB, ADF, Scanner controller PCB, DC relay
PCB (LED exposure unit), Phase controller PCB,
Control panel controller PCB (including power
supply indication PCB)
DC power supply +24V ±5% Sorter, ADF, Scanner controller PCB,
(single output) (scanner motor), DC driver PCB (Toner supply
motor, Developing assembly Push-on motor,
Clutch, Solenoid, Liftup motor, Separation
blower, Exhaust fan), Main motor, Motor driver
PCB, High-voltage power supply unit, Feed mo-
tor, AC driver PCB
T08-302-01
3.3 Transition to Sleep Mode

3.3.1 Outline
The machine has the following four states, initiated according to its power condition:
State IP-CPU* LCD Fixing heater Available operations

Main power OFF OFF OFF OFF None
Low-power mode ON OFF OFF None
Power save mode ON OFF None
Standby ON ON ON** All
* IP-CPU: CPU for the scanner controller PCB.

** Includes the condition existing from when pre-heating ends until when the fixing
heater reaches the temperature setting.
T08-303-01
3.3.2 Diagram of Transition to Sleep Mode

a. Starting Sleep Mode
Standby
Press on the
Power Save key
Time-out by the timer for transition to
low power mode
Power Save Mode

The amount of power consumed
in this mode varies according to
the setting made by the Power
Save key ( -10%, -25%, -50%).
Low power mode
Fixing heater OFF
F08-303-01
b. Leaving Sleep Mode
Standby
Press on the Power Save key (Power Save key ON)
Power Save Mode

The amount of power consumed
in this mode varies according to
the setting made by the Power
Save key (-10%, -25%, -50%).
Low power mode
Fixing heater OFF
F08-303-02
4 Counter
4.1 Outline
The machine increments its counter readings as follows according to the outputs of the
sensors (inside tray, copy tray, or sorter):
Name and function Timing of activation

Center tray delivery sensor (PS7) Upon delivery to the center tray.
Delivery sensor (PS8) Upon delivery to the copy tray.
Communication from the sorter When connected to the sorter.
T08-401-01 Counter Sensors
PS7
PS8
F08-401-01 Arrangement of the Counter Sensors
CNT2
CNT1
F08-401-02 Location of the Counter
4.2 Counter Operations

CNT2 L (large): for A2 , B3 , or manual feed free size 451 mm or larger, 1 count/
copy
CNT1 S (small): for A3 or smaller, manual feed free size 450 mm or smaller, 1 count/
copy; if double-sided, however, 2 counts/copy
The identification of the size of paper picked up from the cassette will be based on the
setting made by the paper size dial mounted to the cassette. The length of manual feed free
size paper, further, is detected while the paper entry sensor 1(inside; PS2) remains on.
Counter Description
Total copy counter During copying, increments the count for each test print; however, it ignores
blank sheet if “no copying on manually fed transparency” or “no copying on
cover” is selected.
T08-402-01 Counter Sensor

5.1 External Covers

Names of Covers
Vertical size plate
Upper rear cover Horizontal size plate

Upper right cover
Left upper face
plate (rear)
Upper front cover
Left upper face
plate (front)
Control panel lower cover
Left upper
cover Front cover
Left rear cover
Delivery cover
Left lower face
plate (rear) Documentation case
Left lower cover
Left lower face plate (front) Left front cover
Face cover
Control panel
Control panel left cover
Right upper cover

Right inside cover
Right rear face plate
Inlet face
plate Control panel right
cover
Right rear cover
Manual feed cover
Right lower cover
Right front cover
Rear cover
F08-501-01
Remove the covers as shown when cleaning, inspecting, or repairing the in-
side of the machine. Those covers that may be detached by mere removal of
mounting screws are omitted from the discussions.
5.1.1 Left Upper Cover

1) Remove the screw [1] on the left of the
[3]
control panel left cover.
2) Remove the four screws [2], and detach [2] [1]
the left upper cover [3].
[2]
F08-501-02
5.1.2 Left Lower Cover

left rear cover [1]. [4]
2) Remove the screw (one each), and de-
tach the left lower face plate (rear) [2]
and the left lower face plate (front) [3]. [1]
[2]
3) Remove the two screws [4] on the left,
and detach the left lower cover [5]. (The
[4] [3]
one on the right is hooked on a claw.)
[5]
F08-501-03
5.1.3 Right Rear Cover

1) Remove the screw, and detach the right
rear face plate [1].
right rear cover [3].
[3]
[2]
F08-501-04
5.1.4 Upper Rear Cover

1) Remove the copyboard cover or the
DADF.
2) Remove the four screws, and detach the
[4] [5]
horizontal size plate.
3) Remove the screw [2] from the two lo-
[4]
cations at the rear of the right upper
[1]
cover.
[2]
4) Remove the screw [3] from the two lo-
cations at the rear of the left upper
cover.
the upper rear cover [5].
F08-501-05
[3]
F08-501-06
5.1.5 Control Panel Left Cover

[1]
control panel lower cover [1].
[2]
F08-501-07
2) Remove the screw [3] on the right of the

[4]
control panel left cover [2].
[3]
upper front cover.
control panel left cover, and detach the
[5]
control panel left cover.
[2]
F08-501-08
5.1.6 Control Panel Right Cover

control panel lower cover. [1] [3]
2) Remove the screw [2] on the left for the
control panel right cover [1]. [2]
upper cover. [4]
control panel right cover, and detach the
control panel right cover.
5) Disconnect the connector.
F08-501-09
5.1.7 Left Front Cover

control panel lower cover.
2) Slide out all cassettes.
3) Remove the screw [1] from the bottom. [2] [3]
4) Remove the control panel left cover.
the left front cover [3].
[1]
F08-501-10
5.1.8 Right Upper Cover

1) Remove the right front cover [1].
2) Remove the right rear cover [2].
3) Open the multifeeder tray [3], and de- [6]
tach the right inside cover [4]. (4 [5] [2]
screws)
4) Remove the control panel right cover
[5]. [1]
5) Remove the seven screws, and detach [3]
the right upper cover [6]. [4]
The top two screws are hex-

headed screws. F08-501-11
5.1.9 Control Panel

1) Open the copyboard cover or the
DADF.
2) Remove the control panel lower cover. [1]
3) Remove the four screws of the upper

front cover [1].
F08-501-12
4) Remove the control panel left cover.

[2] [5]
5) Remove the control panel right cover.
6) Disconnect the three connectors [2]
from the control panel bottom.
7) Free the harness from the edge saddle
[3].
8) Remove the six screws [4], and detach
the control panel [5].
[4]
[3]
F08-501-13
5.2 DC Controller PCB

1) Disconnect the power plug.
3) Remove the six screws [1], and discon-
nect all connectors [2].
Detach the DC controller PCB [3]. [1]
[1] [3]
[2]
[1]
F08-502-01
5.3 DC Driver PCB

1) Disconnect the power plug, and detach
[3]
the rear cover.
[1]
connect all connectors [2]; then, detach
the DC driver PCB [3].
[1]
[1] [2]
F08-503-01
5.4 DC Power Supply PCB (multiple output/single output)

1) Disconnect the power plug, and detach [2] [2]
the rear cover, face plate (both rear and [2]
front), and left lower cover; then, detach
the power supply cover [1]. (7 screws
[2])
[1]
[2] [2]
[2] [2]
F08-504-01

nect the connector [4]; then, detach the [6] [8]
[6]
fan [5]. [5]
connect the four connectors [7]; then,
[4]
detach the DC power supply PCB (mul-
tiple outputs) [8].
[7]
[6] [6] [3]
F08-504-02

connect the three connectors [10]; then,
[9]
detach the DC power supply PCB
(single output) [11].
[10] [9] [11] [10] [9]
F08-504-03
5.5 Fans
If the screw used to secure the fan in place is loose, abnormal noise can be
heard when the fan rotates. Be sure to tighten all screws when mounting the
fan.
5.5.1 Cooling Fan and Exhaust Fan (exhausting air from the top of the fixing
assembly and inside the process unit)
2) Free the harness [2] routed to the side [2]
of the blower duct [1].
the blower duct.
4) Disconnect the connector [5] of the fan
[4], and detach the fan. (2 screws [6])
[3]
Each fan has its own direction
of air current. Pay attention
when mounting it. [1]
F08-505-01
[5]
[4]
[6]
F-08-505-02
5.5.2 Cooling Fan (exhausting air from the outlet of the fixing assembly)
2) Disconnect the connector [2] of the fan
[1].
the fan.
[3]
Each fan has its own direction

when mounting it. [1]
[3]
F08-505-03
5.5.3 Cooling Fan (cooling the DC power supply)

1) Remove the left rear cover.
2) Remove the left lower face plate (both
front and rear).
3) Remove the left lower cover, and detach
[1]
the power supply cover.
4) Remove the fan [1] together with its fix-
ing, and disconnect the connector. (2
screws [2])
Each fan has its own direction [2]

when mounting it. F08-505-04
6 Dehumidifying Heater
Mounting the Dehumidifying Heater
1) Slide out the cassettes, and remove the
duplex unit. (4 screws each)
After sliding out the cassette,

push in the slide rails inside the
machine to prevent damage.
2) Fit the heater [1] (10W×2 pc.) in the

[3]
middle groove (2 screws each); then, [2] [2]
mount the heater cover [2] (2 screws
each). Connect the connector [3] of the
heater.
[1]
F08-600-01
3) Remove the harness cover [4], detach

[4]
the connector cap [5] from the left rear.
4) Fit the heater (15W × 1 pc.) in the [5]
groove of the base surface. (2 screws).
[7]
[8]
[9] [6]
F08-600-02
5) Fix the harness of the heater as shown

in place using the clamp [8] (2 loca- [8]
tions); then, attach the transparent pro- [9]
tective sheet [7] over it.
6) Connect the connector of the heater, and
mount the heater cover [9]. (2 screws [8]
each)
When attaching the protective

sheet, check to make sure that
[9]
the harness is firmly fitted in the [7] [6]
groove.
F08-600-03
Correct Wrong
Harness Harness
Heater cover Heater cover
Base Base
Protective sheet Protective sheet
F08-600-04
7) Mount the harness cover to its initial

position.
8) Slide in the cassettes.
7 Anti-Condensation Heater
Mounting the Anti-Condensation Heater
1) Remove the copyboard glass, and re-
move the cable cover.
2) Disconnect the anti-condensation heater
(15W × 1 pc.) [1], and connect the con-
nector (2 screws).
[1]
F08-700-01
CHAPTER 9
INSTALLATION
1 Selecting the Site

The site of installation must meet the following conditions; if possible, pay a visit to the
user’s before delivery of the machine:
1. The site must provide an exclusive power source (rating ±10%), enabling proper
grounding.
2. The temperature of the site must be between 15° and 30°C and humidity, between 5%
and 80%RH. (Be sure to avoid areas near a water faucet, water boiler, humidifier, and
refrigerator.)
3. The site must not be close to a source of fire and must not be subject to dust, ammonium
gas, or direct rays of the sun. (As necessary, provide curtains to block out the sun.)
4. The level of ozone generated by the machine in operation is not likely to affect the
health of the people around it. Some individuals, however, may find its odor unpleasant,
requiring proper ventilation of the room.
5. The floor of the site must be such that all the feet of the machine will remain in contact
and the machine will remain level.
6. The machine must be kept at least 10 cm away from any wall, and there must be ad-
equate space for the user operating the machine.
1.1 Outline of the Work Space

The figures that follow show the space requirements for maintenace work:
£ Copier Only
10 cm
170 cm
min.
180 cm min.
F09-101-01
10 cm
£ Copier + Copy Tray
170 cm
min.
220 cm
F09-101-02
10 cm
£ Copier + Stapler Sorter
170 cm
min.
230 cm min.
F09-101-03
2 Unpacking and Installation

When a piece of metal is brought from a cold to warm place, droplets of water can at
times form on its surface. This phenomenon is known as “condensation,” and a copier can
generate black copies if it is subjected to it. To avoid condensation, be sure to leave the ma-
chine alone at least one hour at the site of installation without unpacking if it has been
brought into the site from a cold place.
• The machine weighs 200 kg. Be sure to work as a group of four when
lifting it.
• Be sure not to hold it by the chassis or covers near that cassette or by the
cassette itself when installing or moving the machine.
Unpack and install the machine in the following sequence:

1. Opening the shipping box and removing the fixing material
2. Mounting the developing assembly
3. Supplying the toner
4. Stirring the toner
5. Setting the cassette
6. Noting the points of installing or moving the machine
7. Installing the Control Card V (CC-V)
8. Installing the Copy Data Controller-A1
9. Installing the NE Controller-A1
10. Installing the expansion memory
2.1 Opening the Shipping Box and Removing the Fixing Mate-
rial
1) Cut the straps, and lift the shipping box
[1] to detach.
2) Take out the photosensitive drum [2]
and the toner cartridge [3], and put [3]
[2]
them away.
Store away the documentation [4] and [1]
power cord [5] found inside the center
tray: i.e., QR Sheer, Service Book, User
Card.
3) Cut the plastic bag at the bottom of the
machine. [4]
[5]
4) Pull out the grips at the front of the ma-
chine. (Screws are included.)
5) Remove the face plate [6], and fit the
grip [7]. [9]
[7]
6) Remove the face plate [8], and fit the
grip [7]. [6]
7) Holding the grips at the front, lift the
machine, and remove the cushion from
the front.
9) Remove the two rails [9] from the cen-
[7]
ter of the pallet (4 screws). [8]
10) Secure the rails in place to the rails with
two screws.
11) Holding the grips, lower the machine F09-201-01
along the rails.
12) Remove the tape from the top and the

right side of the machine.
F09-201-02
13) Remove the tape from the outside and

the inside of the left of the machine and
from behind the front cover.
14) Remove the cushion [10] (w/ label) [12]
used to support the inside feeding as- [11] [10]
sembly and the face plate [11]; then, re-
move the scanner fixing screw [12], and [12]
put back the face plate.
15) After moving the machine to the site of
installation, remove the grips fitted in
steps 5) and 6), and attach the covers.
F09-201-03
16) Remove the tape from the cassette 2.
Store away the size label found

in the cassette.
F09-201-04
17) Remove the tape from the cassettes 3/4.
F09-201-05
18) Open the front cover, and loosen the

screw [13]; then, remove the fixing [14]
used to keep the fixing assembly in
place and the protective sheet [15].
Keep the screw loose for now.
[14]
[15]
[13]
F09-201-06
2.2 Mounting the Developing Assembly

1) Open the front cover, and remove the
process cover [1]. (3 screws [2])
2) Shift the feeding assembly lever to the [1]
release position.
[2]
F09-202-01
3) Pull out the process unit [3] fully.
[3]
F09-202-02
4) Remove the tape [4] used to keep the

developing assembly in place and the
tape equipped with a pad. (both sides). [4]
Shift the fixing [6] (1 screw each [7]),
and remove the developing assembly
[8].
[5]
[6] [4]
[8] [7]
F09-202-03
Pay attention to avoid certain

areas of the developing assem- Hold here.
bly when holding it. Do not hold
the motor.
F09-202-04
Rear of the Developing Assembly
Do not hold here.
Support it from the bottom.
F09-202-05
Front of the Developing Assembly
5) Remove the paper [9] used to protect

the developing cylinder.
[9]
F09-202-06
6) Open the box [10] that contains the

photosensitive drum. [11]
7) Holding the flange, pull it out of the
box.
[10]
F09-202-07
Take extra care not to damage

The photosensitive drum is
highly susceptible to light, and
exposure to light as weak as
room lighting can cause it to
produce copies with white spots
or black lines; note the follow-
ing to avoid possible problems:
• Try to work within 5 min
when removing a jam.
• If the process unit must be
kept out using servicing
work, put copy paper fresh
out of package over the pho-
tosensitive drum.
• Do not touch the surface of
• If the surface of the photosen-
sitive drum is soiled, clean it
with a flannel cloth coated
with toner (do not use paper,
lint-free or otherwise).
• Do not clean the surface of
the photosensitive drum by
dry wiping or using a solvent.
8) Holding the photosensitive drum with

both your hands, fit it to the process
unit keeping its gear assembly toward
the rear; then, try putting the process
unit inside the machine. If it fails to
slide all the way in, slide it out some-
what, and then turn the photosensitive
drum. Repeat this until it slides all the
way in. (After making sure it has slid all
the way in, slide it out and go to the
next step.)
F09-202-08
9) Mount the developing assembly to the

process unit, and connect the connector.
Check to make sure that it has

engaged with both front guide [12]
[12] and the rear guide [13].
(both sides)
[13]
F09-202-09
10) Secure the developing assembly in

place with its fixing.
11) Slide in the process unit until it stops.
12) Mount the process cover.
13) Lock the lever of the feeding assembly.
2.3 Supplying the Toner

1) Hold the cartridge level, and move it
left and right slightly several times.
F09-203-01
2) Keeping the sharper end of its grip to

the left, slide in the toner cartridge
slowly until it stops.
F09-203-02
3) Turn the toner cartridge clockwise so

that the sharper edge of the grip points
to the locking position.
F09-203-03
4) Pull out the OPEN seal of the toner car-

tridge.
5) Close the front cover.
F09-203-04
2.4 Stirring the Toner

1) Check to make sure that the breaker
switch is ON.
2) Connect the power plug to the power [1]
outlet.
3) Turn on the main power switch [1].
ON
OFF
F09-204-01
4) Start service mode to stir the toner:

a. Start service mode as follows: Level 2 Item Screen of Service Mode
1. Press the User Mode key.
Display I/O Adjust Function Option Test Counter
2. Press ‘2’ and ‘8’ of the keypad at the
same time. VERSION CCD
3. Press the User Mode key. USER
4. Press <COPIER> indicated on the ACC-STS
screen to select; the Level 2 Item ANALOG
screen of service mode will appear. CST-STS SENSOR
JAM
ERR
F09-204-02
b. Stir the Toner Toner Stirring Screen

1) Press <FUNCTION>, and then press COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL>
<INSTALL> on the screen that ap- TONER-S
pears in response.
2) Press to highlight <TONER-S>, and
<INSTALL> <1/1> <READY>
press OK to start stirring the toner:
TONER-S
• The operation will take about 2 to
3 min.
• To stop in the middle, press the
Stop key.
• All keys except the Stop key are
disabled.
3) When the operation has ended, press
the Reset key twice to end service +/- OK
mode.
F09-204-03
2.5 Setting the Cassette

1) Slide out the cassette.
F09-205-01
2) As shown, hold the length guide on

both its sides to remove; then, put it into
the index that suits the size of paper to
use.
F09-205-02
If the cassette 2 is to be used for

A3 horizontal or the cassette 3/4
is to be used for A2 horizontal,
be sure to securely fit the length
guide to the slot next to the
width guide.
F09-205-03
3) As shown, hold the width guide on both

its sides, and slide it to the index that
suits the size of paper to use. (A click
will be heard, indicating that the guide
has been locked in place.)
F09-205-04
4) Turn the paper size dial found on the

right of the cassette setting it to the size
B3R
B
4 A2R A
of paper to use.
3R
4
A3 A
F09-205-05
5) Take out the size label, and attach it to

the size indicator.
A3
A2
A4
F09-205-06
6) Insert the size indicator in the middle of

the cassette from its bottom, and slide it
3
left and right so that the appropriate size A
comes into view. 4
A
The cassette 2 is not designed
for A2 paper; do not attach the
A2 label.
F09-205-07
7) Holding its grip, pull the cassette out to

the front until it stops.
F09-205-08
8) Open the package, and take out the pa-

per.
F09-205-09
9) Put the stack of paper into the cassette

(the side facing up when you took out
the stack must face down in the cas-
sette).
F09-205-10
10) Holding its grip, slide the cassette into

the machine until a click is heard.
F09-205-11
2.6 Making the Appropriate Settings

No. Work Remarks
1 Turn on the main power switch.
2 Press the User Mode key, and set the following: starting user mode>setting the timer>
date/time setting the date
Select the appropriate items from among the
user mode items.
3 Start service mode. Press , press ‘2’ and ‘8’ on the keypad at
the same time, and press once again.
4 Set the items selected by the user from among See 7.6 of Chapter 11.
the items in service mode:
COPIER>OPTION>USER.
T09-206-01
3 Relocating the Machine

If the machine needs to be relocated after installation by truck or other means of transpor-
tation, perform the following:
3.1 Preparing for Relocation

No. Work Checks
1 Take out the photosensitive drum. Use a separate box for the photosensitive
drum for transportation.
2 Take out the developing assembly. Protect the developing cylinder with A2
paper, and fit it in the process unit. (As a rule,
empty all toner, and clean the developing
assembly for transportation.)
3 Tape the feeding assembly releasing lever in
place to protect it against vibration.
4 Tape the front cover, delivery assembly, and
cassettes in place.
5 Put a sheet of A2 paper on the copyboard glass,
and tape the copyboard or the DADF in place.
6 Fix the No. 1 mirror base in place with a
scanner fixing screw.
T09-301-01
When lifting the machine for relocation, be sure to fit its grips and support
it by holding the grips. Do not hold it by the chassis or covers near the cas-
sette or by the cassette itself.
4 Installing the Accessories

4.1 Installing the Control Card V (CC-V)
Before starting the work, be sure to turn
off the power switch and disconnect the
power plug.
4.1.1 Removing the Control Panel Right Cover

the control panel lower cover [1].
[1]
[2]
F09-401-01
2) Open the copyboard cover [3] or the

DADF. [3]
F09-401-02
3) Remove the screw [5] on the farthest

right of the copyboard front cover [4]. [4] [5]
F09-401-03
4) Disconnect the connector [6] of the har-

ness that comes from the control panel [6]
right cover.
Free the harness from the edge saddle
[7] and the clamp [8]. (2 locations.)
[8]
[7]
F09-401-04
5) Disconnect the shorting connector [9].

The removed connector will no longer
be needed.
[9]
F09-401-05

the control panel right cover [10]; place [11]
it on the copyboard glass with its back
facing up.
Place paper on the copyboard glass to
protect it against damage.
[10]
[11]
F09-401-06
4.1.2 Preparing for the Installation of the Control Card Unit

1) Remove the inlet face plate [1].
[1]
F09-401-07
2) Remove the screw [2] of the face cover.

3) Remove the protective sheet from the [2]
indicator assembly of the control card
unit.
F09-401-08
4.1.3 Installing the Control Card Unit [2]

1) Fix the control card unit in place on the
control panel right cover using the four
[2]
screws [2] that come with the unit.
Try to fix the control card unit

in place where a card may be
slid in and out smoothly.
[1]
F09-401-09
Check to make sure that the

connector [3] for the printer is
centered in the hole.
[3]
F09-401-10
2) Secure the grounding wire [4] in place [4]

using the screw [5] that comes with the
unit.
3) Mount the control panel right panel. [5]
4) Connect the connector [6], and secure
the grounding wire and the harness to
the edge saddle and the clamp.
[6]
F09-401-11
5) Put the plastic sheet [7] over the hole in

the control panel right panel (indicator [7]
opening of the control card unit).
F09-401-12
6) Attach the control panel label [8] on the

[8]
front right panel control panel.
F09-401-13
7) Turn on the host machine’s main power

switch, and check the operation of the
control card unit.
5 Installing the Copy Data Controller A1

5.1 Setting Up the Board
[2] [2]
the top cover [1] of the controller.
F09-501-01
2) Set the DIP switches (SW1, SW5) of

the controller to suit the needs of the
user.
2-1) To suit the type of host machine, set
the DIP switch (SW1-4).
2-2) If group control is planed, set the DIP
switch (SW5-2) to suit the size of pa-
per to use.
To use AB-configuration paper (A3,
A4, B4, B5), shift bit 2 to OFF.
To use Inch-configuration paper
(11×17, LTR, LGL, STMT), shift bit 2
to ON.
bit Position Function Remarks

SW1 1-3 OFF for normal operation
4 ON for IPC communication CLC700/800, NP6750, NP6016
GP Series, iR70W/75W
OFF for serial communication NP6030, NP6060, NP8530, NP9800
5 ON for use of central control equipment An Interface Board-B1 is needed.
OFF for normal operation or for use of For remote control using a
remote control using a commercially commercially available modem,
available modem an Interface Board-B1 as well as the
modem will be needed.
6 ON for RAM clear
OFF for normal operation
SW5 1 ON for factory adjustment
2 ON for control of Inch-configuration For control of paper other than the
paper (11×17, LTR, LGL, STMT) left, use service mode to make
appropriate settings.
OFF for control of AB-configuration See 10) of 5.3 “Checking the
paper (A3, A4, B4, B5) Operations.”
3 ON for service mode
4 ON for group control
OFF when not using group control
5, 6 OFF not used
T09-501-01
2-3) If group control is not planned, shift

LED1 LED2 LED3
bit 4 of the DIP switch (SW5-4) to SW2
OFF. SW3
If connection of an Interface Board- LED4 LED5 LED6

SRAM
EPROM
B1, Communications Control Board- JA1
A1, or Interface Board-A1 is planned, JC8 JB2

JA2
JC5 JC6
see “Setting Up the Board” in the In- CPU
JC9
JB1
J5 IPC
stallation Procedure that comes with 6 1 6 1 SW4
the respective board.

SW1 ON SW5 ON
SW1 SW5
6 1 6 1
F09-501-02
LED1 LED2 LED3

3) Set the jumper connector (JA1, JA2, SW2
JB1, JB2) on the controller to suit the SW3

LED4 LED5 LED6
needs of the user.
SRAM
EPROM
JA1 JA1
JC8 JB2
JA2
JC5 JC6
CPU
JC9 JA2
J5 IPC
6 1 6 1 SW4
SW1 ON SW5 ON
JB2 JB1
F09-501-03
A: If connection of a Communications
Control Board-A1 or Interface
Board-B1 is planned (requiring a
Power Supply-A1),
JB2 JB1
F09-501-04
B: If connection of a Communications
Board-A1 or Interface Board-B1 is JA1
not planned (not requiring a Power
Supply-A1),
JA2
F09-501-05
5.2 Installing to the Host Machine

Be sure to observe the following when
installing the controller to its host machine:
1. All related regulations of the country
must be complied with.
2. The host machine must have been prop-
erly installed.
3. The power plug of the host machine
must be disconnected.
4. The screws must be identified by type
(length, diameter) and location.
5. The PC at the service station must be
set up with the appropriate settings (in
the case of remote control only).

the rear cover of the host machine.
[2]
[1]
[2]
F09-502-01
2) Locate the 9P connector [3] and the 8P

connector [4] inside the machine. (Cut
the red harness band.)
[3] [4]
F09-502-02
3) If installation of a card reader is

planned, connect the 9P connector of
the card reader cable to J4 of the con-
troller.
J4
Card reader cable
F09-502-03
4) Connect the 8P connector [6] of the

controller to the 8P connector [5] of the
host machine.
[6] [5]
F09-502-04
5) Secure the controller [7] in place to the

face plate of the rear cover of the host
machine with four screws [8].
[7]
[8]
F09-502-05

1) Securely connect the connector [1] of [2]
the Power Supply-A1 to the connector
[2] of the controller as shown.
Be sure that the cord is in the groove of
the board.
[1]
Groove in the board
F09-503-01
2) Connector the Power Supply-A1 to the LED1

power plug, and check to make sure that LED1 LED2 LED3
SW2
LED1 of the controller goes on. SW3
LED4 LED5 LED6
SRAM
EPROM JA1
JC8 JB2
JA2
JC5 JC6 JB1
JC9
CPU
J5 IPC
6 1 6 1 SW4
SW1 ON SW5 ON
F09-503-02
3) Turn on the main switch of the host ma- LED2 LED3

chine, and check to make sure that LED1 LED2 LED3
SW2
LED2 of the controller flashes. SW3
Make a copy to make sure that LED3 LED4 LED5 LED6
flashes while the copy is being made.

SRAM
EPROM
JA1
JC8 JB2
JA2
JC5 JC6 JB1
JC9
CPU
J5 IPC
6 1 6 1 SW4
SW1 ON SW5 ON
F09-503-03
4) If connection of a Communications LED1 LED2 LED3

Control Board-A1 or Interface Board-
LED1 LED2 LED3
B1 is planned (for the Power Supply- SW2
A1), go to step 5). SW3
Turn on the main switch of the host ma- LED4 LED5 LED6
chine, and check to make sure that
SRAM
EPROM
JA1
LED1 of the controller goes on and its JC8 JB2
JA2
LED2 flashes. JC5 JC6
JC9
JB1
CPU
Make a copy to make sure LED 3 J5 IPC
SW4
flashes while the copy is being made. 6 1 6 1
SW1 ON SW5 ON
F09-503-04
5) If group control is not planned, go to LED1 LED2 LED3

SW2
step 11). SW3
If group control is planned, set the LED4 LED5 LED6
method of input, mode of control, and
SRAM
size of paper to suit the needs of the EPROM JA1
JC8 JB2
user; shift bit 3 of the DIP switch JC5 JC6 JB1
JA2
(SW5-3) on the controller to ON. CPU

JC9
IPC
J5
6 1 6 1 SW4
SW1 ON SW5 ON
6 1
SW5-3
F09-503-05
6) Connect the connector [3] of the Nu- [4]

meric Keypad-A1 to the connector J3 [3]
[4] of the controller.
F09-503-06
7) Press the switch (SW2) on the control- SW2

ler to start service mode.
LED1 LED2 LED3
SW2
SW3
LED4 LED5 LED6
SRAM
EPROM
JA1
JC8 JB2
JA2
JC5 JC6 JB1
JC9
CPU
J5 IPC
6 1 6 1 SW4
SW1 ON SW5 ON
F09-503-07
8) Set the method of input as follows:

8-1) Decide on either card input or ID in-
put. (Initially, card input is selected.)
8-2) To change from card input to ID input,
use the Numeric Keypad-A1.
To change from ID input to card input
(requiring the Card Reader -A1), go to
8-4).
‘MANAGE=CARD’ will be indicated.
8-3) Press ‘2’, and press ‘ENTER’.
‘MANAGE=ID’ will be indicated.
8-4) To change to card input, press ‘1’ and
then ‘END’ so that the notation will
change to ‘MANAGE=CARD’.
Code Method of input

1 Card
2 ID
T09-503-01
1. If bit 4 of the DIP switch

(SW5-4) on the controller is
at OFF, group control is dis-
abled, and the notation will
be as follows:
2. If the host machine possesses F09-503-08
IDs in its memory, the data
may be used for the controller
by performing the following:
■ Drawing the IDs.

a) Set the DIP switch of the controller as
follows:
bit Position
SW1 1,2 ON
3 OFF
T09-503-02
b) Press the switch (SW4) of the control-

ler.
In response to a press, LED 5 will go on
momentarily.
c) When the data has been drawn, LED5
will go on. LED1 LED2 LED3
If the attempt to draw data fails, LED 5
flashes; in this case, press the switch
LED1 LED2 LED3
(SW4) once again to make sure that SW2
LED5 goes on. SW3

LED4 LED5 LED6
The host machine will not deliver sheets
while data is being drawn. JA1
JB2
d) Set the DIP switch (SW1) of the con- LED5 JA2
JB1
troller as follows; at this time, LED5
goes out: 6 1 6 1 SW4
SW1 ON SW5 ON
bit Position
SW1
1, 2, 3 OFF
SW1-3 SW1-2 SW1-1 SW4
T09-503-03 F09-503-09
9) Set the mode of control as follows:

9-1) Select the mode of control using the
Numeric Keypad-A1; press / until
the notation is ‘FORMAT=1’.
9-2) Select the appropriate control mode
number to suit the type of host ma-
chine and the needs of the user; ini-
tially, ‘1’ is selected.
Number Paper
No. of size Mode
groups
1 3000 5 -
2 1000 5 Single-sided/
double-sided
3 1000 5 Mono, 2-color,
Full-color
T09-503-04
9-3) For instance, to select ‘3’ for the con-

trol mode number, perform the follow-
ing:
1. The notation is ‘FORM=1’. Initially, ‘1’
is selected; to change it to ‘3’,
Press ‘3’, and then ‘c’ to clear the set-
ting so that the field becomes ready for
a new input.
A press on the ESC key will end the op-
eration.
2. When the notation has changed to
‘FORMAT=3-’, press the ESC key.
3. The notation remains ‘FORMAT=3-’
and the cursor flashes for a while, dur-
ing which formatting takes place. The
cursor will stop flashing at the end of
formatting.
Setting a new control number

will clear the unit price, upper
limit, counter readings, and ID
Nos., requiring new inputs.
10) Set the control paper size as follows:

10-1) Use the DIP switch on the controller
and the keypad to change the control
paper size. If the existing control pa-
per size is to be used, go to step 11).
10-2) Press / to scan through the
available sizes (control paper size 5
‘0TH’, however, cannot be changed
and therefore is not indicated).
EX 1
1. SIZE1=A3 is indicated.
2. Press .
4. Press .
5. SIZE3=B4 is indicated.
6. Press .
8. Press .
10. Press .
EX 2 : To change control paper size 3 (i.e.,

B4) to LGL,
1. Press / so that the notation is
‘SIZE3=B4’.
2. By referring to the following table of
conversion, find out the code for LGL;
press ‘1’ and ‘3’.
3. See that the notation is ‘SIZE3=13’.
4. Press ‘ENT’.
5. See that the notation is ‘SIZE3=LGL’,
indicating that the change has been
made.
1. For SIZE1 through 4, mul-

tiple paper size codes cannot
be used.
2. A change to the size will not
clear the counter readings.
■ Table of Conversion
Size Code Size Code

B5 1 25
FOOLS 2 U LARGE 2 26
A4 3 GLTR 27
B4 5 10 × 8 28
A3 7 GLGL 29
U SMALL (US) 8 KLGL 33
STMT 9 OFFICIO 35
U LARGE (UL) 10 EOFFICIO 36
LTR 11 AOFFICIO 37
LGL 13 BOFFICIO 38
LDR (11 × 7) 15 ALT R 39
A5 17 ALGL 41
AFOOLS 18 12 × 18 48
A6 19 B3 49
FOLIO 21 A2 50
COMPUTER 23 17 × 22 51
U SMALL 2 24 18 × 24 52
T09-503-05
11) Check the DIP switch settings as fol- S1 S5

lows:
11-1) Shift bit 3 of the DIP switch (SW5- SW1-1 SW1-3 SW1-5 SW5-1 SW5-3 SW5-5
3) on the controller to OFF. SW1-2 SW1-4 SW1-6 SW5-2 SW5-4 SW5-6
11-2) Press / so that the appropriate
: indicates that the bit is at ON.
settings of the DIP switches (SW1,
: indicates that the bit is at OFF.
SW5) on the controller appear.
F09-503-10
11-3) Check the settings of the DIP SW2

switches (SW1, SW5) on the con-
LED1 LED2 LED3
troller. SW2
If any of the settings is wrong, go SW3
LED4 LED5 LED6

back to “Setting Up the Board,” and
SRAM
EPROM
make a correction. JA1
For instructions on setting up the In- JC8 JB2
JA2
JC5
terface Board-B1, Interface Board- JC6
JC9
JB1
CPU
A1, or Communications Control J5 IPC
SW4
6 1 6 1
Board-A1 as an accessory, see the
SW1 ON SW5 ON
Installation Procedure that comes
with the respective board.
6 1
11-4) Press the switch (SW2).
SW5-3
F09-503-11
11-5) Check that the following notation

appears on the keypad; then, discon-
nect the keypad.
F09-503-12
12) Attach the Switch Settings label [6] on [7]

the top cover [5], and record the setting
of each switch on the label.
[6]
[5]
[7]
F09-503-13
13) Secure the top cover in place with two

screws [7].
When securing the top cover, check to
make sure that the cable of the power
supply unit is fixed in place to the cable
guide and is not trapped by the top
cover.
14) If a Control Card Printer-A1 is to be
used, connect it to the connector J4 of
the controller (as necessary, use the re-
lay cable).
J4
F09-503-14
15) Check to make sure that no part of the

cable is outside the controller to end the
work.
Attach the petty-pull to the right bottom
of the back of the host machine.
[8]
F09-503-15
16) Secure the cable connected to the con-

troller to the petty-pull.
17) Check to make sure that no cable is
trapped by the host machine or the cas-
tors of the sorter.
6 Installing the Remote Diagnostic Device II

Note: The Remote Diagnostic Device II is not available in certain sales areas.
6.1 Installing to the Host Machine

Be sure to observe the following for the installation work:
1. All regulations of the country must be complied with.
2. The host machine must have been properly installed.
3. The power plug of the host machine must be disconnected.
4. The screws must be identified by type (length, diameter) and location.
5. The PC at the service station must be set up using the appropriate settings.
1) Remove the two screws [2], and detach [1] [2]

the top cover [1]. [2]
F09-601-01
2) Connect the connector [3] for the power [4]

supply unit to the connector [4] of the
controller.
[3]
F09-601-02

the face plate [5] from the face plate [5]
of the rear cover of the host machine. [6]
[5]
[6]
F09-601-03
4) Locate the 9P connector [8] and the 8P

connector [9] inside the machine. (Cut
the red harness band.)
[8] [9]
F09-601-04
5) Mount the rear cover.

6) Connect the 8P connector [11] of the
controller to the 8P connector [10] of
the host machine.
[11] [10]
F09-601-05
7) Secure the controller [12] to the rear

cover of the host machine with four
screws [13]. (Use the screws that come
with the controller.) [12]
[13]
F09-601-06
8) Put any slack length of the cable be-

tween the unit and the host machine in-
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
side the host machine. [15]
9) Shift bit 4 of the DIP switch (SW2-4)
[15] on the PCB of the unit to ON (so
that the communication between the
controller and the host machine will be
in IPC mode). LED1 LED2 LED3
2 6
BAT1
1 1 1
SW2 SW3
LED5 SW4
LED6
LED4 2
IC6 CN4
SW1
CN3 CN2
F09-601-07
10) If IC6 [16] is mounted on the PCB of

the controller, shift bit 7 of the DIP
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
switch (SW2-7) [17] to ON; otherwise,
[17]
shift it to OFF.
1. If IC6 [16] is not mounted,

you need not mount one.
2. If a ROM (IC6) [16] needs to LED1 LED2 LED3
2 6
BAT1
be mounted or replaced for LED5

SW2
1 1
SW3
1
SW4
upgrading the controller, be LED6

LED4
IC6
2
CN4
sure to shift bit 7 of the DIP SW1 [16]

switch (SW2-7) [17] to ON.
CN3 CN2
F09-601-08
11) Set the bits on the DIP switch (SW3)

[18] on the PCB of the controller as in-
dicated in the following table:
1 2 3 4 5 6
[18]
LED1 LED2 LED3

2 6
BAT1
1 1 1
SW2 SW3
LED5 SW4
LED6
LED4 2
IC6 CN4
SW1
CN3 CN2
F09-601-09
Switch Setting Description

notation SW3-1 SW3-2 Function
SW3-1 See right OFF OFF Sets the signal transmission level of the modem to -16 dBm.
SW3-2 ON OFF Sets the signal transmission level of the modem to -14 dBm.
OFF ON Sets the signal transmission level of the modem to -12 dBm.
ON ON Sets the signal transmission level of the modem to -10 dBm.
SW3-3 OFF Must be kept at OFF at all times.
SW3-4 ON Sets the line of the controller to push pulse mode.
OFF Sets the line of the controller to dial pulse mode.
SW3-5 ON Sets the speed of the dial pulses to 20 pps.
OFF Sets the speed of the dial pulses to 10 pps.
SW3-6 − Not used.
T09-601-01
12) Connect the power unit to the power [19]

plug, and see that LED1 [19] on the
PCB of the unit goes on (green).
LED1 LED2 LED3
2 6
BAT1
1 1 1
SW2 SW3
LED5 SW4
LED6
LED4 2
IC6 CN4
SW1
CN3 CN2
F09-601-10
13) Execute RAM clear for the unit. Set the

bits of the DIP switch (SW2) [20] as
indicated in the following table, and
press the push switch (SW4) [21]. A
press on the push switch will cause
LED5 [22] to go on (red).
Bits of SW2 Setting

SW2-1 OFF
SW2-2 OFF
SW2-3 ON
SW2-4 ON
SW2-5 OFF
SW2-6 OFF
SW2-7 See step 9).
SW2-8 OFF
T09-601-02
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
[19]
[22]
LED1 LED2 LED3
2 6
BAT1
1 1 1
SW2 SW3
LED5 SW4
LED6
LED4
IC6
[21] 2
CN4
SW1
CN3 CN2
F09-601-11
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
[20]
[22]
LED1 LED2 LED3
2 6
BAT1
1 1 1
SW2 SW3
LED5 SW4
LED6
LED4
IC6
[21] 2
CN4
SW1
CN3 CN2
F09-601-12
14) After making sure that LED 5 [22] (red)

has gone on, set the bits of the DIP
switch (SW2) [20] on the PCB of the
controller as indicated in the following
table; then, press the push switch (SW4)
[21]. A press on the push switch will
cause LED5 (red) [22] to go off, indi-
cating the end of RAM clear.
bits of SW2 Setting

SW2-1 OFF
SW2-2 OFF
SW2-3 OFF
SW2-4 ON
SW2-5 OFF
SW2-6 ON
SW2-7 See step 9).
SW2-8 OFF
T09-601-03
15) Shift bit 6 of the DIP switch (SW2-6)

[23] on the PCB of the controller to
OFF.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
[23]
LED1 LED2 LED3

2 6
BAT1
1 1 1
SW2 SW3
LED5 SW4
LED6
LED4 2
IC6 CN4
SW1
CN3 CN2
F09-601-13
16) Connect the telephone line to the con-

troller. LED1 LED2 LED3
2 6
BAT1
If the unit is to be used on its own, con-
1 1 1
nect the modular jack cable to the con- LED5
SW2
SW4
SW3
LED6
nector identified as LINE [24]. LED4
IC6
2
CN4
If the use of the extension function of
SW1
the controller is planned, connect the
existing telephone or the fax machine to
the connector identified as TEL [25], CN3 CN2
and then connect the telephone line
cable to the connector identified as
LINE [24].
[25] [24]
F09-601-14
17) Place a telephone call to the service sta-

tion, and request the initial settings of LED1 LED2 LED3
2 6
BAT1
the controller. (Upon arrival, LED 4 SW2

1 1
SW3
1
LED5 SW4
(red) [26] will go on.) [26] LED6
LED4 2
IC6 CN4
SW1
CN3 CN2
F09-601-15
18) Place a telephone call to the service sta-

tion to find out whether the initial set-
tings have been made.
If the attempt to make the initial settings
has failed, repeat steps from 12) to 14)
to try once again.
Be sure to check with the ser-

vice station once again to make
sure that the settings are correct.
19) Find out whether the controller is ca-

pable of placing a call to the service sta-
tion.
Press the push switch (SW4) [21]) on
the PCB of the controller. A press on
the push switch will cause LED6 [27] to
go on (red); the LED will go off at the
end of a successful transmission or will
LED1 LED2 LED3
flash to indicate a failed transmission. 2 6
BAT1
When the push switch (SW4) [21] is LED5

SW2
1 1
SW3
1
pressed while LED6 [27] is flashing, [27] LED6

SW4
2
LED4
IC6
[21] CN4
transmission is started once gain. SW1
When the push switch (SW1) [28] is [28]

pressed while LED6 [27] is flashing,
CN3 CN2
the transmission from the controller will
be canceled.
F09-601-16
20) Check to make sure that the communi- [29]

cation between the controller and the
host machine is normal. LED1 LED2 LED3
2 6
Connect the power lpug of the host ma- BAT1
1 1
chine, and turn on the power switch to LED5
SW2
SW4
SW3
1
LED6
make sure that LED 2 [29] flashes (or- LED4
IC6
2
CN4
ange). SW1
CN3 CN2
F09-601-17
21) Press the Start key of the host machine, [30]

and check to make sure that LED3 [30]
flashes (pink) each time delivery is LED1 LED2 LED3
2 6
made. BAT1
1 1 1
SW2 SW3
LED5 SW4
LED6
LED4 2
IC6 CN4
SW1
CN3 CN2
F09-601-18
22) Attach the switch settings label [31] to [2]

the top cover of the controller, and
record the setting of each switch. [31]
[1]
[2]
F09-601-19
23) Secure the top cover [1] of the control-

ler with two screws [2]. When doing so,
check to make sure that the cable of the
power unit is fixed in place to the cable
guide inside the controller and is not
trapped by the upper cover [1].
7 Expansion Memory
7.1 Mounting Expansion Memory
2) Mount the expansion memory to CN4/
CN5 of the image processing PCB. (If
you are mounting only one memory, be Match against the
sure to use CN4.) groove.
3) Fit the expansion memory into the slot
at an angle.
4) Shift down the expansion memory.
Be sure to shift the expansion CN4

memory in the direction of the
CN5
arrow until a click is heard.
Avoid, however, applying too
much force.
F09-701-01
CHAPTER 10
MAINTENANCE/INSPECTION
1 Periodically Replaced Parts

The machine has the following that requires replacement on a periodical basis:
No. Name Parts No. Q'ty

1 Ozone filter [1] FD3-8920-000 2 50,000 copies or 1 yr.
2 Ozone filter [2] FD3-9459-000 1 50,000 copies or 1 yr.
T10-100-01
[1]
[2]
F10-100-01
2 Estimated Lives of Durables

Some parts of the machine may require replacement once or more over the period of
product warranty because of wear or damage. Replace them as needed by referring to the
following table:
The counts are incremented as follows:
CNT2 L (large): if A2 , B3 , or manual feed free size 451 mm or larger, 1 count/
copy
CNT1 S (small): if A3 or smaller, manual feed free size 450 mm or smaller, 1 count/
copy
if double-sided, however, 2 counts/copy
Count for
No. Part name Part No. Q’ty Remarks
replacement
1 Cleaning pad holder FD3-9017-000 2 50,000
2 Primary charging wire FY3-0040-000 AR 50,000
3 Transfer charging wire FY3-0040-000 AR 50,000
4 Separation charging wire FY3-0040-000 AR 50,000
5 Upper fixing roller FD3-8770-000 1 200.000
6 Lower fixing roller FD3-8740-000 1 200,000
7 Cleaning roller FD3-8768-000 1 200,000 (fixing)
8 Upper separation claw FD3-8753-000 10 200,000
9 Lower separation claw FD3-8790-000 4 200,000
10 Pickup, feed, separation FD3-9035-000 3 100,000 All three rollers must be
roller kit (cassette) replaced at the same time.
11 Pickup, feed, separation FD3-9035-000 1 15,000
roller kit (multifeeder)
12 Developing cylinder FD3-8462-000 1 100,000
13 Developing supply roller FD3-8476-000 1 100,000
14 Developing assembly FD3-9036-000 1 100,000
seal kit
T10-200-01
3 Scheduled Servicing Chart
1. As a rule, provide scheduled servicing every 10,000 copies.

2. Before setting out on a visit, check the Service Book, and take parts for
which replacement is expected.
No. Work Checks Remarks

1 Report to the person in charge. Check the general condition.
2 Record the counter readings. Check the faulty copies.
3 Make test copies. Check the following: Note:
a. image density Standard:
b. soiling of white background 3.5 ±1.0 mm
c. clarity of characters
d. margin along leading edge
(Note)
e. fixing/registration displace-
ment, soiling of back
f. counter operation
4 Clean the LED exposure unit. When cleaning the
5 Clean the primary charging assembly. parts, be sure to take
6 Clean the transfer guide: out the photosensitive
• transfer guide (upper/lower) plate drum.
• transfer charging assembly
7 Clean the separation charging/feed
assembly:
• separation charging assembly
• feed belt
8 Clean the fixing/delivery assembly:
• fixing assembly inlet guide
• separation claws (upper, lower)
9 Provide scheduled servicing to suit
the number of copies made.
10 Clean the copyboard glass.
11 Make test copies.
12 Perform the Image Adjustment Basic
Procedure.
13 Make sample copies.
14 Put the sample copies in order, and
clean up the area around the machine.
15 Record the latest counter readings.
16 Fill out the Service Book, and report
to the person in charge.
T10-300-01
4 Scheduled Servicing Table
Be sure not to use solvents and oils other than those listed in the table.
: Clean : Replace : Lubricate : Adjust : Inspect

As
Unit Part 10,000 20,000 50,000 Remarks
needed
Optical Drum Dry wiping
system, Image LED exposure unit Dry wiping;
formation lint-free paper
system Primary charging wire Alcohol
Corona frame (primary) Alcohol
Grid plate Alcohol
Cleaner pad assembly
Transfer charging wire Alcohol
Separation charging wire Alcohol
Corona frame Alcohol
(transfer/separation)
Pre-exposure Dry wiping;
lint-free paper
Separation lamp Dry wiping;
lint-free paper
Developing Developing member Alcohol
assembly (developing assembly)
Drive gear grease for resins
Process unit inside Bottom of develop-
ing assembly
Cartrige cover (inside) Dry wiping;
in-free paper
Feeding Transfer guide roller Alcohol
assembly Drive system gear grease for resins
Machine inside Inside feeding
assembly, transfer
assembly; alcohol
Fixing Fixing inlet guide Solvent
assembly Upper fixing roller Solvent
Lower fixing roller Dry wiping;
lint-free paper
Upper separation claw Alcohol
Lower separation claw Alcohol
For the intervals of cleaning, refer to the readings of the hard counters.
T10-400-01
CHAPTER 11
TROUBLESHOOTING
1 Guide to Troubleshooting
The tables of troubleshooting found in this chapter are prepared based on commonly
found flow charts; study the following for an idea of how to use the tables:
EX: AC power is absent.
Cause Step Checks Yes/No Action

Power plug1 1 Is the power plug connected to NO Connect the power plug.
the power outlet?
Source power supply 2 Is the rated voltage present at NO The problem is not of the
the power outlet? machine. Advise the user.
3 Is the rated voltage present YES Go to step 6.
between J101-1 and J101-2
on the AC driver PCB?
(rest omitted)
T11-100-01
■ If you want to find out the cause (part) of a specific problem, see the Cause column.
In the case of the example, i.e., “AC power is absent,” the cause can be the power plug,
covers, or source power.
■ If you want to find out the checks to make or the action to take for a specific problem,
make checks in the indicated sequence: answer Yes or No to each question posed, and
move to the Action column as directed.
■ To isolate the cause of a problem, execute test printing in service mode (test print mode;
the image data for test printing is stored on the DC controller PCB).
■ Of the descriptions related to troubleshooting of image faults/malfunctions, those related
to self diagnosis are given in Chapter 12.
<Checks> <Yes/No> <Action>
Is the power
NO Connect
plug connected to the
the power plug.
power outlet?
YES
Are the front cover, NO Close

right lower cover, and delivery cover the covers.
closed properly?
YES
Is the rated The problem is

NO
voltage present at the not of the machine.
power outlet? Advise the user.
YES
Rest omitted.
F11-100-01
■ When a check on the voltage is required using a meter, you may come across the follow-
ing expression: “measure the voltage between J109-1 (+) and J109-2 (−) on the DC con-
troller PCB.” The symbols + and − indicate the positive and negative probes of the meter;
for the foregoing example, therefore, connect the + probe to J109-1 and the negative
probe to J109-2 to measure the voltage.
1.1 Image Basic Adjustment Procedure
Clean the parts according to

the Scheduled Servicing Chart.
Is ‘density correction’ NO Are there vertical

NO Set it to the
under ‘adjust/clean’ in user mode lines (white, black)?
at the median level? median level.
YES YES
Clean the mirror (No. 1, No. 2, and No. 3

mirrors) and the standard white plate.
Are the following settings
in service mode identical
to those indicated on the label
attached to the front door?
NO Enter the settings
Adjust>DEVELOP>BIAS-1
Adjust>DEVELOP>BIAS-2 indicated on the label.
Adjust>DENS>settings
Adjust>EXP-LED>
LED-STRB
Are the vertical lines NO

YES (white, black) gone?
YES
Make one or two copies of the
NA-3 Chart.
Decrease the setting of the following Make copies using

the cassette and the manual NO Adjust the margin and the registration
by ‘2’: Adjust>EXP-LED>LED-STRB. for the source of paper in question as
feed table. Are the margin and shown in section 2 of this chapter.
Is the copy density of the registration correct?
YES gray scale No. 8 darker than
that of gray scale No. 6 of
the original chart?
YES
Increase the setting of the following

NO
by ‘2’: Adjust>EXP-LED>LED-STRB.
End.
Is the copy density of
YES gray scale No. 8 darker
than gray scale No. 6 of
the original chart?
NO
F11-101-01
1.2 Points to Note on Scheduled Servicing
Primary charging assembly

Part Tool/agent Remarks
Primary charging wiring Alcohol Cleaning Processes
Corona frame Alcohol Cleaning Part Tool/agent Remarks
(primary charging) Pre-exposure Lint-free paper Dry wiping
Grid plate Alcohol Cleaning
LED exposure unit Lint-fee paper Dry wiping
Fixing assembly
Fixing assembly inlet guide Solvent Cleaning/adjustment Developing assembly/processes
Upper fixing roller Solvent Cleaning Part Tool/agent Remarks
Upper separation claw Alcohol Cleaning Developing member Alcohol Cleaning
Lower separation claw Alcohol Cleaning Drive gear Lubricant Lubrication/cleaning
Lower fixing roller Lint-free paper Replacement Process unit inside Lint-free paper Dry wiping
(e.g., developing
assembly bottom)
Cartridge cover Lint-free paper Dry wiping
(inside)
Feeding assembly
Transfer/separation charging wire
Part Tool/agent Remarks Transfer guide roller Alcohol Cleaning
Transfer charging wire Alcohol Cleaning Drive system gear Lubricant Cleaning
Separate charging wire Alcohol Cleaning Machine (e.g., inside Lint-free paper Dry wiping
Corona frame Alcohol Cleaning feeding assembly,
(transfer, separation) transfer assembly)
F11-102-01
2 Standards and Adjustments

2.1 Adjusting the Image Margin and Registration
a. Executing Image Read Start Position Auto Adjustment
Return the settings of the following to those indicated on the service label:
ADJUST>ADJ-XY>ADJ-MAGX, ADJ-MAGY.
1) When the machine is in READY state, fully close the copyboard cover or the DADF
without placing any original on the copyboard glass.
2) Execute the following in service mode: FUNCTION>MISC-R>OFST.
3) See that the setting of the following has bee updated at the end of read start position auto
adjustment: ADJUST>ADJ-XY>, ADJ-X, ADJ.
4) Record the new settings on the service label.
b. Executing Leading Edge Registration Adjustment (cassette, duplex unit)

1) Place A2 horizontal or A3 horizontal in the cassette, and select the cassette.
Be sure to butt the paper against the guide at the rear and the right cassette frame.
2) Select ‘1’ in service mode (TEST>PG>TYPE), and the respective pattern stored in
memory.
3) Make adjustments so that the distance [1] in Figure 11-201-01 is 10 mm ±1 mm from
the leading edge of paper: service mode (Adjust>Feed-ADJ>ADJ-VSYC).
4) The setting for the leading edge registration is used in common among the cassettes and
the duplex unit, not requiring additional adjustments.
[1]
F11-201-01
c. Leading Edge Margin

Return the settings under the following to those recorded on the service label:
ADJUST>BLANK>BLANK-T1, BLANK-T2.
1. BLANK is a setting used to change the image data representing the leading edge of an
image into data expressing a blank width. The blank width shifts in conjunction with the
leading edge registration so that the setting holds true only if the leading edge registra-
tion is correctly adjusted. (in default, margin of 3.0 ±1 mm at BLANK-T1 35 (3.5 mm))
Normally, adjusting the leading edge registration and using the setting of BLANK re-
corded on the service label will create a leading edge margin of an appropriate width.
2. A margin of any width may be obtained by changing BLANK for the leading edge.
3. The leading edge margin for paper whose width is 297 mm or less is determined by the
setting of BLANK-T2.
d. Adjust the Manual Feed Leading Edge Registration

1) Set A2 horizontal or A3 horizontal paper on the manual feed table, and select it as the
source of paper.
Be sure to adjust the paper guide against the width of the paper to prevent skew move-
ment.
2) Select ‘1’ in service mode (TEST>PG>TYPE), and generate the appropriate internal
pattern.
3) Make adjustments so that [1] indicated in F11-201-01 is 10 mm ±1 mm from the lead-
ing edge of paper in service mode: Adjust>Feed-ADJ>MF-VSYC.
e. Adjusting the Horizontal Registration and Left/Right Margin

For each cassette and manual feeder, adjust the horizontal registration for single-sided
copies and the 1st sides of double-sided copies (a total of 9 settings).
service mode (Adjust>Feed-ADJ>ADJ-R-C2/C3/C4)
When the right margin (rear of the machine) is set to 3 mm ±1 mm (standard), the left/
right registration will automatically be adjusted for each default paper size.
Note: For a type of paper whose width is longer (shorter) than the respective default (e.g.,
for A2, 420 mm), the effect will be on the front side, since the reference of paper
placement is to the rear.
1) Place A3 horizontal paper in the cassette in question or on the manual feed table, and
select it as the source of paper.
Be sure to butt the paper against the guide at the rear and flush with the right frame of
the cassette.
In the case of the manual feed table, be sure to adjust the paper guide against the width
of the paper to prevent skew feeding.
2) Select ‘9’ in service mode (TEST>PG>TYPE), and generate the grid pattern.
3) Adjust the margin at the machine rear to 3 mm ±1 mm in service mode (Adjust>Feed-
ADJ>ADJ-C1, ADJ-C2, ADJ-C3, ADJ-C4, ADJ-MF). If skew movement is noted, make
adjustments on the rear margin along the leading edge.
f. Adjusting the Horizontal Registration and Left/Right Margin on 2nd Sides of

Double-Sided Copies
1) Place A3 horizontal paper in the cassette in question or on the manual feed table, and
select it as the source of paper.
Be sure to butt the paper against the guide at the rear and flush against the right frame of
the cassette.
In the case of the manual feed table, adjust the paper guide against the width of the pa-
per to prevent skew movement.
2) Select ‘singe-sided to double-sided’.
4) In the case of delivery to the copy tray, the top will be the second side of a double-sided
copy; in the case of delivery to the inside tray, on the other hand, the bottom will be the
second side of a double-sided copy.
Adjust the margin at the rear of the machine for the second side of double-sided copying
to 3 mm ±1 mm in service mode (Adjust>Feed-ADJ>ADJ-R-C2, ADJ-R-C3, ADJ-R-C3,
ADJ-R-C4, ADJ-R-MF). If skew movement is noted, make adjustments on the rear mar-
gin along the leading edge.
g. Adjusting the Rear Edge Margin

1) Place A2 horizontal or A3 horizontal paper in the cassette, and select it as the source of
paper.
Be sure to butt the paper against the guide at the rear and flush against the right frame of
the cassette.
3) Adjust the trailing edge margin to 3.5 mm ±1 mm in service mode (Adjust>EXP-LED>
LED-off1).
Use the same setting for papers shorter than 297 mm; enter the same setting to ‘LED-
off2’.
2.2 Fixing System

2.2.1 Points to Note When Mounting the Fixing Heater
1. Do not touch the surface of the heater.
2. Mount each heater so that the side with a round terminal (on the wire from the end of
the heater) is toward the front.
3. Mount the heater (1200 W) to the left of the fixing assembly (viewing from the front).
Heater
(delivery side) (pickup side)
Upper fixing roller
F11-202-01
2.2.2 Position of the Fixing Assembly Paper Guide
If you removed the inlet guide base, you will need to adjust the position of
the inlet guide. To avoid adjustment, try not to loosen the screw (locked in
place with a nut) found at the center of the guide. If the screw has been
loosened for some reason, be sure to adjust it to its initial position with ref-
erence to the index on the front side plate of the fixing assembly.
2.2.3 Adjusting the Pressure of the Lower Fixing Roller (nip)

If paper tends to wrinkle or fixing faults are noted, make the following adjustments. If the
fixing roller is not warm, wait for 15 min after the end of the wait period, make 20 copies,
and then take measurements.
Taking Measurements
1) Make an A2 solid black copy using the outside tray; turn off the machine as soon as the
paper comes out of the delivery slot. Then, pull it out another 100 mm or so, and wait
for 20 sec; thereafter, fully pull out the paper.
2) Measure the width of the area where there is shiny toner (F11-202-02).
c
A2paper
Paper Middle
b
movement of paper
10mm
100mm a
F11-202-02
• a and c are points 10 mm from their respective edges of the paper.

• Be sure to take measurements after the upper/lower roller has been suffi-
ciently heated.
Standard
Width at a 9.0 ± 0.5 mm
Width at b 8.5 ± 0.5 mm
Width at c 9.0 ± 0.5 mm
Difference between a and c 0.5 mm or less
T11-202-01
4. If the dimensions are not as indicated, loosen the stop nut [1] found at the rear and the
front of the fixing assembly, and turn the adjusting screw [2] to make adjustments.
Weaker Stronger
[2]
[1]
F11-202-03
2.3 Making Exposure System

<Sequence of Adjustments>
When making adjustments, be sure to go through the following sequence; it is important
to perform all adjustments that follow the desired one:
1. Orthogonal adjustment
↓
2. Reproduction ratio
↓
3. Image read start position
EX 1
If you have adjusted the orthogonal level, you will need to make the following adjust-
1. orthogonal adjustment, 2. reproduction ratio adjustment, and

3. image read start position adjustment
EX 2
If you have adjusted the reproduction ratio, you will need to make the following adjust-
1. ratio adjustment, 2. image read start position
2.3.1 Making Orthogonal Adjustments

If you have replaced any of the following parts, be sure to check the orthogonal level and
make necessary adjustments:
No. Part name

1 CCD unit assembly
2 No. 1 mirror base
3 Slider A
4 No. 2 mirror base
5 Slider B
6 Scanner cable
7 Scanner cable pulley
T11-203-01
2.3.2 Definition of the Orthogonal Level

The larger of δ1 or δ2 is used to represent the orthogonal level of the lines in question.
A2 original A2 copy
Line of reference
δ1
The corners and the

lines in lengthwise
to obtain δ1.
The corners and the

lines in lengthwise
to obtain δ2.
δ2
F11-203-01
2.3.3 Adjusting the Orthogonal Level

Use Test Pattern No. 1.
Generate Test Pattern No. 1 (A2).
Copy Test Pattern No. 1 (A2).
Put the two sheets together, and obtain δ1 and δ2.
If δ1/δ2 is greater No No adjustment

than 1.4 mm, is needed.
Yes
Loosen the CCD unit fixing screw.
Loosen the CCD unit fixing screw (F03-601-03).
Make adjustments.
Turn the adjusting screw with a flat-bladed screwdriver, and adjust the
orthogonal level.
<Guide to Adjustment Amount>

A full turn translates to about 0.43 mm.
For the direction of the turn, see
F03-601-04.
Make a copy of the test pattern on A2 paper, and check the output.
F11-203-02
Generating PG Test Print N. 1 in Service Mode
Start service mode, and make the following selections: COPIER>Test>PG>TYPE; en-
ter ‘1’, and press the Start key.
Obtaining a Darker PG Test Print

Start service mode, and make the following selections: COPIER>Adjust>
REF.
EXP-LED>LED-STRB; enter ‘35’, and make a copy. (Be user to take notes of
the initial setting, and enter it once again after generating the test pattern.)
Before After
Adjusting pin
Before After
CCD unit fixing screws
F11-203-03 F11-203-04
Adjusting Pin and the Screw Direction of the Turn
CCD Unit Fixing
2.3.4 Original Exposure System

a. Adjusting the Reproduction Ratio in Main Scanning Direction
adjust the parameters for the reproduction ratio in main scanning direction so that the
displacements match.
Start service mode, and make the following selections: COPIER>Adjust>ADJ-XY>

ADJ-MAGY; enter the data, and press ‘OK’.
b. Adjusting the Reproduction Ratio in Sub Scanning Direction

adjust the parameters for the reproduction ratio in sub scanning direction so that the dis-
placements match.
Start service mode, and make the following selections: COPIER>Adjust>ADJ-XY>

ADJ-MAGX; enter the data, and press ‘OK’.
2.3.5 Adjusting the Image Read Start Position

Execute auto adjustment in service mode so that the read start position on the leading
edge and the read start position on the left edge match those of the original.
1) The machine must remain in standby state, and the copyboard or the DADF must remain
fully open; do not place anything on the copyboard glass.
2) Start service mode, and make the following selections: COPIER>Function>MISC-R>

ADJ-OFST; then press ‘OK’.
The data under ADJUST ADJ-XY ADJ-X, ADJ-Y will be updated at the end of the auto
adjustment.
2.4 Electrical System

2.4.1 When Replacing Major Components
Major component
DC controller PCB ■ Before Replacement
Check the registered data for ADJUST, OPTION, and
COUNTER in service mode.
■ After Replacement
1. Register the data for ADJUST and OPTION.
2. Check the output of TR and BIAS.
Control Panel LCD Adjust the coordinates on the analog touch panel in service mode:
FUNCTION>PANEL>TOUCHCHK.
2.4.2 Registering the Paper Width Basic Value for the Multifeeder
Execute this mode after replacing the manual feed paper width detecting volume. Be sure
to make adjustments starting in the following sequence: A6R, A3, A4.
Executing the Mode Item

1) Replace the paper width detecting volume.
2) Start service mode.
3) Make the following selections, and select <A6R> to highlight;
COPIER>FUNCTION>CST.

<CST> <1/1> <READY>
MF-A6R
MF-A3
MF-A4
+/- OK
F11-204-01
4) Place A6R paper in the multifeeder, and adjust the side guide to the width of the paper.
5) Press the OK key.
6) Likewise, repeat steps 3) through 5) for A3 and A4.
7) Press the Reset key to end service mode; then, turn off and then on the main power.
VR output A6R
A3
A4
A6R A3 A4
(105mm) (297mm) (594mm)
F11-204-02
2.4.3 Adjusting the Manual Feed Paper Width Sensor (VR1)

■ Detecting the Width of Paper
The width of paper is detected by means of a variable resistor (VR1) operating in con-
junction with the movement of the slide guide. The slide guides are set when the user
moves them on the multifeeder tray to suit the size of the paper.
Variable resistor
Multifeeder tray
Slide guide (rear)
Slide guide (front)

F11-204-03
Points to Note When Replacing the Sensor
When mounting the sensor,

measure the resistance between
pin No. 1 [5] and pin No. 3 [6]
[6]
with the guide plates slid to the
minimum width (in the direc-
[7]
tion of the arrows); adjust the
gear so that the reading is 9K Ω
±5%. Thereafter, tighten the
screw so that the teeth of the
[5]
gear are not displaced a distance
of two teeth or more. As a refer-
ence, refer to a point directly
above the cut-off [7] shown in
the figure. F11-204-04
2.4.4 Details of the Manual Paper Width Size Sensor (VR1)
Step Service mode Checks Yes/No Action

1 Reading under While the machine is in standby, slide NO Replace the sensor
WIDTH-MF in the manual feed guide. Does the output (VR1); however, be
<CST-STS> of voltage change linearly? sure the sensor
service mode reading of output between J22-3 and mounting base is
(in mm) J212-1: normal.
between about 0.7 VDC and about +4 VDC ±3%
(457 mm) (98 mm)
2 While the machine is in standby, slide YES The gear of the
the manual feed guide. Is the output sensor has
normal when the guide is at its mini- disengaged from the
mum (inside) and its maximum manual feed guide;
(outside)? correct the data in
• Minimum (98 mm): service mode
about +4.1 VDC ±3% <CST-ADJ>.
• Maximum (457 mm): NO The sensor
about +0.7 VDC ±3% mounting base is not
normal because of
the displacement of
the gear of the
sensor; disassemble
the multifeeder, and
re-mount the sensor.
3 Are the sensor mounting base and the NO Replace any faulty
manual feed guide (inside the multi- parts.
feeder) normal?
T11-204-01
2.4.5 Adjusting the Horizontal Registration for the Multifeeder

For adjustment of the horizontal registration for the multifeeder, see the descriptions
given for service mode. (ADJUST>FEED-ADJ>ADJ-MF)
2.4.6 Checking the Photointerrupters

The photointerrupters may be checked by either of the following two ways:
a. Using a meter
b. Using service mode (<I/O>).
a. Using a Meter
The connectors on the machine's DC controller PCB and DC driver PCB are not designed
to accept probes of a meter, requiring an extention tool (FY9-3038-000/FY9-3039-000).
1) Set the digital multimeter to the 12 VDC range.
2) Connect the probe of the meter to GND (0 VDC) on the controller PCB.
3) Make a check as indicated in the table that follows. (For the connectors on the DC con-
troller PCB, be sure to use the extension tool as shown.)
[Making a Connection 1]
Hook
the pin.
FY9-2003-000
Meter
Meter extension tool

(FY9-3038)
[Making a Connection 2]
Hook the
pin. Meter
FY9-2004-000
Clip
Meter
extension tool
F11-204-05
b. Using Service Mode

1) Start service mode.
2) Press <COPIER> and <I/O>; then, select <DC-CON> from the displayed screen.
The bit notations of the following table are as follows (starting at the right, bit 0, bit 1,
bit 2, bit 3, bit 4, bit 5, bit 6, and bit 7).
EX: P001 00000000
[Making Checks]
No. PS44 PS43 PS1
Photointerrupters Scanner home position Copyboard sensor Multifeeder paper
sensor (CRHP) (COVERCLOSE) sensor (MP-ENT)
Meter probe CNIP-23 CNIP-20 J216-B2
Service mode P001-bit0 P001-bit4 P010-bit6
Checks (normal if as During standby, move During standby, open During standby, put
described) the scanner from the and then close the paper on the paper try
home position. copyboard cover. of the multifeeder.
When at When not When the When the When pa- When pa-
the home at the copyboard copyboard per is not per is
position, home po- over is cover is placed, placed,
sition, closed, opened,
Display reading − − 1 0 1 0
Meter reading about 5 V about 0 V about 5 V about 0 V about 5 V about 0 V
No. PS44 PS43 PS1

Photointerrupters Paper entry sensor Paper entry sensor 2 Delivery sensor
(P_ENT1) (P_ENT2) (OUTEXIT)
Meter probe J216-B5 J216-B8 J204-B5
Checks (normal if as During standby, open During standby, open During standby, open
described) the right door, and put the right door and put in the delivery assembly,
in paper. paper; then, move the and move the sensor
flag. flag of PS8.
When pa- When pa- When pa- When pa- When the When the
per is not per is put per is not per is put sensor flag sensor flag
put in, in, put in in (paper is not is blocking
(paper present), blocking the sensor
absent), the sensor (paper ab-
(paper sent),
present),
Display reading 1 0 1 0 0 1
No. PS38 PS4 PS32

Photointerrupters Duplex inlet sensor Separation sensor 1 Fixing assembly sensor
(BPS_ENT) (P_SEPR) (FU_ST)
Meter probe J202-B11 J204-8B J204-B2
Checks (normal if as During standby, open During standby, open During standby, open
described) the delivery assembly the front door and move the front door and
and move the sensor the sensor flag of PS4. remove/set the fixing
flag of PS38. assembly.
When the When the When the When the When the When the
sensor flag sensor sensor flag sensor flag fixing as- fixing as-
is blocking flag is not is blocking is not sembly set, sembly is
the sensor blocking the sensor blocking removed,
(paper ab- the sensor (paper ab- the sensor
sent), (paper sent), (paper
present), present),
No. PS6 PS7 PS29

Photointerrupters Inside tray delivery Inside tray delivery Inside tray full sensor
sensor 1 (INEXIT1) sensor 2 (INEXIT2) (ITP_FULL)
Checks (normal if as During standby, open During standby, open During standby, block
described) the delivery assembly, the delivery assembly, the sensor near the
and move the sensor and move the sensor delivery slot of the
flag of PS6. flag of PS7. inside tray.
sensor flag sensor sensor flag sensor flag sensor area sensor area
is blocking flag is not is blocking is not is blocked is not
the sensor, blocking the sensor, blocking by the blocked by
the sensor, the sensor, hand, the hand,
No. PS36 PS37 PS30

Photointerrupters Paper end sensor Stationary paper sensor Developing assembly
(BSP_END) (BSP_STAY) push-on sensor (DP_HP)
Meter probe J209-A4 J209-A3 J210-A11
Checks (normal if as During standby, slide During standby, slide In service mode, move
described) out the duplex tray, and out the duplex tray, and the developing assembly
put paper into the feed put paper over the push-on motor (M10).
path of the guide pulley sensor flag of PS37.
and the deflecting
flapper.
When pa- When pa- When pa- When pa- When it is When it is
per is ab- per is per is ab- per is not at the at the
sent, present, sent, present, home posi- home posi-
tion, tion,
No. PS31
Photointerrupters Toner bottle set sensor
(TB_ST)
Meter probe J210-A8
Service mode P014-bit5
Checks (normal if as During standby, open
described) the front door, and
remove/set the toner
bottle.
When the When the
toner toner
bottle is bottle is
set, not set,
Display reading 1 0
Meter reading about 5 V about 0 V
No. PS21
Photointerrupters Cassette 1 pickup sensor
(CPF_CHK1)
Meter probe J207-A5
described) the right door, and put
paper in the pickup/feed
path of the 1st holder
pickup unit; then slide
the paper toward the
rear.
After the Before the
paper is paper is
slid toward slid toward
the rear the rear
(paper (paper ab-
present), sent),
Display reading 0 1
No. PS9
Photointerrupters Vertical feed 1 sensor
(P_CHK1)
Meter probe J207-A2
described) the right door and
move the sensor lever
of PS9.
When the When the
sensor sensor
lever is lever is not
Display reading 0 1
No. PS14 PS18 PS22

Photointerrupters Cassette 2 paper surface Cassette 2 paper absent Cassette 2 pickup sensor
sensor (P_LVL2) sensor (P_EMP2) (CPF_CHK2)
Checks (normal if as During standby, operate During standby, put During standby open
described) the cassette 2 pickup paper in the cassette 2, the right door and put
roller DOWN solenoid and remove/set the paper into the pickup/
in service mode. cassette. feed path of the 2nd
holder pickup unit; then,
slide the paper toward
the rear.
When the When the When the When the After the Before the
cassette 2 cassette 2 cassette 2 cassette 2 paper is paper is
pickup pickup is not set is set (pa- slid toward slid toward
roller roller (paper ab- per the rear the rear
DOWN DOWN sent), present), (paper (paper ab-
solenoid is solenoid present), sent),
on, is off,
No. PS10
(P_CHK2)
Meter probe J207-B2
described) the right door and move
the sensor lever of PS10.
When the When the
sensor sensor
pushed up, pushed up,
Display reading 0 1
No. PS15 PS19 PS23

Meter probe J208-A11 J208-A8 J208-A5
Checks (normal if as During standby, operate During standby, put During standby, open
described) the cassette 3 pickup paper in the cassette 3, the right door and put
roller DOWN solenoid and remove/set the paper into the 3rd holder
in service mode. cassette. pickup unit; then, slide
the paper toward the
rear.
When the When the When the When the After slid- Before
cassette 3 cassette 3 cassette 3 cassette 3 ing the pa- sliding the
pickup pickup is not set is set (paper to the paper to
roller roller (paper ab- per rear (paper the rear
DOWN DOWN (paper ab-
solenoid is solenoid
No. PS11
(P_CHK3)
Meter probe J208-A2
described) the right door and move
When the When the
sensor sensor le-
lever is ver is not
pushed up, pushed up,
Display reading 0 1
No. PS16 PS20 PS24

Checks (normal if as During standby, operate During standby, put During standby, open
described) the cassette 4 pickup paper in the cassette 4, the right door, and put
roller DOWN solenoid an remove/set the paper into the pickup/
in service mode. cassette. feed path of the 4th
holder pickup unit; then,
slide the paper toward
the rear.
When the When the When the When the After the Before the
cassette 4 cassette 4 cassette 4 cassette 4 paper is paper is
pickup pickup is not set is set (pa- slid toward slid toward
roller roller (paper ab- per the rear the rear
DOWN DOWN sent), present), (paper (paper ab-
solenoid is solenoid present), sent),
on, is off,
No. PS12
(P_CHK4)
Meter probe J208-B2
described) the right door, and move
When the When the
sensor sensor
Display reading 0 1
No. PS27
Photointerrupters Cassette 2 paper level
sensor 1 (C2_PL1)
Meter probe J216-A8
Checks (normal if as During standby, put
described) paper (about 16 mm) in
the cassette 2, and
remove/set the
cassette.
When the When the
cassette is cassette is
set, not set,
Display reading 1 0
No. PS28 PS39 PS40

Photointerrupters Cassette 2 paper level Cassette 3 paper level Cassette 3 paper level
sensor 2 (C2_PL2) sensor (C3_PL1) sensor 2 (C3_PL2)
Meter probe J216-A11 J556-2 J556-5
Checks (normal if as During standby, put During standby, put During standby, put
described) paper (about 16 mm) in paper (about 9 mm) in paper (about 9 mm) in
the cassette 2, and the cassette 3, and the cassette 3, and
remove/set the cassette. remove/set the cassette. remove/set the cassette.
cassette is cassette is cassette is cassette is cassette is cassette is
set, not set, set, not set, set, not set,
No. PS41 PS42

Photointerrupters Cassette 4 paper level Cassette 4 paper level
sensor 1 (C4_PL1) sensor 2 (C4_PC2)
Meter probe J556-8 J556-11
Service mode P022-bit2 P022-bit3
Checks (normal if as During standby, put During standby, put
described) paper (about 9 mm) in paper (about 9 mm) in
the cassette 4, and the cassette, and
remove/set the cassette. remove/set the cassette.
When the When the When the When the
cassette is cassette is cassette is cassette is
set, not set, set, not set,
Display reading 1 0 1 0
Meter reading about 5 V about 0 V about 5 V about 0 V
3 Troubleshooting Image Faults

3.1 Making Initial Checks
3.1.1 Site Requirements
a. The voltage of the power source must be as rated (±10%). (The power plug must not be
disconnected at night.)
b. The site must not be subject to high temperature or humidity (e.g., near a water faucet,
water boiler, humidifier). The site, further, must not be near a source of fire or subject to
dust.
c. The site must be kept at 10° to 30°C in temperature and 15% to 80% in humidity while
the machine is in use.
d. The site must be free of ammonium gas.
e. The site must not subject the machine to the direct rays of the sun. Otherwise, curtains
must be provided.
f. The site must be well ventilated.
g. The site must keep the machine level.
h. The site must be able to keep the machine powered at night.
Check the site of installation against the above requirements to see if it meets the standards.
3.1.2 Checking the Originals

Check the originals to find out if the problem in question is caused by the original or the
machine.
a. Is the density setting correct?
b. Is the background of the original of a certain color that prevents good contrast (e.g.,
shades of yellow; red sheet or slips)?
c. Is the density of the original too low?
If the original is a diazo copy or has a high degree of transparency, its copies can be mis-
taken for “foggy” copies. If it is prepared in pencil, further, its copies can be mistaken
for “light” copies.
3.1.3 Checking the Copyboard Glass for Dirt and Scratches

If the copyboard glass is soiled, clean it with alcohol; if it has scratches, replace it.
3.1.4 Isolating the Problem Between the Scanner Unit and the Printer Unit
If the problem is caused by the machine, determine whether it is in its scanner unit or its
printer unit:
a. Select ‘1’ and ‘3’ for TYPE in service mode (TEST>PG), and generate a test print. Does
the output show the same problem as the copies?
3.1.5 Checking the Charging Assemblies

a. Check each charging assembly for dirt and for a fault on its charging wire.
b. Clean the charging wire and shielding plate of each charging assembly. (If the dirt can-
not be removed, replace the part.)
c. Check the height of the charging wire of each charging assembly.
d. Check to make sure that each charging assembly is securely set (in relation to the high-
voltage connector and the like).
e. Check the charging wire spring for rusting.
3.1.6 Checking the Developing Assembly

a. Check to make sure that the push-out cams on both sides of the developing assembly are
positioned correctly and are locked in place properly.
b. Check to see that the coating of toner on the surface of the developing assembly is even
and covers the entire surface.
3.1.7 Checking the Paper

a. Is the paper of a type recommended by Canon?
b. Is the paper moist? Try paper fresh out of package to make copies.
3.1.8 Checking the Consumables and Durables

Check the consumables and durables against the Table of Periodically Replaced Parts,
Tables of Durables, and Scheduled Servicing Chart. Replace those part that have reached the
ends of their lives.
3.1.9 Others
In winter, bringing a machine from a cold to warm place can cause condensation inside
the machine, leading to various problems. If condensation is noted, dry wipe the parts or
leave the machine powered and alone for about an hour.
a. Condensation on the copyboard glass, CCD lens array, or LED exposure

unit lens array can cause the images to be fuzzy.
REF.
b. A cold photosensitive drum (i.e., OPC having a high electrical resis-
tance) can prevent good contact (turning out foggy or light images).
c. Condensation in the charging system can cause feeding faults.
3.2 Sample Faulty Images Note: The samples are made artificially to provide an idea of faulty copies, and may not represent actual faults.
(The NA-3 Test Sheet was copied in DIRECT mode on A4 paper, and reduced for printing.)
1. The copy is too light (halftone only). 2. The copy is too light (both halftone and solid black). 3. The copy is too light (entire copy, appreciably). 4. The copy has uneven density (darker along front). 5. The copy has uneven density (lighter along front). 6. The copy is foggy (entire copy).
8. The copy has black lines

7. The copy is foggy (feeding direction). (feeding direction, fuzzy, thick). 9. The copy has black lines (feeding direction, fine). 10. The copy has white strips (feeding direction).✝ 11. The copy has white lines (feeding direction).* 12. The copy has white strips (cross-feeding direction).
15. The copy has displaced registration 16. The copy has displaced registration 17. The copy has displaced registration
13. The back of the copy is soiled. 14. The copy has poor fixing. (leading edge, extremely excessive margin). (leading edge, excessive margin). (leading edge, no margin). 18. The copy has blurred images.
19. The copy is foggy (cross-feeding direction). 20. The copy has poor sharpness. 21. The copy is blank. 22. The copy is solid black.
* Copies made with the copyboard lifted; faults may also appear on normally made copies.
✝ Strips may vary in width.
11-34 COPYRIGHT© 2000 CANON INC. CANON iR75W REV.0 OCT. 2000
3.3 Troubleshooting Image Faults

1. The copy is too light (halftone area only).

1 Perform the Image Adjustment YES End.
Basic Procedure. Is the problem
corrected?
LED exposure unit 2 Clean the LED exposure unit. YES End.
Is the problem corrected?
Developing 3 Is the push-on cam of the NO Check the developing
assembly developing assembly positioned assembly push-on motor
correctly? (M10). Check the push-on
cam or the encoder mounted
to the cam shaft.
Developing 4 Is the coating of toner on the NO Check the developing
assembly developing cylinder even? assembly.
YES Replace the photosensitive
drum.
T11-303-01
2. The copy is too light (including the solid black area).

Basic Procedure. Is the prob-
lem corrected?
2 Turn off the power switch in NO Go to step 7.
the middle of copying, and
open the front door. At this
time, is the toner image on the
surface of the photosensitive
drum more or less normal?
T11-303-02

Trans- Transfer/ 3 Is the transfer/separation NO Mount the transfer/
fer separation charging assembly securely separation charging
charging mounted? assembly securely.
assembly 4 Is electrical leakage noted in YES Check the separation/
the transfer/separation charging assembly.
charging assembly?
Copy paper 5 Try paper fresh out of package. YES • The paper is moist; advise
Is the problem corrected? the user on the correct
way of storing paper.
• Advise the user that the
use of non-recommended
paper may not produce
the best results.
High-vol- 6 Is the electrical continuity of YES Check the high-voltage
tage cord, the high-voltage cord normal? transformer and the DC
High-vol- (The resistance of the cord controller PCB.
tage trans- is about 10K Ω.)
former, DC
controller
PCB
Devel- Developing 7 Is the coating of toner on the NO Check the developing
op- assembly developing assembly cylinder assembly.
ment even?
Developing 8 Is the developing assembly NO Mount the developing
assembly mounted securely? (Check to assembly.
make sure that the end members
of the developing assembly are
in firm contact with the photo-
sensitive drum.)
Toner level 9 Is there toner inside the NO • Check the toner sensor.
detection developing assembly? • Check the connector and
the harness for electrical
continuity.
drum.
T11-303-03
3. The copy is too light (entirely and considerably).

corrected?
2 Turn off the power switch in YES Go to step 5.
the middle of copying, and
open the front door. At this
time, is the toner image on the
drum more or less normal?
Developing 3 Are the end members of the NO Check the developing
assembly developing assembly in firm assembly locking lever and
contact with the photosensitive the developing assembly
drum? end members for foreign
matter (e.g., toner).
Developing drive 4 Is the developing cylinder NO Check the drive system of
system rotating? the developing assembly.
Devel- Transfer 5 Is the transfer charging NO Mount the transfer charging
op- roller unit assembly mounted securely? assembly securely.
ment 6 Is electrical leakage noted in YES Check the transfer charging
the transfer charging assembly? assembly.
High- 7 Is there electrical continuity NO Replace the high-voltage
voltage from the high-voltage power power supply PCB and the
cord supply PCB to the transfer DC controller PCB.
High- 8 roller unit? (The resistance of YES
voltage the cord is about 10K Ω.)
transformer,
DC con-
troller PCB
Copy paper 9 Try paper fresh out of package. NO Use fresh paper or paper
Is the problem corrected? of a different type.
Development 10 Is the developing assembly YES Mount the developing
securely locked in place to the assembly properly.
photosensitive drum? (Check to NO • Check the developing
make sure that the end members assembly.
of the developing assembly are • Check the developing
in firm contact with the bias.
photosensitive drum.)
T11-303-04
4. The density is uneven (darker at the front).

5. The density is uneven (lighter at the front).

Developing 1 Are the end members of the NO Check the developing
assembly developing assembly in firm assembly locking unit.
contact with the photosensitive
drum?
Scanner 2 Clean the scanning lamp, YES End.
reflecting plate, mirror, lens,
and dust-proofing glass. Is the
problem corrected?
Pre-exposure lamp 3 Is the pre-exposure lamp on NO 1. Replace the pre-exposure
during copying operation? lamp.
2. Replace the DC control-
ler PCB.
Developing 4 Is the coating of toner on the NO Check the roller blade for
assembly developing cylinder even? cleaning faults.
5 Check to find out if toner is YES Check to make sure that the
unevenly deposited inside the machine is level.
developing assembly.
Fluorescent lamp 6 Have the ends of the fluores- YES Replace the scanning lamp.
cent lamp turned black?
Shading 7 Is the halftone of PG uneven? NO End
drum.
T11-303-05
6. The copy is foggy (entire face).

reflecting plate, mirrors, lens,
and dust-proofing glass. Is the
problem corrected?
Basic Procedure. Is the prob-
lem corrected?
Fixing assembly 3 Turn off the power switch in NO Clean the fixing roller.
the middle of copying operat-
ion, and slide out the fixing
assembly, taking care not to
tear the paper. Is the white
background (before fixing)
foggy?
Developing 4 Is the developing cylinder NO Check the area around the
assembly insulated from the machine developing cylinder and
ground? the developing connector.
High-voltage 5 Is the solid white area (PG) YES Check the high-voltage
system foggy? system.
Developing bias 6 Try replacing the high-voltage YES End.
power supply PCB. Is the
problem corrected?
DC controller PCB 7 Try replacing the DC controller YES End.
PCB. Is the problem corrected? NO Replace the photopositive
drum.
T11-303-06
7. The copy is foggy (vertical).

8. The copy has black lines (vertical, fuzzy thick lines).

Primary charging 1 Clean the charging wire in YES End.
wire user mode. Is the problem
corrected?
Basic Procedure. Is the
problem corrected?
Scanner 3 Clean the mirrors, lenses, and YES End.
dust-proofing glass. Is the
problem corrected?
Developing 4 Is the coating of toner on the NO Check how the scraper of
assembly developing cylinder even? the developing assembly is
mounted.
External light 5 Is the photosensitive drum free YES End.
of external light?
Photosensitive drum 6 Are there scratches in the YES Replace the photosensitive
peripheral direction of the drum.
drum?
T11-303-07
9. The copy has black lines (vertical, fine).

Exposure system 1 Generate a halftone test print in NO The exposure system may
service mode (i.e., enter ‘6’ for be faulty. Clean it.
COPIER>PG>TYPE). Are
there black lines on the output
images?
Primary charging 2 Clean the primary charging YES End.
assembly wire in user mode. Is the
problem corrected?
problem corrected?
Foreign matter 4 Is the primary charging YES Remove the foreign matter.
assembly or the LED exposure
unit soiled with foreign matter
that can come into contact
with the photosensitive drum?
Fixing assembly 5 Are there scratches in the YES Replace the fixing roller.
peripheral direction on the NO Check to make sure that the
surface of the fixing roller? fixing inlet is free of dirt.
Photosensitive drum 6 Are there scratches or black YES Replace the photosensitive
lines in the peripheral direc- drum.
tion on the surface of the • If scratches are found,
photosensitive drum? be sure to investigate the
cause.
T11-303-08
10. The copy has white spots (vertical).

11. The copy has white lines (vertical).

Exposure system 1 Generate a halftone test print NO Go to step 8.
in service mode (by entering
‘6’ to COPIER>PG>TYPE).
Are there white lines?
corrected?
Transfer charging 4 Is the transfer charging YES Clean the transfer charging
assembly, Separa- assembly or the separation assembly or the separation
tion charging charging assembly soiled charging assembly.
assembly with dirt or foreign mater?
Developing 5 Is the developing cylinder NO Check the roller blade of the
assembly evenly coated with toner? developing assembly. If the
developing assembly has
run out of toner, see “The
Add Toner message fails to
turn on.”
Fixing assembly 6 Are there scratches in the YES • Replace the upper fixing
peripheral direction on the roller.
surface of the upper fixing • Clean the separation claw.
roller? • Check how the separation
claw is mounted.
Fixing assembly 7 Is there dirt or foreign matter YES Remove the dirt or foreign
inlet in the inlet to the fixing matter.
assembly?
Exposure system 8 Clean the standard white plate YES End.
and the mirrors. Is the problem
corrected?
Photosensitive 9 Are there scratches in the YES Replace the photosensitive
drum peripheral direction on the drum.
surface of the photosensitive • Be sure to investigate the
drum? cause of the scratches.
T11-303-09
12. The copy has white spots (horizontal).

Exposure system 1 Generate a halftone test print NO Go to step 4.
in service mode (by entering
‘6’ to COPIER>PG>TYPE).
Are there white lines in the
output images?
Developing 2 Is the problem noted at YES • Clean the developing end
assembly intervals of about 140 mm? members.
• Dry wipe the surface of
the developing cylinder.
• If scratches are found on
the surface of the develop-
ing cylinder, replace the
developing cylinder.
Photosensitive 3 Is the problem noted at inter- YES • Clean the drum.
drum vals of about 250 mm? • If scratches are found,
replace the photosensitive
drum.
Paper 4 Try fresh paper. Is the problem YES The paper is moist; advise
corrected? the user on the correct
method of storing paper.
Transfer charging 5 Are there white spots on the NO Check to find out if
assembly photosensitive drum during electrical leakage is noted
copying operation? in the transfer charging
assembly.
Developing bias 6 YES Check the developing bias.
T11-303-10
13. The back of the copy is soiled.

Exposure system 1 Turn off the main power switch NO Go to step 3.
while paper is moving through
the feeding assembly. At this
time, is the back of the paper
soiled?
problem corrected?
Developing 3 Is there a buildup of toner in YES • Check the developing
assembly the jaw of the developing assembly seal.
assembly? • Check how the scraper is
mounted.
Fixing assembly 4 Is the upper/lower fixing roller YES • Clean the upper/lower
soiled? NO • Clean the fixing inlet
guide.
T11-303-11
14. The copy has a fixing fault.

1 Does the problem occur NO Go to step 2.
immediately after the power is
turned on in the morning?
Fixing Fixing 2 Is the problem noted vertically? YES If scratches are found,
assem- roller replace the roller.
bly Heater 3 Does the heater turn on when NO See “The fixing heater fails
the power is turned on? to turn on.”
Lower 4 Is the lower roller pressure NO Adjust the lower roller
roller (nip) as indicated? pressure.
pressure
Paper 5 Is the paper of a recommended NO Make a check using a
type? recommended type of paper.
If the results are good,
advise the user to use
recommended paper.
PCB. Is the problem corrected?
T11-303-12
15. The leading edge is displaced.

16. The leading edge is displaced (excessive margin).
17. The leading edge is displaced (inadequate margin).

1 Is the feeder used? YES Correct the displacement
along the leading edge as
shown in the Feeder Service
Manual.
Original 2 Is the original placed properly? NO Place the original properly.
Pickup roller, 3 Has the pickup, feed, or YES Check the rollers, and
Feed droller, separation roller of the cassette replace the worn rollers.
Separation roller holder (because of which the
displacement occurs) reached
the end of its life?
Registration 4 Adjust the image margin and YES End.
registration as shown in 2.1
of this chapter. Is the problem
corrected?
T11-303-13
18. The copy is blurry.

Scanner drive cable 1 Does the cable wound on the YES • Re-mount the cable.
cable pulley become twisted • Replace the cable.
or frayed when the scanner is • Remove the foreign
being driven? matter.
Scanner rail 2 Move the No. 1 mirror base NO Clean the surface of the
slowly by hand. Does it move scanner rail with alcohol;
smoothly? then, apply a small amount
of lubricant.
Drum drive 3 Does the problem occur at YES • Check the drum drive
assembly, intervals of about 250 mm? assembly.
Photosensitive drum • Check the ends of the
drum (where developing
edge members are in
contact) for scratches and
foreign matter.
Developing 4 Does the problem occur at YES Check the surface of the
cylinder intervals of about 140 mm? developing cylinder for
scratches and foreign matter.
Developing gear 5 Does the problem occur at YES Check the developing
internals of about 7 mm? assembly.
Transfer guide 6 Does the problem occur at YES Check the area near the
roller intervals of about 25 mm? transfer guide roller (gear,
bearing, etc.).
Manual feed pickup 7 Does the problem occur for a YES Adjust the releasing
roller specific position of the original mechanism of the pickup
(near 210 mm of the trailing reversing roller.
edge)?
Feed roller 8 Does the problem occur in a YES Check the bushing, gear,
specific area when thick paper and spring (pressure) of
is used? the feed rollers.
T11-303-14
19. The copy has inadequate sharpness.

Copyboard glass 1 Is the copyboard glass soiled YES Clean the copyboard glass.
with oil? Is there foreign matter
on the copyboard glass stay?
LED exposure unit 3 Mount the LED exposure unit YES End.
correctly. Is the problem
corrected?
Photosensitive 4 Try replacing the photo- YES End.
drum sensitive drum. Is the problem
corrected?
Transfer charging 5 Clean the transfer charging YES End.
assembly assembly. Is the problem
corrected?
Developing 6 Try replacing the developing YES End.
assembly assembly. Is the problem
corrected?
reflecting plate, and mirrors.
Developing bias 8 Are the connection and the NO Check the connection and
electrical continuity of the replace the cable; if the
high-voltage cable for the problem still occurs,
developing bias normal? 1. Replace the high-voltage
power supply PCB.
2. Replace the DC control-
ler PCB.
T11-303-15
20. The copy is blank.

Developing 1 Is the developing assembly NO Check the locking
assembly locking locked to the photosensitive mechanism of the
mechanism drum during copying developing assembly.
operation?
Developing 2 Is the developing cylinder NO Check the drive mechanism
assembly drive rotating during copying of the developing assembly.
mechanism operation?
Photosensitive 3 Is the photosensitive drum NO Check the drive mechanism
drum drive rotating during copying of the photosensitive drum.
mechanism operation?
LED exposure unit 4 Turn off the power switch NO Replace the LED exposure
during development, and slide unit.
out the process unit. Is the
image on the drum normal?
Print 5 Is the image on the test print YES Go to step 11.
(‘1’ through ‘8’ of PG>TYPE)
normal?
Transfer charging 6 Is the transfer charging NO Insert the transfer assembly
assembly assembly fully inserted? fully.
7 Is electrical leakage noted in YES Check the transfer charging
the transfer charging assembly? assembly.
Transfer 8 Is the connection of the transfer NO Connect the cord properly.
high-voltage cord high-voltage cord normal? Replace the transfer high-
Is there electrical continuity in voltage cord.
the transfer high-voltage cord?
(The resistance of the cord is
about 10K Ω.)
High-voltage power 9 Try replacing the high-voltage YES End.
supply PCB power supply PCB. Is the
problem corrected?
Wiring (from CCD 11 Is the connector of the flat NO Connect the connector
PCB to image cable locked in position? properly.
processor PCB) Is it connected properly? YES See 1. “Reading Error
(blank)” under 3.4.
T11-303-16
21. The copy is solid black.

Scanning lamp 1 Does the scanning lamp remain NO See “The scanning lamp
on during copying operation? fails to turn on.”
Margin 2 Is there a margin on copies YES Go to step 6.
made in normal mode? NO Go to step 3.
Primary charging 3 Check the connectors for con- NO Correct the faults.
assembly nection, harness for connec-
tion, and electrical continuity
from the HV1 pin of the high-
voltage power supply PCB to
the primary charging assembly.
Are they normal?
Primary charging 4 Is the tension on the primary NO Mount the primary charging
wire (lack of charging wire adequate? wire properly.
tension)
Primary charging 5 Is there electrical continuity YES Replace the high-voltage
assembly fame between the primary charging Zener diode.
assembly frame and the
machine frame?
Images on drum 6 Generate test prints (‘1’ through YES Go to step 8.
‘8’ of PG>TYPE). At this time,
is the image on the photo-
sensitive drum normal?
DC controller PCB 7 Is the input (HV1_SET) of NO Replace the controller PCB.
High-voltage power J210-B4 on the DC controller YES Replace the high-voltage
supply PCB PCB 0 V during copying power supply PCB.
operation?
Scanner control 8 Execute the following in NO Replace the scanner control
PCB service mode: FUNCTION> PCB.
CCD unit NISC-P>IP-CHK. Does it end YES Check the wiring of the flat
in ‘OK’? cable; if normal, replace the
CCD unit.
T11-303-17
3.4 Read Image Faults

1. Reading Error (blank)

The image cannot 1 Is the connector discontented YES Connect the CCD cable to
be read at all. from the CCD cable? the connector on the scanner
control PCB (LRL-CT2)
and the sensor unit.
NO Go to step 2.
2 Replace the scanner control YES Go to step 3.
PCB (LRL-CT2). NO End.
Does the problem recur?
3 Replace the image processing YES Replace the sensor unit.
PCB (LRL-CT1). NO End.
T11-304-01
2. Reading Error (vertical lines)

The image has 1 Clean the standard white sheet, YES Go to step 2.
vertical lines. mirrors, and lenses. Does the NO End.
problem still occur?
2 Execute the following in YES Go to step 3.
service mode and enter the NO End.
settings indicated on the
service label:
Function>CLEAR>SERVICE.
3 Try replacing the scanner YES Go to step 4.
control PCB (LRL-CT2). NO End.
4 Try replacing the image pro- YES Replace the sensor unit.
cessing PCB (LRL-CT1). NO End.
T11-304-02
3. Reading Error (blurred image)

The copy image is 1 Is the belt/cable slack? YES Mount the belt/cable
distorted (jitter). properly.
NO Go to step 2.
2 Try replacing the motor unit. YES Replace the scanner control
Does the problem recur? PCB (LRL-CT1).
NO End.
T11-304-03
4. Reading Error (faulty orthogonal angle)

The copy image is 1 Is the cable slack or the cable YES Mount the cable properly.
distorted fixing of the slider displaced? NO Go to step 2.
(orthogonal fault). 2 Are all four sliders of the YES Go to step 3.
carrier unit grounded to the NO Replace the slider.
rail?
3 Try replacing the scanner YES Got to step 4.
4 Try replacing the image pro- YES Go to step 5.
5 Is the sensor unit displaced? YES Mount the sensor unit
properly.
NO Replace the sensor unit.
T11-304-04
5. Reading Error (hazy image)

The image is fuzzy. 1 Is the cable slack or the cable YES Mount the cable properly.
fixing of the slider displaced? NO Replace the sensor unit.
T11-304-05
6. Reading Error (missing image)

The copy has a 1 Is the frame plate displaced? YES Mount the frame plate.
missing image NO Go to step 2.
(displaced read 2 Is the cable slack or the cable YES Mount the cable properly.
position). fixing of the slider displaced? NO Go to step 3.
3 Is the sensor unit displaced? YES Mount the sensor unit
properly.
NO Go to step 4.
T11-304-06
7. Reading Error (density error)

The entire image is 1 Is the frame plate displaced? YES Mount the frame plate
too dark/light. properly.
NO Go to step 2.
2 Clean the AGC sheet, white YES Go to step 3.
standard sheet, mirrors, and NO End.
lenses. Does the problem recur?
T11-304-07
8. Reading Error (left/right density displacement)

The density of the 1 Is the frame plate displaced? YES Mount the frame plate
image differs properly.
between left and NO Go to step 2.
right. 2 Try replacing the scanner YES Go to step 3.
T11-304-08
9. Reading Error (blank on left or right)

Either the left or 1 Try replacing the scanner YES Replace the sensor unit.
the right image control PCB (LRL-CT2). NO End.
cannot be read. Does the problem recur?
T11-304-09
10. Reading Error (left/right displacement)

The image is 1 Is the belt or the cable slack? YES Mount the belt/cable
displaced to the properly.
left/right. NO Go to step 2.
2 Execute the following in YES Go to step 3.
service mode, and enter the NO End.
settings indicated on the
service label:
Function>CLEAR>SERVICE.
cessing PCB (LRL-CT). NO End.
T11-304-10
11. Reading Error (fine lines)

A faulty image is 1 Try replacing the scanner YES Replace the image pro-
read every 8 dots control PCB (LRL-CT2). cessing PCB (LRL-CT1).
(lines) in main or Does the problem recur? NO End.
sub scanning
direction.
T11-304-11
12. Reading Error (left/right edge density fault)

Both edges of the 1 Is the frame plate displaced? YES Mount the frame plate
image is too dark or properly.
too light. NO Replace the scanner control
PCB (LRL-CT2).
2 Is the LED exposure unit YES Clean the unit.
soiled? NO End.
T11-304-12
13. Reading Error (distorted image)

The image is 1 Try replacing the scanner YES Go to step 2.
distorted. control PCB (LRL-CT2). NO End.
Doe the problem recur?
T11-304-13
14. Reading Error (associated with image processing PCB)
Cause Action
• In reading A2, 1/4 of the image area is faulty. Replace the image pro-
• The same image is repeated in the form of bands. cessing PCB(LRL-CT1).
• Rotation or mirror mode fails.
• Text, photo, and text/photo modes fail to switch over.
• Compressed data cannot be stored.
• Tension or rotation mode fails.
T11-304-14
15. Reading Error (associated with scanner control PCB)
Cause Action
• The ratio cannot be changed. Replace thePCB scanner
• Negative/positive reversal fails. control (LRL-CT2).
T11-304-15
4 Troubleshooting Feeding Faults/Other Malfunctions

4.1 Paper Jams
Use the following service mode item to find out the date, location, and type of a jam in
the machine or for a history of jams:
• COPIER>DISPLAY>JAM
A jam code (type, sensor used) consists of four digits (4th block from the right of the
screen).
■ Higher 2 Digits (type of jam)

01xx delay jam
02xx stationary jam
03xx timing jam
05xx size error jam
10xx residual jam
11xx door open jam during copying
■ Lower 2 Digits (sensor used)

xx01 cassette 1 pickup sensor xx31 fixing outlet sensor
xx02 cassette 2 pickup sensor xx32 inside tray delivery sensor 1
xx03 cassette 3 pickup sensor xx33 inside tray delivery sensor 2
xx04 cassette 4 pickup sensor xx34 delivery sensor
xx11 vertical feed 1 sensor xx41 duplex inlet sensor
xx12 vertical feed 2 sensor xx42 paper end sensor
xx13 vertical feed 3 sensor xx43 paper stop sensor
xx14 vertical feed 4 sensor xx50 ADF-related condition
xx21 paper entry sensor xx60 sorter-related condition
xx22 separation sensor 1
In the machine, jams may occur in the following blocks:

[1] Pickup assembly
[2] Separation/feeding assembly
[3] Fixing/delivery, Reversing/feeding assembly
[4] Duplex feeding assembly
[2]
[3]
[1]
[4]
F11-401-01
4.1.1 Pickup Assembly

Cassette 1 Is the cassette used as the NO Go to step 10.
source of paper?
2 Is the cassette properly set in NO Set the cassette properly,
the machine? Is the dial and set the dial correctly.
correctly set?
3 Try a different cassette. YES Check the inside of the
Is the problem corrected? cassette for foreign matter.
Paper 4 Is the paper curly or wavy? YES Replace the paper. Advise
the user on the correct
method of storing paper.
5 Try paper of a recommended YES Advise the user to use a
type. Is the problem corrected? recommenced type of paper.
DC controller PCB 6 Does the pickup roller of the NO See “Pickup fails.”
selected cassette holder rotate
during copying operation?
Pickup clutch 7 Is the operation of the pickup NO Replace the pickup clutch.
clutch normal?
Pickup roller 8 Is the pickup roller deformed YES Replace the pickup roller.
or worn?
Separation roller 9 Is the separation roller of each YES Replace the deformed or
cassette holder deformed or worn separation roller.
worn?
Torque limiter 10 Does the torque limiter operate? NO Replace the torque limiter.
Feed roller 11 Is the feed roller of each cas- YES Replace the deformed or
sette holder deformed or worn? worn feed roller.
Pickup sensor 12 Does the pickup sensor of each NO Check the wiring; if normal,
cassette holder operate normal- replace the sensor.
ly? (See the instructions on how
to check photointerrupters.)
13 Try manual copying. Does the NO See “Pickup from the multi-
pickup roller for the multifeeder fails.”
feeder rotate?
Registration roller 14 Does the registration roller NO See “The registration roller
drive assembly operate normally? fails to rotate.”
Registration roller, 15 Clean the registration roller NO If the problem is not cor-
Vertical path roller and the vertical path roller. rected after cleaning the
Is the problem corrected? roller, replace the deformed
or worn roller.
Paper 16 Try paper of a recommended YES Advise the user to use a
type. Is the problem corrected? recommended type of paper.
T11-401-01
4.1.2 Separation/Feeding Assembly

Transfer roller 1 Is the transfer roller assembly NO Check the transfer roller
set properly? assembly.
Separation charging 2 Is the separation charging wire NO Fully tighten the screw.
wire fully inserted all the way to the
rear?
Paper 3 Try paper of a recommended YES Advise the user to use a
type. recommended type of paper.
Feed belt 4 Is the feed belt operating NO Check the belt pulley.
properly? YES Check the feed belt for
deformation and wear.
T11-401-02
4.1.3 Fixing/Delivery Assembly

Separation claws 1 Are the separation claws worn YES 1. Replace the separation
(delivery assembly) or deformed? claws.
2. If dirt is found, clean it
with solvent.
Upper/lower fixing 2 Is the upper/lower fixing roller YES Replace the roller.
roller deformed or damaged?
Fixing Paper 3 Is the paper guide soiled with YES Clean the paper guide with
assembly guide toner or the like? solvent.
Feed 4 Does the feed roller move NO Check the movement of the
roller smoothly? feed roller.
Flapper 5 Does the solenoid operate NO Replace the solenoid.
normally?
Delivery Delivery 6 Does the delivery sensor lever NO Adjust the delivery sensor
assembly sensor move smoothly? lever so that it moves
lever smoothly.
Delivery 7 Does the delivery sensor NO Replace the sensor.
sensor operate normally? (See the
instructions on how to check
the photointerrupters.)
Delivery 8 Does the delivery roller move NO Check the delivery roller
roller smoothly? drive assembly.
drive
assembly
Leading edge 9 Is there a margin along the YES End.
margin leading edge of paper? NO Adjust the leading edge
margin.
T11-401-03
4.1.4 Reversing/Feeding, Lower Feeding, and Re-Pickup

Paper deflecting 1 Does the paper deflecting NO Check the paper deflecting
plate drive assembly plate (delivery flapper) of the plate drive assembly.
delivery assembly operate?
Reversing/feeding 2 Are the reversing/feeding YES Clean the reversing/feed
drive assembly motor and the roller movement roller.
normal? NO Check the drive assembly.
PS6, PS8, PS9 3 Is the operation of the inside NO Replace any faulty sensor.
delivery sensor (PS6), duplex
inlet paper sensor (PS8), and
re-pickup sensor (PS9) normal?
Duplex feed drive 4 Does the duplex feed roller NO Check the duplex feed
assembly 1/2 rotate? drive assembly.
Guide plate 5 Is any of the guide deformed, or YES Replace the guide plate, or
is any foreign matter found remove the foreign matter.
around it? NO End.
T11-401-04
4.2 Troubleshooting Feeding Faults

4.2.1 Double Feeding

Separation roller, 1 Is the separation roller YES Replace the separation
Torque limiter deformed or worn? roller.
NO Check the torque limiter.
T11-402-01
4.2.2 Wrinkling

Pickup assembly 1 Turn off the power while paper YES Check the pickup assembly.
is moving inside. At this time, Check the registration roller.
is the paper wrinkled?
Or, is it moving askew?
Paper 2 Try fresh paper. Is the problem YES The paper may be moist.
correct? Advise the user on the
correct method of storing
paper.
3 Is the paper of a recommended NO Advise the user to use a
type? recommended type of paper.
Fixing Inlet 4 Is the inlet guide soiled with YES Clean the inlet guide with
assembly guide toner or foreign matter? solvent.
Upper/ 5 Is the upper/lower fixing roller YES Clean the fixing roller.
lower deformed or worn? NO Check the lower roller
fixing pressure; if not good,
roller, replace the fixing assembly.
Lower
roller
pressure
T11-402-02
4.3 Troubleshooting Other Malfunction

1) The DC power is absent.

Error code 1 Is the error code indicated as YES Refer to the descriptions
indication soon as the main power switch given for the indicated error
is turned on? code.
AC power supply 2 Is AC power present? NO See “The AC power is
absent.”
Wiring, DC load 3 Turn off the main power switch, NO Turn off the power switch,
and disconnect all the follow- and connect one of the dis-
ing connectors: connected connectors; then,
• J901, J551, J201 (DC relay turn on the power. Try this
PCB, DC driver PCB, DC on all connectors to find the
controller PCB) connector that turns on the
• CN501, CN601 (main motor protection circuit. Then,
PCB, feed motor PCB) check the wiring from that
• J47, J211B (relay connector connector to the appropri-
PCB, phase control PC) ate DC loads.
Is the output voltage (see the
descriptions that follow) at
each terminal normal when the
power switch is turned on?
Fuse resistance 4 Is there electrical continuity NO Replace the low-voltage
(low-voltage power for the fuse? Is the fuse power supply (DCP1). Be
supply; DCP 1) resistor R22 about 15 Ω? sure to check the DC load
of the fuse and the wiring.
DC controller 5 Try replacing the DC con- YES Replace the DC controller
PCB, troller PCB and the DC drive PCB or the DC driver PCB
DC carrier PCB PCB. Is the problem corrected? as necessary.
T11-403-01
4. Connectors of the Low-Voltage Power Supply (DCP1)
CN101 CN104
Pin No. Signal Pin No. Signal
1 AC (L) 1 about +5 V
3 AC (N) 2 about +5 V
5 FG 3 about +5 V
4 about +5 V
5 about +12 V
6 about +24 V
CN102 7 about +24 V
Pin No. Signal 8 GND
1 about +5 V 9 GND
2 about +5 V
3 about +5 V CN103
4 about +5 V Pin No. Signal
5 GND 1 about +5 V
6 GND 2 about +12 V
7 GND 3 about +12 V
8 GND 4 GND
T11-403-02
Note: When the DC load is at its minimum, the output voltage can at times be an ap-
proximate level.
2) The photosensitive drum fails to rotate.

1 Is ‘E010’ indicated? YES See “E010.”
Process unit 2 Slide out and then in the drum YES End.
(absent) unit. Is the problem corrected?
Drum drive NO Remove the drum drive
assembly assembly, and correct or
replace the parts as needed.
T11-403-03
3) The pickup mechanism fails (from the cassette).

1 Does the Add Paper message YES See “The Add Paper
fail to go off? message fails to go off.”
Cassette 2 Slide out and then in the YES End.
cassette. Is the problem
corrected?
Right lower cover 3 Is the right lower cover closed NO Close the cover.
correctly?
Lifter 4 Is the sound of the lifter NO See “The lifter fails to move
moving up heard when the up.”
cassette is set?
Fuse (F552; on DC 5 Is there electrical continuity NO Replace the DC driver PCB.
driver PCB) in the fuse (F552) on the DC This, however, applies when
driver PCB? there is no trapping of wire
for the J551-2 line.
Pickup roller 6 Has the pickup roller been NO If the roller is soiled, clean
used longer than its life? it with alcohol. If it is worn
because of wear, replace it.
Roller pickup 7 Does the pickup roller rotate? YES If the roller is soiled, clean
it with alcohol. If deforma-
tion (caused by friction) is
found, replace it.
Belt (displacement) 8 Is the belt used to transmit NO Correct the attachment of
drive to the pickup roller the belt.
attached correctly?
Cassette pickup 9 Is the cassette pickup clutch YES End.
clutch (CL7) normal?
Harness, Connector 10 Check the wiring. Is there a YES Correct the connection.
connection fault?
Feed motor 11 Try replacing the feed motor. YES Replace the feed motor.
Cassette pickup, 12 Is each cassette pickup clutch YES Check the wiring to the
Clutch (CL2 through CL5) normal? clutch; if normal, replace
(CL2 through CL5) the clutch.
T11-403-04

Solenoid 13 Are the cassette pickup roller NO Check the wiring to each
DOWN solenoid and the solenoid; if normal, replace
cassette feed pickup roller UP the solenoid.
solenoid normal?
DC controller PCB 14 Try replacing the DC control- YES Check the harness from the
ler PCB. Is the problem DC controller PCB for a
corrected? fault; if normal, replace the
DC controller PCB.
T11-403-05
Flat cable
J212
J552
connector.
11-66
Check for a
connector.
Check for a
disconnected
J84A
disconnected
J557 J128A-6 J128A-1 J84A-12 -1 J207-A
1
-11 -2
-5 -2 -10 -3
2
12 1110
-9 -4 J207-A
-4 -3 -8 -5
3
-7 -6
9 8 7
-3 -4 J134A
4
-1 -6 -7 J207-A
230V model
-2 -5 -8
-2 -5 J131A-2 J131A
1
-3 -4 -9
5
6 5 4
3 2 1
PS21
J83A J155 J155
J216-A
SL6
-1 -6 -1 J207-A -12 -1
2
-3 -10
6
-1
-2 -2 -11 -11 -2
PS9
-1 -12 -10 -3
1 2 3
-3
3 2 1
3 2 1
PICK UP UNIT 1
J84B -9 -4
J111 J556-A J128B-6 J128B-1 J130B-1 J130B J132B-1 J84B-12 -1 J207-B
7
-8 -5
-2 -11 -2 -7 -6
4 5 6
3 2 1
1 2 3
-5 -3 -10 -3
SL3
PS39
-2 -2
3 2 1
2
PS14
8
12 1110
J133B
-1 -9 -4 J207-B -6 -7 J109
J178 -4 -3 J143B -2 -8 -5 -5 -8
9
-4 -9
3 2 1
PS27
7 8 9
-3 -7 -6
PS18
9 8 7
3 2 1
-3
CL3
-4 J134B
4 5 6
3 2 1
1
PS40
10
-1 -6 -7 J207-B -3 -10 J177
-2 -5 -8
-2 -11
J113 -2 -5 J131B-2 J131B -3 -4
PS22
1
-9
6 5 4
3 2 1
-1 -12
11
PS28
3 2 1
J83B 101112
SL7
-1 -6 -1 -1 -3 J207-B
2
-10
3 2 1
7 8 9
12
PS41
-2 -2 -11
-3 -1 -12
PS10
3 2 1
3 2 1
J179
motor is normal.
PICK UP UNIT 2
J84C
DC carrier PCB
Refer to descriptions
J128C-6
for E014 to see if the
J558 J128C-1 J130C-1 J130C J132C-1 J84C-12 -1 J208-A
3 2 1
PS42
10 1112
-2 -11 -2 J209-B J56 J56 CN60
-5 -2 -2 -3 -10
SL4
-3 -5
3 2 1
-1
8
12 1110
PS15
DC controller PCB
J133C -4 -2
-1 -9 -4 J208-A -3 -3
F11-403-01
M
-4 -3 J143C -5
M10
-2 -8
9
4
-2 -4
1 2 3 4 5
-3 -7 -6 -1 -5
3 2 1
9 8 7
PS19
Feed motor
-3 -4
CL4
J134C
1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
10
J154
-1 -6 -7 J208-A
-1 -4 J559-A
1
-2 -5 -8
-2 -5 J131C-2 J131C -4
1
-3 -9
6 5 4
3 2 1
PS23
11
-2 -3
2
J83C
SL8
-1 -6 -1 -3 J208-A J162 +24VB
2
-1 -10
12
RY3
(DCP2)
-2 -2 -11
1 2
J108 -3 -2 GND
2
3
-3 -1 -12
3 2 1
3 2 1
PS11
Low-voltage
power supply
PICK UP UNIT 3
M
M5
-4 -1
1
4
J84D
J128D-6 J128D-1 J130D-1 J130D J132D-1 J84D-12 -1 J208-B
1
-2 -11 -2
J112 -5 -2 -2 -3 -3
SL5
-10
2
5
2
3 2 1
2
12 1110
PS16
J133D
M
M6
-4 J208-B
1
-1
6
-9
-4 -3 J143D -5
4
-2
3
-8
-3 -7 -6
9 8 7
3 2 1
PS20
-4
CL5
J114 -3
1
J134D
2
7
-1 -6 -7 J208-B
M
M7
-2 -5 -8
1
8
-2 -5 J131D-2 J131D -9
1
-3 -4
5
6 5 4
PS24
3 2 1
J83D
SL9
-1 -6 -1 -10 J208-B
2
-3
6
-1
-2 -2 -11
-3 -1 -12
3 2 1
PS12
3 2 1
PICK UP UNIT 4
problem
electrical
continuity.
Check the
cassette for
problem
electrical
problem
continuity.
Check the
electrical
continuity.
Check the
cassette for
cassette for
4) The lifter fails to move up.

Cassette 1 Slide out the cassette. Try to NO Check the inside of the
move up the holding plate of cassette for foreign matter.
the cassette. Does it move
smoothly?
Pickup unit 2 Is the connector connecting NO Connect the connector.
connector the pickup unit for which the
(connection) lifter fails to move up and the
machine normal?
Paper level sensor 3 Is the paper level sensor of NO Replace the faulty sensor.
the holder for which the lifter
fails to move up normal?
(See the instructions on how
to check photointerrupters.)
Lifter drive 4 Is the lifter drive assembly NO Correct the problem.
assembly normal?
Size switching dial 5 Is the size switching dial NO Correct the problem.
normal?
DC driver PCB 6 Try replacing the DC driver YES Replace the DC driver PCB.
PCB. Is the problem
corrected?
Cassette paper size 7 Is the cassette paper size YES Replace the cassette paper
switch switch normal? size switch.
T11-403-06
5) The manual feed mechanism fails.

Manual feed paper 1 Is the manual feed paper width NO Correct or replace the
width sensor sensor normal? sensor. (See the appropriate
instructions.)
Manual feed pickup 2 Select manual feed mode, and NO Check the wiring; if normal,
clutch (CL1) press the Start key. Does the replace the manual feed
pickup roller for the manual pickup clutch (CL1).
feed mechanism rotate?
Paper guide plate 3 Select the multifeeder, and YES Check the position of the
cam press the Start key. Does the paper guide plate cam and
paper guide plate spring up? the separation pad; as
necessary, adjust/replace
the part.
Manual feed pickup 4 Is the manual feed pickup NO Check the wiring; if normal,
roller drive solenoid roller drive normal? replace the manual feed
(SL1) pickup roller drive solenoid
(SL1).
T11-403-07
6) The registration roller fails to rotate.

Registration roller 1 Press the Start key. Does the NO Check the registration roller
registration roller rotate drive assembly, wiring, and
immediately after the scanner machine registration drive
starts to move forward? assembly.
Registration roller 2 Is the registration roller clutch NO Correct the mounting.
clutch mounted correctly (including (Correct the wiring.)
the harness)?
DC controller 3 Does the output of the NO Replace the DC controller
clutch following change from 0 to 1: PCB or the DC driver PCB.
I/O>DC-CON>P018-bit0? However, this applies when
(J559-B7: feed-CL5) there is no trapping of the
entire DC load line (DC
driver PCB J551-2).
Registration clutch YES Check the wiring from the
(CL6) DC controller PCB to CL6;
if normal, replace CL6.
T11-403-08
7) The scanner fails to move forward/in reverse.

Scanner drive cable 1 Is the scanner drive cable NO Correct the routing.
routed correctly?
Scanner path 2 Is the scanner rail free of YES Check the surface of the
(obstacle) soiling? In addition, does the scanner rail for dirt and
scanner move smoothly? obstacles that can come into
contact with the scanner.
Connector 3 Is the wiring/connections from YES Correct the wiring/connec-
the connector CN1 on the tion.
scanner control PCB to the
scanner through the relay
connector J810 normal?
Scanner motor 4 Try replacing the scanner YES End.
(M11) motor. Is the problem
Scanner control corrected? NO Replace the scanner control
PCB PCB.
T11-403-09
8) The pre-exposure lamp fails to turn on.

Pre-exposure lamp 1 Does the output of the follow- YES End.
ing change from 0 to 1 as soon
as the pre-exposure lamp turns
on: I/O>DC-CON>P020-bit 5?
J553-5 (E_LAMP)
Pre-exposure lamp 2 Is the power supply terminal YES Replace the pre-exposure
PCB on the pre-exposure lamp PCB lamp PCB and the machine
(J301) have a fault? housing assembly.
Harness 3 Is there electrical continuity YES End.
in the harness between J110
and J553?
DC controller PCB 5 Try replacing the DC control- YES Replace the DC controller
ler PCB. Is the problem PCB.
corrected?
T11-403-10
9) The scanning lamp fails to turn on.

Scanning lamp 1 Have both ends of the scan- YES
ning lamp turned black?
Scanning lamp 2 Is the scanning lamp mounted NO Correct the mounting.
correctly?
Connector 3 Is the connection of the NO Correct the connection.
following connectors normal:
CN1 on the scanner control
PCB; relay connector J810;
CN1A, CN2A, CN3A of the
inverter power supply; CAN,
CNB, CNC, CND on the
carrier relay PCB; CNE, CNF,
CNG, CNH on the lamp relay
PCB; CNJ, CNK, CNL, CNM
on the lamp relay PCB.
Lamp socket 4 Try replacing the lamp socket YES End.
connected to CNK on the
lamp relay PCB 2. Is the
problem corrected?
Lamp socket 5 Try replacing the lamp socket YES End.
connected to CNG on the lamp
relay PCB 1. Is the problem
corrected?
Lamp relay PCB 2 6 Try replacing the lamp relay YES End.
PCB 2. Is the problem
corrected?
Lamp harness 7 Try replacing the lamp harness YES End.
connecting CNJ on the lamp
relay PCB 2 and CNH on the
problem corrected?
corrected?
Lamp carrier cable 9 Try replacing the lamp carrier YES End.
cable connecting CNF on the
lamp relay PCB 1 and CND
on the carrier relay PCB. Is
the problem corrected?
T11-403-11

cable connecting CNE on the
lamp relay PCB 2 and CNC
Carrier relay PCB 11 Try replacing the carrier relay YES End.
INVOUT harness 12 Try replacing the INVOUT YES End.
harness connecting CNB to
the carrier relay PCB and
CN3A of the inverter power
supply. Is the problem
corrected?
Inverter power 13 Try replacing the inverter YES End.
supply power supply. Is the problem
corrected?
INV/MT harness 14 Try replacing the INV/MT YES End.
harness connection CN1A/
supply and the relay connector
J810. Is the problem corrected?
JNT harness, 15 Try replacing the JNT harness YES End.
Scanner control connecting the relay connector NO Replace the scanner control
PCB J810, CAN on the carrier relay PCB.
PCB, CN1 on the scanner
control PCB, and others.
T11-403-12
10) The fixing heater fails to turn on.

1 Is ‘E000’ indicated? YES See the descriptions on
‘E000’.
AC driver PCB 2 Is the electrical continuity NO Replace the AC driver PCB.
between J104-3/2 normal?
Fixing assembly 3 Try replacing the fixing YES End.
DC controller PCB, assembly. NO Try replacing the DC
DC driver PCB, Is the problem corrected? controller PCB, DC driver
Phase control PCB PCB, phase control PCB in
turns; then, replace the PCB
in question.
T11-403-13
11) The counter fails to operate.

Counter 1 Turn off the main power NO Replace the counter.
switch, and disconnect the
connectors of the counter
(J185, J186); then, measure
the resistance. Is it about
525 Ω?
DC controller PCB CNT1: between J185-1 and -2 YES Check the wiring; if normal,
CNT2: J186-1 and -3 replace the DC controller
PCB.
Note: CNT2 is for the 200-V
model only.
T11-403-14
12) The Add Paper message fails to go off.

1 Does the lifter move up? NO See “The lifter fails to
move up.”
Paper absent 2 Is the paper absent actuator NO Correct the mounting.
actuator mounted to the pickup unit
correctly?
Cassette paper 3 Put paper in the cassette, NO Check the sensor lever; if
absent sensor and set the cassette in the normal, replace the
machine. Is the level of the sensor in question.
DC controller following in service mode YES Replace the DC control-
PCB 0 in the presence of paper: ler PCB.
I/O>DC-CON>P008-bit4/5
(1/2 holder) and bit6/7
(3/4)? (upon detection, 0.)
1st holder: J207-A8
2nd holder: J207-B8
3rd holder: J208-A8
4th holder: J208-B8
T11-403-15
13) The Jam message fails to go off.

Jam paper 1 Find the location of the jam NO See “The lifter fails to move
in service mode: up.”
DISPLAY>JAM screen. Is
there jam paper near the sensor
in question?
Jam sensor 2 Is the sensor in question NO Replace the sensor.
DC controller PCB normal? YES Replace the DC controller
• I/O check PCB.
• Tester check
T11-403-16
14) The Add Toner message fails to turn on.

Toner sensor 1 YES Replace the toner level
sensor.
T11-403-17
15) The Add Toner message fails to turn off.

Toner sensor 1 Does the output indicated for YES Clean or replace the toner
the following remain ‘1’ after bottle set sensor. (The Add
the toner bottom has been Toner message should go
mounted: off when the main switch
I/O-CON>P014-bit5? is turned off and then on.)
Toner sensor 2 Does the output indicated for YES Replace the toner level
the following remain ‘0’ after sensor.
DC controller PCB toner has been added? NO Replace the DC controller
PCB.
T11-403-18
16) The Close Front Cover message fails to go off.

Front cover switch 1 Is the front cover closed NO Check the switch lever
actuator properly? operating area and the
actuator.
DC controller PCB, YES Replace the DC controller
DC driver PCB PCB or the DC driver PCB
as necessary. Be sure to
check that there is electrical
continuity between J554-3
and J554-1.
T11-403-19
5 Arrangement and Functions of Electric Parts

5.1 Clutch Solenoids
CL1
CL6 SL1
SL12
SL6
SL10 SL11
SL3
CL3
SL7
SL4
CL4 SL8
SL5
CL5 SL9
230V
F11-501-01
Clutches and Solenoids
Symbol Name Notation Remarks

Clutch CL1 manual feed drive
CL3 cassette 2 pickup drive
CL
CL6 registration roller drive
Solenoid SL1 manual feed pickup roller DOWN
SL3 cassette 2 pickup roller DOWN
SL SL4 cassette 3 pickup roller DOWN
SL5 cassette 4 pickup roller DOWN
SL6 cassette 1 reversing roller UP
SL10 delivery flapper drive (copy tray)
SL11 delivery flapper drive (duplex tray)
SL12 manual feed reversing roller pressure
reducing solenoid
T11-501-01
5.2 Motors
M11
M10
M1
M8
M3
M5
M2
M6
M7 M9
230V
F11-502-01
Motors

Motor M1 main motor
M M2 wire cleaning motor
M3 feed motor
M5 cassette 2 liftup motor
M8 toner supply motor
M9 duplex feed motor
M10 developing assembly push-on motor
M11 scanner motor
T11-502-01
5.3 Fans
BL2
FM4
BL1
FM2
FM3
FM1
F11-503-01
Fans

Fan FM1 DC power supply cooling fan
FM2 delivery fan
FM3 delivery/feeding assembly cooling fan
FM4 scanner control PCB cooling fan
Blower *1 BL1 separation blower
BL2 process cooling blower
*1: Uses silent rotation for 20 sec after the end of copying operation.
T11-503-01
5.4 Sensors
PS43
PS31
PS45
PS30 TLS1
PS46
PS3
PS47 PS2 VR1
PS1
PS32
PS37 PS44
PS4
PS36
PS29
PS7 PS21
PS6
PS38 PS22 PS9
PS18 PS14
PS8
PS27 PS23 PS10
PS5 PS19 PS15
PS28 PS39 PS24 PS11
PS20 PS16
PS40 PS41 PS12
PS42
230V
F11-504-01
Sensors

Photointerrupters PS1 multifeeder paper detection
PS2 paper entry detection 1 (inside)
PS3 paper entry detention 2 (outside)
PS4 separation detection 1
PS5 fixing outlet detection
PS6 inside tray delivery detection 1
PS7 inside tray delivery detection 2
PS8 delivery detection
PS9 vertical feed paper check 1 detection
PS14 cassette 2 paper surface detection
PS18 cassette 2 paper absent detection
PS19 cassette 3 paper absent detection
PS20 cassette 4 paper ascent detection
PS21 cassette 1 pickup detection
PS27 cassette 2 paper level detection 1
Reflecting type PS29 inside tray paper full detection
sensor PS30 developing assembly push-on detection
PS31 toner bottle set detection
PS32 fixing assembly detection
PS36 paper end detection
PS37 stationary paper detection
PS38 duplex inlet detection
T11-504-01

PS43 copyboard detection
PS44 scanner home position detection
PS45 original detection 1
Reflecting type TLS1 toner level detection
sensor, VR1 manual feed paper width detection
Piezoelectric
element,
Multi-turn sensor
T11-504-02
5.5 Switches, Counters, Heaters, and Zener Diode
SW1
DS3 H3
H10
H9
FL2 CNT2
FL1 CNT1
DS1 TH1
TH2
ZD1 DS2
TS1 CB1
SW4
H1 H5
SW5
RY1 H4
RY3 SW6
RY2
H8
230V
F11-505-01
Switches, Counters, Heaters, and Zener Diode
Name Notation Remarks

Switch SW1 main power switch
SW4 cassette 2 paper size switch
Counter CNT1 total copy counter 1
CNT2 total copy counter 2
Zener diode DZ1 primary charging assembly Zener diode
Scanning lamp FL1 scanning lamp 1
(fluorescent lamp) FL2 scanning lamp 2
Heater H1 fixing heater
* H3 anti-condensation heater
* H4 dehumidifier heater
H9 lamp heater 1
H10 lamp heater 2
Relay RY1 DC power supply 2 (DCP2) relay
RY2 drive power supply relay 1
RY3 drive power supply relay 2
Door switch DS1 front door switch
DS2 right door switch
DS3 left door switch
Thermistor TH1 temperature detection thermistor 1 (for temperature control)
TH2 temperature detection thermistor 2
(for overheating detection)
Thermal switch TS1 fixing heater thermal switch
Circuit breaker CB1 circuit breaker
*: option
T11-505-01
5.6 PCBs
11
12
14
10
13
15
6 9
8
2
7 5
4
1
17 16
19 18
20
21
F11-506-01
PCBs
Ref. Name Remarks Type

1 DC power supply PCB DC power supply
(multiple output)
2 DC power supply PCB DC power supply
(single output)
3 AC driver PCB unit dehumidifier heater, fixing, AC noise filter
4 phase control PCB unit measures against flickering PW7121
5 high-voltage power supply unit HV1, HV2, HV3, BIAS 1 through 4
6 DC controller PCB unit DC controller PW7120
7 DC driver PCB unit DC driver PW7154 PW7155
8 DC relay PCB unit main motor control relay, LED exposure PW7190
unit power supply distribution
9 transfer lamp PCB unit separation auxiliary lamp PW7133
10 pre-exposure lamp PCB photosensitive drum residual charge PW7130
removal
11 power supply indication PCB power supply ON indicating lamp PS7170
12 control panel controller PCB display control
13 VR PCB back-light adjustment
14 inverter PCB LCD (back-light) power supply
15 fluorescent lamp power supply scanning lamp
16 scanner control PCB scanner DC controller
17 image processing PCB original image processing
18 carrier relay PCB scanning lamp relay, etc.
19 lamp relay PCB 1 scanning lamp relay, etc.
20 lamp relay PCB 2 scanning lamp relay, etc.
21 motor driver PCB duplex feed motor PW7156
T11-506-01
5.7 PCBs
5.7.1 DC Controller PCB (main controller)
J223 J221 J201
J205
J220
J202
U715
J209
J203
J210 J219
J214
J204
J216
J215
J212 J211
J206 J207 J208 J213
J214: flash ROM slot for the DC-CPU.

(DCC DIMM), 4M byte, DIMM
F11-507-01
5.7.2 DC Driver PCB (DC driver)
J552
J551
J559
J560
J556
J558 J561
J557
J555
J553 J554
F11-507-02
5.7.3 Scanner Controller PCB (scanner controller)
CN13
CN9
CN8
CN5
CN4
CN3
CN1
CN2
F11-507-03
5.7.4 Image Processing PCB
CN2
CN4 CN3
CN5
F11-507-04
6 Upgrading
The machine may be upgraded as follows:
6.1 Replacing the DIMM

The machine’s DIMM (flash ROM) is mounted to the DC controller PCB. The following
figure shows the view obtained when the small window plate is removed from the rear cover.
DIMM for DC-CPU (4M bytes)
F11-601-01
6.1.1 Removing the DIMM

1) Turn off the main power switch, and disconnect the power plug from the power outlet.
2) Remove the small window plate from the rear cover.
3) Release the slot claws, and pull off the DIMM at an angle as if to lift it.
F11-601-02
6.1.2 Mounting the DIMM

1) Insert the DIMM into the slot at an angle. Check to make sure that the DIMM has been
fully inserted.
2) Shift down the DIMM until the claws of the slot click to shut. Take extra care when
shifting down the DIMM to avoid damage to the DIMM or the claws.
3) Mount the small window plate to the rear cover.
F11-601-03
7 Service Mode
7.1 Outline
The notations of the cassette holders used in this manual in relation to service mode are as
follows:
iR70W iR75W
holder 1 duplex unit
holder 2 holder 2
holder 3 holder 3
holder 4 holder 4
T11-701-01
The machine’s service mode (for copier functions) consists of the following seven items:
No. Indication Description

1 DISPLAY control/display mode
2 I/O DISPLAY I/O display mode
3 ADJUST adjustment mode
4 FUNCTION operation/inspection mode
5 OPTION machine settings mode
6 TEST test print mode
7 COUNTER counter mode
T11-701-02
7.1.1 Starting Service Mode and Making Selections

1) Press the User Mode key on the control panel.
2) Press ‘2’ and ‘8’ keys on the keypad at the same time.
3) Press the User Mode key on the control panel.
• The Initial screen of service mode appears.
COPIER COPIER copier service mode

FEEDER FEEDER ADF service mode
F11-701-01 Initial Screen
7.1.2 Ending Service Mode

• On the Initial screen, a press on the Reset key ends service mode, bringing back the User
screen (Standard screen).
• A press on the Reset key on the Level 1/Level 2 Item screen or on the Level 3 Item screen
brings up the Initial screen of service mode; another press will end service mode, bringing
back the User screen.
If you have used Adjust, Function, or Option in service mode, be sure to

turn off and then on the main power after ending service mode.
7.1.3 Backing Up the RAM

The backup data for the RAM is recorded on the service label shown below. (The label is
attached behind the service book case found on the back of the front cover.) The settings un-
der the FACT column are factory settings.
COPIER/ADJUST FACT 1 2 COPIER/ADJUST FACT 1 2 COPIER/ADJUST FACT 1 2

AE AE-SLOP DENS DNS-T01 DENS DNS-P01
AE-LIGHT DNS-T02 DNS-P02
AE-DARK DNS-T03 DNS-P03
ADJ-XY ADJ-X DNS-T04 DNS-P04
ADJ-Y DNS-T05 DNS-P05
ADJ-MAGX DNS-T06 DNS-P06
ADJ-MAGY DNS-T07 DNS-P07
CCD OVERLAP DNS-T08 DNS-P08
GAP DNS-T09 DNS-P09
BLANK BLANK-T1 DNS-T10 DNS-P10
BLANK-T2 DNS-T11 DNS-P11
DEVELOP BIAS-1 DNS-T12 DNS-P12
BIAS-2 DNS-T13 DNS-P13
SW-BIAS DNS-T14 DNS-P14
HV-TR HV-TR DNS-T15 DNS-P15
FEED-ADJ FEED-MTR DNS-T16 DNS-P16
CL5-OFF DNS-T17 DNS-P17
CL5-ON DNS-TP01
ADJ-C1 DNS-TP02
ADJ-C2 DNS-TP03
ADJ-C3 DNS-TP04
ADJ-C4 DNS-TP05
ADJ-MF DNS-TP06
ADJ-R-C2 DNS-TP07 COPIER/OPTION FACT 1 2
ADJ-R-C3 DNS-TP08 BODY WIRE-CLN
ADJ-R-C4 DNS-TP09 USER COPY-LIM
ADJ-R-MF DNS-TP10 INT-FACE B-CLR
ADJ-VSYC DNS-TP11
MF-VSYC DNS-TP12
CST-ADJ MF-A6R DNS-TP13
MF-A3 DNS-TP14
MF-A4 DNS-TP15 FEEDER/ADJUST FACT 1 2
FIXING FIX-P DNS-TP16 DOC-ST
FIX-S1 DNS-TP17 DOC-ST-R
FIX-S2
FIX-F3
EXP-LED LED-STRB
LED-OFF1
LED-OFF2 S/N
T11-701-03
7.1.4 Basic Operation

The screens are grouped into three levels: Initial screen, Level 1/Level 2 Item screen, and
Level 3 Item screen.
a. Initial Screen
COPIER
Initial items
FEEDER
FEEDER is indicated
only when a feeder is installed.
F11-701-02
• To select an Initial item, press the desired white-on-black notation.
b. Level 1/Level 2 Item Screen
VERSION CCD
USER Level 1 items
ACC-STS
ANALOG
CST-STS SENSOR
JAM
ERR
Level 2 items
F11-701-03
• To select a Level 1 item, press the desired item at the top of the screen.
• To select a Level 2 item, press the desired white-on-black item.
c. Level 3 item Screen

<VERSION> <1/1> <READY>
DC-CON
Number of pages and of page
FEEDER Level 2 item
State of the Machine
SORTER
READY ready for service/copying
operation
JAM jam detected
SERVICE service operation under way
WAITING in wait as for initial rotation
DOOR door open detected
COPYING copying operation under way
Level 3 items ERROR service error detected
To previous page To next page
F11-701-04
• To select a Level 3 item, press the desired item to highlight (change to white-on-black).

<AE> <1/1> <READY>
AE-SLOP xxxxx ← (yyyyy){aaaaa ~ bbbbb}
xxxx: setting before change

AE-SLOP yyyyy: input value
Press the item aaaaa to bbbbb: range of input values
so that it changes
to a white-on-black notation.
To switch between + and - To accept
+/- OK
F11-701-05
d. Selecting a Screen
User screen
(*)(2, 8)(*) Reset key
Initial screen
Reset key
Select an item (COPIER)
Level 1/Level 2
From
Item screen
Level 1/Level 2
Item screen
Select a Level 2 Select a Level 1 item at the top of the screen.

item from the list.
Level 3 Item Level 3 Item Level 3 Item Level 3 Item

screen (1/1) screen (1/1) screen (1/2) screen (2/2)
Initial screen
Reset key
Select an item (FEEDER)

Select an
Level 3 Item item at the
top of the
Level 3 Item
screen screen. screen
(1/1) (1/1)
DISPLAY ADJUST
F11-701-06
e. Key Functions in Service Mode

Reset key: Use it to end service mode.
Guide key: Not used.
User Mode key: Use it to start service mode.
Interrupt key: Not used.
Keypad: Use it to enter a value.
ID key: Not used.
Clear key: Use it to clear inputs/soft counter readings in service mode.
Start key: Use it to make a copy without ending service mode.

Stop key: Use it to stop ongoing operation.
Power Save key: Not used
key: Use it to move to the previous page.

key: Use it to move to the next page.
+/− key: Use it to switch between + and - for a value.
OK key: Use it to accept an input value or to start an operation.
7.2 DISPLAY (display/control mode)
VERSION CCD
USER
ACC-STS
ANALOG
CST-STS SENSOR
JAM
ERR
F11-702-01 DISPLAY (Level 2 Item screen)
Using the Screen

• A press on a Level 1 item at the top of the screen will bring up its Level 1/Level 2 Item
screen.
• A press on a Level 2 item (white-on-black notation) will bring up a Level 3 Item screen.
• A press on the Reset screen will bring up the Initial screen.
DISPLAY Items
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Mode description
DISPLAY VERSION DC-CON indicates the ROM version of the DC controller PCB.
FEEDER indicates the ROM version of the feeder controller PCB.
SORTER indicates the ROM version of the sorter controller PCB.
USER LANGUAGE indicates the selected language.
COUNTER indicates the count control type of the copy counter.
ACC-STS FEEDER indicates the state of connection of the feeder.
SORTER indicates the state of connection of the sorter.
DATA-CON indicates the state of connection of the copy data controller.
OP-MEM indicates the state of connection of the option RAM on the
scanner control PCB.
ANALOG TEMP indicates the machine inside temperature.
OTICS indicates the temperature of the lamp (source of light).
FIX-E indicates the temperature of the upper fixing roller.
CST-STS WIDTH-C1 indicates the paper size of the cassette holder 1.
WIDTH-C2 indicates the paper side of the cassette holder 2.
WIDTH-C3 indicates the paper size of the cassette holder 3.
WIDTH-C4 indicates the paper size of the cassette holder 4.
WIDTH-MF indicates the paper width of the multifeeder.
JAM indicates the jam history.
ERR indicates the error history.
CCD TARGET1 indicates the shading target value of CCD1.
TARGET2 indicates the shading target value of CCD2.
BOF1 indicates the output value of CCD1 when the scanning lamp is off.
BOF2 indicates the output value of CCD2 when the scanning lamp is off.
OFST1-0 indicates the offset level adjustment value of odd-number
bits of CCD1.
OFST1-E indicates the offset level adjustment value of even-number
bits of CCD1.
OFST2-0 indicates the offset level adjustment value of odd-number
bits of CCD2.
OFST2-E indicates the offset level adjustment level of even-number
bits of CCD2.
GAIN1-0 indicates the gain level adjustment value of odd-number bit
of CCD1.
GAIN1-E indicates the gain level adjustment value of even-number
bit of CCD1.
GAIN2-0 indicates the gain level adjustment value of odd-number
bits of CCD2.
GAIN2-E indicates the gain level adjustment value of even-number
bits of CCD2.
SENSOR DOC-SZ indicates the size of an original detected by the original size
sensor.
<VERSION>
Use it to indicate the ROM version of each accessory PCB and the copier PCB.

<VERSION> <1/1> <READY>
DC-CON xx.yy
FEEDER xx.yy
SORTER xx.yy
F11-702-02
Using the Screen

• A press on a Level 1 item at the top of the screen brings up its Level 1/Level 2 Item
screen.
• A press on the Reset key brings up the Initial screen.
• The Page Change key is disabled.
• Highlighting of Level 3 items is disabled.
Items
Level 3 Description Remarks
DC-CON Indicates the ROM version of the DC controller xx: version number.
PCB. YY: R&D control number.
FEEDER Indicates the ROM version of the feeder
controller PCB.
SORTER Indicates the ROM version of the sorter
controller PCB.
T11-702-01
<USER>
Use it to check the items related to the user and the User screen.

<USER> <1/1> <READY>
LANGUAGE --xx.00yy
COUNTER zz
F11-702-03
Using the Screen

screen.
Items
LANGUAGE Indicates the selected language. xx: language code
(Table below).
YY: configuration code.
00: AB; 02: A
COUNTER Indicates the type of count control for the copy zz 00: total;
counter. 04: small, large
T11-702-02
Language Code
Language Notation
Japanese JA
English EN
French FR
German DE
Italian IT
T11-702-03
<ACC-STS>
Use it to indicate the state of connection of accessories.

<ACC-STS> <1/1> <READY>
FEEDER x
SORTER x
DATA-CON x
OP-MEM xx MB
F11-702-04
Using the Screen

• A press on a Level 1 item at the top of the screen brings up its Level 1/Level 2 item
screen.
Items
FEEDER Indicates the state of connection of the feeder. 0: absent
SORTER Indicates the state of connection of the sorter. 1: present
DATA-CON Indicates the state of connection of the copy data
controller.
OP-MEM Indicates the state of connection of the option unit: MB
RAM on the scanner control PCB.
T11-702-04
<ANALOG>
Use it to check analog measurements.

<ANALOG> <1/1> <READY>
TEMP xx ˚C
OPTICS xx ˚C
FIX-E xxx ˚C
F11-702-05
Using the Screen

• A press on a Level 1 item at the top of the screen brings up the Level 1/Level 2 Item
screen.
Items
TEMP Indicates the machine inside temperature. Unit: °C
OPTICS Indicates the temperature of the scanning lamp.
FIX-E Indicates the temperature of the upper fixing roller.
T11-702-05
<CST-STS>
Use it to check how the cassettes/multifeeder is used.

<CST-STS> <1/1> <READY>
WIDTH-C1 xxxx
WIDTH-C2 xxxx
WIDTH-C3 xxxx
WIDTH-C4 xxxx
WIDTH-MF xxxx mm
F11-702-06
Using the Screen

screen.
Items
WIDTH-C1 Indicates the paper size selected for cassette Indicates default sizes:
holder 1. if the tray is open or the size
WIDTH-C2 Indicates the paper size selected for cassette is unknown, the notation
holder 2. will be ‘----’.
WIDTH-C3 Indicates the paper size selected for cassette
holder 3.
WIDTH-C4 Indicates the paper size selected for cassette
holder 4.
WIDTH-MF Indicates the paper width selected for the Uses integers (MM).
multifeeder.
T11-702-06
<JAM>
Use it to check jam data.

<JAM> <1/7> <READY>
AA BBBB CCCC DDDD E FFFF G HHHHHH IIII
F11-702-07
Using the Screen

screen.
• A press on the key brings up the next page, while a press on the key brings up the
previous key.
• As many as seven screens are used even when fewer than 50 jams have occurred.
• As many as eight data items are indicated on each page, with the seventh page indicating
two data item.
Items
AA Indicates the number of a jam (in order of occur- 1 to 50 (50 max.)
rence; the higher the number, the older the jam).
BBBB Indicates the date of occurrence. 2 digits for month and day.
CCCC Indicates the time of occurrence. Hours and minutes in 24-hour
notation.
DDDD Indicates the time of recovery. Hours and minutes in 24-hour
notation.
E Indicates the location of occurrence. 0: body; 1: feeder; 2: sorter
FFFF Indicates a jam code. Higher 2 digits: type of jam
Lower 2 digits: sensor used
G Indicates the source of paper.
HHHHHH Indicates the pickup holder soft counter reading.
IIII Indicates the paper size.
T11-702-07
Codes Related to Jams
Types of Jams (higher 2 digits of the jam code)

Code Type of jam
01xx delay jam
02xx stationary jam
03xx timing jam
05xx size error jam
10xx residual jam
11xx door open jam during copying
T11-702-08
Sensors Detecting the Jam (lower 2 digits of the jam code)

Code Sensor
xx01 cassette 1 pickup sensor
xx11 vertical feed 1 sensor
xx21 paper entry sensor
xx22 separation sensor
xx31 fixing outlet sensor
xx32 inside tray delivery sensor 1
xx33 inside tray delivery sensor 2
xx34 delivery sensor
xx41 duplex inlet sensor
xx42 paper end sensor
xx43 paper stationary sensor
xx50 ADF-related
xx60 sorter-related
T11-702-09
Source of Paper
Code Source
1
2 cassette 2
3 cassette 3
4 cassette 4
5 multifeeder
6 duplex unit
T11-702-10
<ERR>
Use it to check error codes.

<ERR> <1/3> <READY>
AA BBBB CCCC DDDD EEEE FFFF G
F11-702-08
Using the Screen

screen.
• A press on the Reset screen brings up the Initial screen.
previous page.
• As many as three screens are used even if fewer than 20 errors have occurred.
• As many as eight data items are indicated on each page, with the third page indicating
four data items.
Items
AA Indicates the number of an error (the higher the 1 to 20 (20 max.)
number, the older the error).
BBBB Indicates the date of occurrence. 2 digits for month and day.
CCCC Indicates the time of occurrence. Hours and minutes in 24-hour
notation.
DDDD Indicates the time of recovery. Hours and minutes in 24-hour
notation.
EEEE Indicates an error code (Exxx).
FFFF Indicates a detail code. If none, ‘0000’.
G Indicates the location of occurrence. 0: machine; 1: feeder; 2: sorter
T11-702-11
<CCD>
Use it to check measurements related to the CCD.

<CCD> <1/2> <READY>
TARGET1 xxxx
TARGET2 xxxx
BOF1 xxxx
BOF2 xxxx
OFST1-0 xxxx
OFST1-E xxxx
OFST2-0 xxxx
OFST2-E xxxx
F11-702-09
Using the Screen

screen.
previous page.
Items
TARGET1 Indicates the shading target value of CCD1. Unit: slice
TARGET2 Indicates the shading target value of CCD2. Range: 0 to 255
BOF1 Indicates the output value of CCD1 when the
scanning lamp is off.
BOF2 Indicates the output value of CCD2 when the
scanning lamp is off.
OFST1-0 Indicates the offset level adjustment value of
odd-number bits of CCD1.
OFST1-E Indicates the offset level adjustment value of
even-number bits of CCD1. Range: 0 to 255
OFST2-0 Indicates the offset level adjustment value of
OFST2-E Indicates the offset level adjustment value of
even-number bits of CC2.
T11-702-12

<CCD> <2/2> <READY>
GAIN1-0 xxxx
GAIN1-E xxxx
GAIN2-0 xxxx
GAIN2-E xxxx
F11-702-10
Using the Screen

• A press on the Level 1 item at the top of the screen brings up its Level 1/Level 2 Item
screen.
• A press on the key brings up the next screen, while a press on the key brings up
the previous screen.
Items
GAIN1-0 Indicates the gain level adjustment value of
GAIN1-E Indicates the gain level adjustment value of
even-number bits of CCD1. Range: 0 to 255
GAIN2-0 Indicates the gain level adjustment value of
GAIN2-E Indicates the gain level adjustment value of
even-number bits of CCD2.
T11-702-13
<SENSOR>
Use it to check the outputs of sensors.

<SENSOR> <1/1> <READY>
DOC-SZ xxxx
F11-702-11
Using the Screen

screen.
Items
DOC-SZ Indicates the size of the original detected by the Indicates a default size;
original size sensor. if unknown, indicates ‘---’.
T11-702-14
7.3 I/O Display Mode
DC-CON
IP
SORTER
F11-703-01 I/O Level 2 Item Screen
Using the Screen

screen.
• A press on a Level 2 item (white-on-black notation) brings up its Level 3 Item screen.
Note: SORTER is indicated only when the sorter is connected.
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3

I/O DC-CON P001 to 0026
IP P001 to P005
SORTER P001 to P009
7.3.1 DC_CON
Address bit Signal Description Remarks

P001 bit0 −
bit1 −
bit2 −
bit3 −
bit4 −
bit5 −
bit6 −
bit7 −
P002 bit0 −
bit1 −
bit2 −
bit3 −
bit4 −
bit5 −
bit6 MFPU_SL2 manual feed pickup roller DOWN 0: stop/1: operate
solenoid control signal 2
bit7 −
P003 bit0 −
bit1 −
bit2 −
bit3 −
bit4 −
bit5 −
bit6 −
bit7 −
P004 bit0 −
bit1 −
bit2 −
bit3 −
bit4 −
bit5 −
bit6 −
bit7 RY1 relay 1 control signal 0: stop/1: operate
T11-703-01

P005 bit0 −
bit1 −
bit2 −
bit3 −
bit4 −
bit5 −
bit6 FDR_OP* front cover open/closed detection signal 0: closed/1: open
bit7 S1_ST* power switch detection signal 0: reset signal
connected
P006 bit0 −
bit1 −
bit2 −
bit3 −
bit4 −
bit5 −
bit6 −
bit7 −
P007 bit0 C_SZDT0 cassette paper size detection signal 0
bit1 C_SZDT1 cassette paper size detection signal 1
bit4 P_LVL1* paper surface detection signal 0: up
(cassette holder 1)
(cassette holder 2)
(cassette holder 3)
(cassette holder 4)
P008 bit0 C1_PL1 paper level detection signal 1 See Table A.
(cassette holder 1)
bit1 C1_PL2 paper level detection signal 2
(cassette holder 1)
(cassette holder 2)
(cassette holder 2)
bit4 P_EMP1* paper absent detection signal 0: present/1: absent
(cassette holder 1)
bit5 P_EMP2* paper absent detection single 0: present/1: absent
(cassette holder 2)
(cassette holder 3)
(cassette holder 4)
T11-703-02

P009 bit0 CPF_CHK1* pickup detection signal (cassette holder 1) 0: present/1: absent
bit1 CPF_CHK2* pickup detection signal (cassette holder 2) 0: present/1: absent
bit4 P_CHK1* vertical feed 1 detection signal 0: present/1: absent
P010 bit0 −
bit1 P_ENT2* paper entry detection signal 2 (outside) 0: present/1: absent
bit2 P_SEPR1* separation detection signal 1 0: present/1: absent
bit3 F_EXIT* fixing outlet detection signal 0: present/1: absent
bit4 I_EXIT2* inside tray delivery detection signal 2 0: present/1: absent
bit5 O_EXIT* delivery detection signal (side tray, sorter) 0: present/1: absent
bit6 MP_ENT* multifeeder detection single 0: present/1: absent
bit7 I_EXIT1* inside tray delivery detection signal 1 0: present/1: absent
P011 bit0 BSP_ENT* duplex inlet paper detection signal 0: present/1: absent
bit1 BSP_END* paper end detection signal (duplex unit) 0: present/1: absent
bit2 BSP_STY* paper stationary detection signal 0: present/1: absent
(duplex unit)
bit3 BS_ST* duplex unit set signal 0: present/1: absent
bit4 −
bit5 ZEROCR* zero-cross detection signal 0: power switch ON
bit6 −
bit7 ITP_FULL* inside tray paper full detection signal 0: full
P012 bit0 DPCFM_ST* DC power supply cooling fan rotation 0: rotate/1: stop
detection signal
bit1 EXFM_ST* exhaust fan rotation detection signal 0: rotate/1: stop
bit2 SPBLWST* separation blower rotation detection 0: rotate/1: stop
signal
bit3 PEXFM_ST* delivery/feeding assembly cooling fan 0: rotate/1: stop
rotation detection signal
bit4 DEV_ST* developing assembly unit set signal 0: present/1: absent
bit5 DP_HP* developing assembly push-on detection 0: home position
signal
bit6 LDR_OP* left door open/closed detection signal 0: closed/1: open
bit7 RDR_OP* right door open/closed detection signal 0: closed/1: open
T11-703-03

P013 bit0 MAMTR_LD* main motor sync signal 0: ON/1: OFF
bit1 PFMTR_LD* paper feed motor sync signal 0: ON/1: OFF
bit2 WCMTR_0C* wire cleaning motor overcurrent detection 0: overcurrent
signal
bit3 DEV_TNR1 developing assembly toner detection 0: absent/1: present
signal 1
bit4 HV1_ST primary charging assembly output 0: faulty/1: normal
detection signal
bit5 TR_ST transfer charging assembly output 0: faulty/1: normal
detection signal
bit6 SEP_ST separation charging assembly output 0: faulty/1: normal
detection signal
bit7 DBIASST developing bias output detection signal 0: faulty/1: normal
P014 bit0 CPY_CNT1* counter 1 detection signal 0: present
bit1 CPY_CNT2* counter 2 detection signal 0: present
bit2 TR1_ERR TR1 short circuit detection signal 0: shorted/1: normal
bit3 TR2_ERR TR2 short circuit detection signal 0: shorted/1: normal
bit4 FU_ST* fixing assembly detection signal 0: present/1: absent
bit5 TB_ST toner bottle set detection signal 0: absent/1: present
bit6 ADF_ST* ADF set signal 0: present/1: absent
bit7 CCV_EN CCV enable signal
P015 bit0 DP_MTR developing assembly push-on motor 0: stop/1: rotate
control signal
bit1 DP_CHG release power supply change control signal 1: CHG
bit2
bit3 F_LAMP1 fixing assembly heater 1 control signal 0: OFF/1: ON
bit4 F_LAMP2 fixing heater 2 control signal 0: OFF/1: ON
bit5 −
bit6 −
bit7 −
P016 bit0 −
bit1 −
bit2 −
bit3 TR_LAMP transfer auxiliary lamp control signal 0: OFF/1: ON
bit4 PKUP_SL1 pickup roller DOWN solenoid 1 control 0: OFF/1: ON
signal (cassette holder 1)
T11-703-04

P017 bit0 FEED_CL1 cassette pickup clutch 1 control signal 0: OFF/1: ON
(cassette holder 1)
bit1 FEED_CL2 cassette pickup clutch 2 control signal 0: OFF/1: ON
(cassette holder 2)
(cassette holder 3)
(cassette holder 4)
bit4 REV_SL1 CR_SL reversing roller UP solenoid 0: OFF/1: ON
control signal (cassette holder 1)
CR_SL counter roller control signal (duplex unit)
bit5 REV_SL2 reversing roller UP solenoid 2 control 0: OFF/1: ON
single (cassette holder 2)
signal (cassette 3)
signal (cassette 4)
P018 bit0 FEED_CL5 intermediate clutch control signal 0: OFF/1: ON
bit1 MFPU_SL1 manual feed pickup roller DOWN 0: OFF/1: ON
solenoid control signal 1
bit2 MFFEDCL manual feed pickup clutch control signal 0: OFF/1: ON
bit3 CFED_CL cassette pickup clutch control signal 0: OFF/1: ON
bit4
bit5 MAMTR main motor control signal 0: stop/1: rotate
bit6 WCMTR wire cleaning motor control signal 0: stop/1: rotate
bit7 WCMTR_DIR wire cleaning motor reversal signal 0: CW/1: CCW
P019 bit0 −
bit1 −
bit2 −
bit3 EXFM exhaust fan control signal 0: stop/1: rotate
bit4 SEP_BLW separation blower control signal 0: stop/1: rotate
bit5 HOP_MTR toner supply motor control signal 0: stop/1: rotate
bit6 PE_SL1 delivery direction switching solenoid 1 0: OFF/1: ON
control signal (side tray)
bit7 PE_SL2 delivery direction switching solenoid 2 0: OFF/1: ON
control single (duplex unit)
T11-703-05

P020 bit0 HV1 primary charging assembly control signal 1: apply
bit1 HV_XFR transfer charging assembly control signal 1: apply
bit2 D_BIAS developing assembly bias control signal 1: apply
bit3 BIASCH developing assembly polarity switch 0: positive/
control signal 1: negative
bit4 HV_SEP separation charging assembly control 1: apply
signal
bit5 E_LAMP pre-exposure control signal 0: OFF/1: ON
bit6 PEX_FM delivery/feeding assembly cooling fan 0: stop/1: rotate
control signal
bit7 −
P021 bit0 LMTR1_A lift motor 1 CW rotation control signal 0: stop/1: CW
(cassette 1)
bit1 LMTR2_A lift motor 2 CW rotation control signal 0: stop/1: CW
(cassette 2)
(cassette 3)
(cassette 4)
bit4 −
bit5 −
bit6 −
bit7 −
P022 bit0 C3_PL1 cassette holder 3 residual paper detection See Table A.
signal 1
bit1 C3_PL2 cassette holder 3 residual paper detection
signal 2
signal 1
signal 2
bit4 −
bit5 −
bit6 −
bit7 −
T11-703-06

P023 bit0 CS_DGT0 cassette size digit signal 0
bit1 CS_DGT1 cassette size digit signal 1
bit2 CS_DGT2 cassette size digit signal 2
bit3 CS_DGT3 cassette side digit signal 3
bit4 −
bit5 −
bit6 P_BLW 0: stop/1: rotate
bit7 −
P024 bit0 −
bit1 −
bit2 −
bit3 −
bit4 −
bit5 −
bit6 −
bit7 −
P025 bit0 PNLCDON LCD back-light control signal 0: OFF/1: ON
bit1 CPY_CNT1 counter 1 control signal 1: count
bit2 CPY_CNT2 counter 2 connector signal 1: count
bit3 S1 switch 1 control signal 1: switch reset
bit4 BSMTR_DIR duplex feed motor reversal control signal 0: CW/1: CCW
bit5 BSMTR_OE* duplex feed motor hold-off control signal 0: hold off
bit6 A_CNT ASSIST2 count signal
bit7 CCV_CNT CCV count signal
P026 bit0 −
bit1 −
bit2 −
bit3 −
bit4 −
bit5 −
bit6 −
bit7 P_ENT1* paper entry detection signal 1 (inside) 0: present/1: absent
T11-703-07
Attachment A: Detection of Paper Level

Cx_PL1 Cx_PL2 Remarks
0 0 Indicates the absence of paper.
Note: The absence of paper is communicated by the paper absent
detection signal.
0 1 Indicates that the level of remaining paper is 10% or less.
1 1 Indicates that the level of remaining paper is 10% to 50%.
1 0 Indicates that the level of remaining paper is more than 50%.
T11-703-08
7.3.2 IP
Address bit Description Remarks

P001 bit0 carrier sensor 1: home position
bit1 light source heater 0: OFF/1: ON
bit2 lamp 0: OFF/1: ON
bit3 fan 0: OFF/1: ON
bit4 copyboard open/closed sensor 0: open/1: closed
bit5 −
bit6 −
bit7 −
P002 bit0 paper size sensor 0 0: absent/1: present
bit1 paper size sensor 1 0: absent/1: present
bit7 paper size sensor 7
P003 bit0 STS_STB
bit1 DATA_RDY 0: transmission ready
bit2 SCAN_BSY 0: scanner image read
bit3 READY 0: scanner ready
bit4 −
bit5 −
bit6 −
bit7 −
P004 bit0 CMD_DATA0 Scanner → Printer data bus
bit1 CMD_DATA1
bit2 CMD_DATA2
bit3 CMD_DATA3
bit4 CMD_DATA4
bit5 CMD_DATA5
bit6 CMD_DATA6
bit7 CMD_DATA7
T11-703-09

P005 bit0 STS_DATA0 Scanner → Printer data bus
bit1 STS_DATA1
bit2 STS_DATA2
bit3 STS_DATA3
bit4 STS_DATA4
bit5 STS_DATA5
bit6 STS_DATA6
bit7 STS_DATA7
T11-703-10
7.3.3 SORTER

P001 bit0 slide motor phase A
bit1 slide motor phase B
bit2 slide motor current control 1
bit3 slide motor current control 0
bit4 feed motor phase A
bit5 feed motor phase B
bit6 feed motor current control 1
bit7 feed motor current control 0
P002 bit0 shift motor ENABLE 1: ON
bit1 −
bit2 stapler empty 0: absent
bit3 manual staple key input 0: ON
bit4 staple absent indication 0: ON
bit5 manual staple indication 0: ON
bit6 −
bit7 E2PROM data input positive logic
P003 bit0 −
bit1 shift motor encoder CLK
bit2 paper sensor 0: present
bit3 staple HP 1: HP
bit4 staple slide HP 0: HP
bit5 staple door switch 1: open
bit6 IPC INTR
bit7 overload detection input 1: overload
P004 bit0 RXD for checker negative logic
bit1 TXD for checker negative logic
bit2 E2PROM CLK output positive logic
bit3 E2PROM data output positive logic
bit4 E2PROM CS output 1: EPROM access enabled
bit5 shift motor UP 1: ON
bit6 shift motor DOWN 1: ON
bit7 slide motor NABLE 0: ON
T11-703-11

P005 bit0 alignment motor * phase B
bit1 alignment motor * phase A
bit2 alignment motor phase A
bit3 alignment motor phase B
bit4 external memory write signal
bit5 external memory read signal
bit6 alignment motor ENABLE 1: ON
bit7 feed motor ENABLE 0: ON
P006 bit0 −
bit1 −
bit2 −
bit3 input for function checker 0: checker connected
bit4 −
bit5 stapler motor CCW rotation 1: ON
bit6 stapler motor CW rotation 1: ON
bit7 −
P007 bit0 −
bit1 −
bit2 −
bit3 −
bit4 −
bit5 −
bit6 −
bit7 −
P008 bit0 read cam single rotation sensor 0: slope, 1: level
bit1 −
bit2 shift HP sensor 0: HP
bit3 −
bit4 −
bit5 joint switch 1: open
bit6 alignment HP sensor 1: HP
bit7 −
P009 bit0 manual shift DOWN switch 0: ON
bit1 manual shift UP switch 0: ON
bit2 DSPW6 0: ON
bit3 DSPW5 0: ON
bit4 DSPW4 0: ON
bit5 DSPW3 0: ON
bit6 DSPW2 0: ON
bit7 DSPW1 0: ON
T11-703-12
7.4 Adjustment Mode

BLANK
AE
ADJ-XY
CCD FEED-ADJ
CST-ADJ
HV-TR FIXING
DEVELOP
DENS EXP-LED
F11-704-01 ADJUST Level 2 Screen
Using the Screen

screen.
• A press on a Level 2 item (white-on-black notation) brings up a Level 3 Item screen.
Guide to the Screen

xxxxx: numeric value before change.
yyyyy: numeric input.
aaaaa to bbbbb: range of numeric inputs.
ADJUST Items
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Adjust Mode description
ADJUST AE AE-SLOP 1~7 Use it to adjust the density of copy images for AE.
AE-LIGHT 1~7 Use it to remove color, if any, from the background of the
original for AE.
AE-DARK 1~7 Use it to adjust the density of images for AE.
ADJ-XY ADJ-X 57 ~ 199 Use it to adjust the image read start position in sub scanning
direction.
ADJ-Y 0 ~ 237 Use it to adjust the image read start position in main scanning
direction.
ADJ-MAGX 990 ~ 1010 Use it to adjust the reproduction ratio in sub scanning
direction.
ADJ-MAGY 990 ~ 1010 Use it to adjust the reproduction ratio in main scanning
direction.
DEVELOP BIAS 1 700 ~ 1279 Use it to adjust the DC developing bias control voltage.
BIAS 2 700 ~ 1279 Use it to adjust the DC developing bias control voltage.
SW-BIAS −100 ~ 100 Use it to adjust the timing at which bias is switched.
DENS DNS-T01 0 ~ 255 Use it to adjust the copy density (F1) for text mode.
DNS-T02 0 ~ 255 Use it to adjust the copy density (F1.5) for text mode.
DNS-T03 0 ~ 255 Use it to adjust the copy density (F2) for text mode.
DNS-TP01 0 ~ 255 Use it to adjust the copy density (F1) for text/photo mode.
DNS-TP02 0 ~ 255 Use it to adjust the copy density (F1.5) for text/photo mode.
DNS-P01 0 ~ 255 Use it to adjust the copy density (F1) for photo mode.
DNS-P02 0 ~ 255 Use it to adjust the copy density (F1.5) for photo mode.
BLANK BLANK-T1 25 ~ 200 Use it to adjust the margin along the image leading edge.
BLANK-T2 25 ~ 200 Use it to adjust the margin along the image leading edge.
HV-TR HV-TR 0 ~ 1279 Use it to adjust the transfer charging assembly current control
voltage.
FEED-ADJ FEED-MTR 80 ~ 120 Use it to adjust the paper feed motor speed.
CL5-OFF 500 ~ 800 Use it to adjust the OFF timing of the intermediate clutch.
CL5-ON 0 ~ 400 Use it to adjust the ON timing of the intermediate clutch.
ADJ-C1 50 ~ 150 Use it to adjust the horizontal registration for the cassette
holder 1.
holder 2.
holder 3.
holder 4.
ADJ-MF 70 ~ 130 Use it to register the horizontal registration for the multifeeder.
ADJ-R-C2 50 ~ 150 Use it to adjust the horizontal registration for the duplex unit
(pickup from cassette holder 2).
ADJ-R-MF 50 ~ 150 Use it to adjust the horizontal registration for the duplex unit
(pickup from multifeeder).
ADJ-VSYC 50 ~ 150 Use it to adjust the image write start position in sub scanning
direction.
MF-VSYC 50 ~ 150 Use it to adjust the image write position in sub scanning
direction.
CST-ADJ MF-A6R 0 ~ 1279 Use it to adjust paper width sensor of the multifeeder (A6R).
MF-A3 0 ~ 1279 Use it to adjust paper width sensor for the multifeeder (A3).
MF-A4 0 ~ 1279 Use it to adjust paper width sensor for the multifeeder (A4).
FIXING FIX-P 150 ~ 190 Use it to adjust fixing assembly control temperature
(plain paper).
FIX-S1 150 ~ 190 Use it to adjust the fixing assembly control temperature
(special paper 1: tracing paper).
(special paper 2: film).
(special paper 3: thick paper).
EXP-LED LED-STRB 0 ~ 48 Use it to adjust the LED strobe activation time.
LED-OFF 1 -200 ~ 50 Use it to adjust the LED trailing edge OFF timing
(paper width longer than 297 mm).
LED-OFF2 -200 ~ 50 Use it to adjust the LED trailing edge OFF timing
(paper width 297 mm or shorter).
<AE>
Use it to make adjustments for AE mode.

<AE> <1/1> <READY>
AE-SLOP xxxxx ← (yyyyy) {aaaaa ~ bbbbb}
AE-LIGHT xxxxx ← (yyyyy) {aaaaa ~ bbbbb}
AE-DARK xxxxx ← (yyyyy) {aaaaa ~ bbbbb}
+/- OK
F11-704-02
Using the Screen

• A press on a Level 1 item at the to of the screen brings up the Level 1/Level 2 Item
screen.
• A press on a Level 3 item highlights it, ready for an input.
Items
Initial
setting
AE-SLOP Use it to adjust the image density for AE 4 Range: 1 to 7
mode.
AE-LIGHT Use it to remove color, if any, of the 4 −: makes images lighter.
background occurring in AE mode.
AE-DARK Use it to adjust the density of images 4 +: make images darker.
(if too light) for AE mode.
T11-704-01
Entering Data
• The keypad is used to enter data.
• Data may be between 0 and 99999. If the input is smaller than the range, the minimum
setting will be stored; if higher, on the other hand, the maximum setting will be stored.
• If a Level 3 item on the same screen is selected after entering data but without pressing
the OK key, the input data will be lost in response and the input data within parentheses
will not return. The data that existed before input will return when the item for which in-
put was attempted is selected.
• If a Level 1 item is selected or the Reset key is pressed after entering data but without
pressing the OK key, the input data will be lost in response.
• The +/− key is disabled.
<ADJ-XY>
Adjusting the Image Read Start Potion

<ADJ-XY> <1/1> <READY>
ADJ-X xxxxx ← (yyyyy) {aaaaa ~ bbbbb}
ADJ-Y xxxxx ← (yyyyy) {aaaaa ~ bbbbb}
ADJ-MAGX xxxxx ← (yyyyy) {aaaaa ~ bbbbb}
ADJ-MAGY xxxxx ← (yyyyy) {aaaaa ~ bbbbb}
+/- OK
F11-704-03
Using the Screen

• A press on a Level 1 item at the top of the screen brings up its Level 1/Level 2 screen.
• A press on a Level 3 item highlights the item, ready for an input.
Items
Initial
setting
ADJ-X Use it to adjust the image read start 128 1 step: 1/600 in.
position in sub scanning direction. Range: 57 to 199
−: direction of read start
position.
+: direction of read end
position.
ADJ-Y Use it to adjust the image read start 128 1 step: 1/600 in.
position in main scanning direction. Range: 0 to 237
−: direction of machine rear.
+: direction of machine front.
ADJ-MAGX Use it to adjust the reproduction ratio in 1000 1 step: 0.1%
sub scanning direction.
ADJ-MAGY Use it to adjust the reproduction ratio in 1000 Range: 990 to 1010
main scanning direction.
T11-704-02
Entering Data
<DEVELOP>
Adjusting the Developing System

<DEVELOP> <1/1> <READY>
BIAS-1 xxxxx ← (yyyyy) {aaaaa ~ bbbbb}
BIAS-2 xxxxx ← (yyyyy) {aaaaa ~ bbbbb}
SW-BIAS xxxxx ← (yyyyy) {aaaaa ~ bbbbb}
+/- OK
F11-704-04
Using the Screen

• A press on a Level 1 item at the top of the screen brings up the Level 1/Level 2 screen.
Items
Initial
setting
BIAS-1 Use it to adjust the DC developing bias 860 Range: 700 to 1279
control voltage. (text mode, photo mode) −: makes images darker.
+: makes images lighter.
BIAS-2 Use it to adjust the DC developing bias 860 Range: 700 to 1279
control voltage. (text/photo mode) −: makes images darker.
+: makes images lighter.
SW-BIAS Use it to adjust the timing at which 0 Range: −100 to 100
positive bias is switched to negative bias. −: advances the timing.
+: delays the timing.
T11-704-03
Entering Data
<DENS>
Use it to Adjust the Copy Density

<DENS> <1/9> <READY>
DNS-T01 xxxxx ← (yyyyy) {aaaaa ~ bbbbb}
+/- OK
F11-704-05
Using the Screen

screen.
previous page.
Items
Initial
setting
DNS-T01 Use it to adjust the copy density (F1) for 24 Range: 0 to 255
text mode. −: makes images lighter.
DNS-T02 Use it to adjust the copy density (F1.5) for 46 +: makes images darker.
text mode.
DNS-T03 Use it to adjust the copy density (F2) for 64
text mode.
DNS-T04 Use it to adjust the copy density (F2.5) for 82
text mode.
text mode.
text mode.
text mode.
text mode.
T11-704-04
Entering Data

+/- OK
F11-704-06
Using the Screen

previous page.
Items
Initial
setting
DNS-T10 Use it to adjust the copy density (F5.5) for 135 +: makes images darker.
text mode.
text mode.
text mode.
text mode.
text mode.
text mode.
text mode.
T11-704-05
Entering Data

+/- OK
F11-704-07
Using the Screen

• A press on a Level 1 item at the top o the screen brings up its Level 1/Level 2 Item screen.
previous page.
Items
Initial
setting
+: makes images darker.
T11-704-06
Entering Data

DNS-TP01 xxxxx ← (yyyyy) {aaaaa ~ bbbbb}
+/- OK
F11-704-08
Using the Screen

screen.
A press on the key brings up the next page, while a press on the key brings up the
previous key.
Items
Initial
setting
DNS-TP01 Use it to adjust the copy density (F1) for 88 Range: 0 to 255
text/photo mode. −: makes images lighter.
DNS-TP02 Use it to adjust the copy density (F1.5) for 93 +: makes images darker.
text/photo mode.
DNS-TP03 Use it to adjust the copy density (F2) for 98
text/photo mode.
DNS-TP04 Use it to adjust the copy density (F2.5) for 103
text/photo mode.
text/photo mode.
text/photo mode.
text/photo mode.
text/photo mode.
T11-704-07
Entering Data

+/- OK
F11-704-09
Using the Screen

screen.
previous page.
Items
Initial
setting
DNS-TP10 Use it to adjust the copy density (F5.5) for 133 +: makes images darker.
text/photo mode.
text/photo mode.
text/photo mode.
text/photo mode
text/photo mode.
text/photo mode.
text/photo mode.
T11-704-08
Entering Data

+/- OK
F11-704-10
Using the Screen

previous page.
Items
Initial
setting
T11-704-09
Entering Data

DNS-P01 xxxxx ← (yyyyy) {aaaaa ~ bbbbb}
+/- OK
F11-704-11
Using the screen.

screen.
• A press on the brings up the next page, while a press on the key brings up the
previous page.
• A press on a level 3 item highlights it, ready for an input.
Items
Initial
setting
DNS-P01 Use it to adjust the copy density (F1) for 80 Range: 0 to 255
photo mode. −: makes images lighter.
DNS-P02 Use it to adjust the copy density (F1.5) for 86 +: makes images darker.
photo mode.
DNS-P03 Use it to adjust the copy density (F2 for 92
photo mode.
DNS-P04 Use it to adjust the copy density (F2.5) for 98
photo mode.
DNS-P05 Use it to adjust the copy density (F3) for 104
photo mode.
photo mode.
photo mode.
photo mode.
T11-704-10
Entering Data

DNS-P09 xxxxx ← (yyyyy){aaaaa ~ bbbbb}
+/- OK
F11-704-12
Using the screen

screen.
• A press on the key brings up the next page, while a press on the brings up the
previous page.
Items
Initial
setting
DNS-P09 Use it to adjust the copy density (F5 for 128 Range: 0 to 255
DNS-P10 Use it to adjust the copy density (F5.5) 137 +: makes images darker.
photo mode.
photo mode.
photo mode.
photo mode.
photo mode.
photo mode.
photo mode.
T11-704-11
Entering Data

+/- OK
F11-704-13
Using the Screen

screen.
previous page.
Items
Initial
setting
DNS-P17 Use it to adjust the copy density (F9) for 212 Range: 0 to 255
+: make images darker.
T11-704-12
Entering Data
<BLANK>
Use it to adjust the margin along the image leading edge.

<BLANK> <1/1> <READY>
BLANK-T1 xxxxx ← (yyyyy) {aaaaa ~ bbbbb}
BLANK-T2 xxxxx ← (yyyyy) {aaaaa ~ bbbbb}
+/- OK
F11-704-14
Using the Screen

screen.
• The Page switch key is disabled.
• A press on a Level 3 item highlights it, turning it ready for an input.
Items
Initial
setting
BLANK-T1 Use it to adjust the margin along the image 35 1 step: 1 mm
leading edge when making copies whose Range: 25 to 200
width is longer than 297 mm. −: decreases margin.
+: increases margin.
BLANK-T2 Use it to adjust the margin along the image 35 1 step: 1 mm
leading edge when making copies whose Range: 25 to 200
width is 297 mm or shorter. −: decreases margin.
+: increases margin.
T11-704-13
Entering Data
<HV-TR>
Use it to adjust the transfer charging system.

<HV-TR> <1/1> <READY>
HV-TR xxxxx ← (yyyyy) {aaaaa ~ bbbbb}
+/- OK
F11-704-15
Using the Screen

screen.
• The Page switch key is disabled.
Items
Initial
setting
HV-TR Use it to adjust the transfer current level. 540 Range: 0 to 1279
−: increases current.
+: decreases current.
T11-704-14
Entering Data
<FEED-ADJ>
Use it to adjust the feeding system.

<FEED-ADJ> <1/2> <READY>
FEED-MTR xxxxx ← (yyyyy) {aaaaa ~ bbbbb}
CL5-OFF xxxxx ← (yyyyy) {aaaaa ~ bbbbb}
CL5-ON xxxxx ← (yyyyy) {aaaaa ~ bbbbb}
ADJ-C1 xxxxx ← (yyyyy) {aaaaa ~ bbbbb}
ADJ-MF xxxxx ← (yyyyy) {aaaaa ~ bbbbb}
+/- OK
F11-704-16
Using the Screen

screen.
previous page.
Items
Initial
setting
FEED-MTR Use it to adjust the feed speed of the 96 Range: 80 to 120
paper feed motor. −: increases speed.
+: decrease speed.
CL5-OFF Use it to adjust the timing at which the 200 1 step: 0. 1 mm
intermediate clutch turns off. Range 200 to 650
−: advances de-activation of
registration roller 1.
+: delays de-activation of
CL5-ON Use it to adjust the timing at which the 710 1 step: 0.1 mm
intermediate clutch turns on. Range: 650 to 800
−: decreases butting against
+: increases butting against
ADJ-C1 Use it to adjust the horizontal registration 100 1 step: 0.1 mm
if the image on paper from the cassette Range: 50 to 150
holder 1 is displaced in main scanning −: shifts to front of machine.
direction. (machine w/o duplex mechanism) +: shifts to rear of machine.
ADJ-C2 Use it to adjust the horizontal registration 100
if the image on paper from the cassette
holder 2 is displaced in main scanning
direction.
direction.
direction.
ADJ-MF Use it to adjust the horizontal registration 100 1 step: 0.1 mm
if the image on paper from the multifeeder Range: 70 to 130
is displaced in main scanning direction. −: shifts to front of machine.
+: shifts to rear of machine.
T11-704-15
Entering Data

<FEED-ADJ> <2/2> <READY>
ADJ-R-C2 xxxxx ← (yyyyy){aaaaa ~ bbbbb}
ADJ-R-C3 xxxxx ← (yyyyy){aaaaa ~ bbbbb}
AGJ-R-C4 xxxxx ← (yyyyy){aaaaa ~ bbbbb}
ADJ-R-MF xxxxx ← (yyyyy){aaaaa ~ bbbbb}
ADJ-VSYC xxxxx ← (yyyyy){aaaaa ~ bbbbb}
MF-VSYC xxxxx ← (yyyyy){aaaaa ~ bbbbb}
+/- OK
F11-704-17
Using the Screen

screen.
previous page.
Items
Initial
setting
ADJ-R-C2 Use it to adjust the horizontal registration 100 (for machine w/duplex
if the image on paper from the duplex unit mechanism)
is displaced in main scanning direction. 1 step: 0.1 mm
(for 1st side, pickup from cassette holder 2) Range: 50 to 150
ADJ-R-C3 Use it to adjust the horizontal registration 100 −: shifts to front of machine.
if the image on paper from the duplex unit +: shifts to rear of machine.
is displaced in main scanning direction.
(for 1st side, pickup from cassette holder 3)
ADJ-R-C4 Use it to adjust the horizontal registration 100
if the image on paper from the duplex unit
(for 1st side, pickup from cassette holder 4)
ADJ-R-MF Use it to adjust the horizontal registration 100
if the image on paper from the duplex unit
(for 1st side, pickup from multifeeder)
ADJ-VSYC Use it to adjust the image write start 100 1 step: 0.1 mm
position in sub scanning direction. Range: 50 to 150
(pickup from cassette; for duplex unit) −: shifts toward leading edge.
+: shifts away from leading
edge.
MF-VSYC Use it to adjust the image write start 100 Same as above.
position in sub scanning direction.
(for manual feed)
T11-704-16
Entering Data
<CST-ADJ>
Use it to adjust sizes for the multifeeder.

<CST-ADJ> <1/1> <READY>
MF-A6R xxxxx ← (yyyyy) {aaaaa ~ bbbbb}
MF-A3 xxxxx ← (yyyyy) {aaaaa ~ bbbbb}
MF-A4 xxxxx ← (yyyyy) {aaaaa ~ bbbbb}
+/- OK
F11-704-18
Using the Screen

screen.
• The Page Switch key is disabled.
Items
Initial
setting
MF-A6R Use it to adjust the paper width basic 866 If you have replaced the DC
setting for A6R for the multifeeder. controller PCB, enter the
MF-A3 Use it to adjust the paper width basic 221 setting recorded on the ser-
setting for A3 for the multifeeder. vice label. If you have re-
MF-A4 Use it to adjust the paper width basic 472 placed the paper width sensor
setting for A4 for the multifeeder. or are entering a new setting,
execute FUNCTION>CST.
T11-704-17
Entering Data
<FIXING>
Use it to make fixing assembly-related adjustments.

<FIXING> <1/1> <READY>
FIX-P xxxxx ← (yyyyy){aaaaa ~ bbbbb}
FIX-S1 xxxxx ← (yyyyy){aaaaa ~ bbbbb}
+/- OK
F11-704-19
screen.
Items
Initial
setting
FIX-P Use it to adjust the fixing roller temperature 170 Unit: °C
for plain paper. Range: 150 to 190
FIX-S1 Use it to adjust the fixing roller temperature 165
for special paper 1 (i.e., tracing paper).
for special paper 2 (i.e., tracing film,
transparency).
for special paper 3 (i.e., thick paper).
T11-704-18
Entering Data
<EXP-LED>
Use it to make LED-related adjustments.

<EXP-LED> <1/1> <READY>
LED-STRB xxxxx ← (yyyyy){aaaaa ~ bbbbb}
LED-OFF1 xxxxx ← (yyyyy){aaaaa ~ bbbbb}
LED-OFF2 xxxxx ← (yyyyy){aaaaa ~ bbbbb}
+/- OK
F11-704-20
Using the Screen

screen.
Items
Initial
setting
LED-STRB Use it to adjust the length of activation of 25 1 step: 1 µsec
the LED head. Range: 0 to 48
−: makes images lighter.
LED-OFF1 Use it to adjust the timing at which the 0 1 step: 0.1 mm
LED turns off in relation to the trailing Range: −200 to 50
edge of paper whose width is longer than −: increases trailing edge
297 mm. margin.
+: decreases trailing edge
margin.
LED-OFF2 Use it to adjust the timing at which the 0 1 step: 0.1 mm
LED turns off in relation to the trailing Range: −200 to 50
edge of paper whose width is 297 mm or −: increases trailing edge
shorter. margin.
+: decreases trailing edge
margin.
T11-704-19
Entering Data
7.5 FUNCTION (operation check mode)
INSTALL
PANEL
PART-CHK
CLEAR
MISC-R
CST
F11-705-01 FUNCTION (Level 2 screen)
Using the Screen

screen.
• For each item, the state of the machine on the Level 3 Item screen is indicated as “SER-
VICE” while automatic adjustments are being made or an operation check is being made.
FUNCTIONS List
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Mode description
FUNCTION INSTALL TONER-S
supplies toner at time of installation.
CST MF-A6Rregisters the paper width basic setting for the multifeeder.
(A6R)
MF-A3 registers the paper width basic setting for the multifeeder.
(A3)
MF-A4 registers the paper width basic setting for the multifeeder.
(A4)
PANEL LCD-CHK checks the LCD for missing dots.
LED-CHK checks the activation of LEDs on the control panel.
KEY-CHK checks presses on keys on the control panel.
TOUCHCHK adjusts coordinates on the analog touch panel.
PART-CHK CL selects a clutch to operate at CL-ON.
CL-ON checks the operation of a clutch.
FAN selects a fan to operate at FAN-ON.
FAN-ON checks the operation of a fan.
MTR selects a motor to operate at MTR-ON.
MTR-ON checks the operation of the motor.
SL selects a solenoid to operate at SL-ON.
SL-ON checks the operation of a solenoid.
SHV selects a high-voltage output to operate at SHV-ON.
SHV-ON checks the operation of a high-voltage output.
LAMP selects a lamp to operate at LAMP-ON.
LAMP-ON checks the activation of a lamp.
CLEAR ERR clears an E000-series error.
MMI-COPY clears the backup RAM used for copy operations.
SERVICE clears the backup RAM in service mode.
JAM-HIST clears the jam history.
ERR-HIST clears the error history.
MISC-R SCANMTR starts a check on the scanner motor.
IP-CHK executes self diagnosis on the scanner control PCB.
ADJ-OFST executes image read start position automatic adjustment.
<INSTALL>
Use it to execute automatic adjustment at time of installation.

<INSTALL> <1/1> <READY>
TONER-S
+/- OK
F11-705-02
Using the Screen

• The screens are not switched over while a service operation is under way.
Items
TONER-S Use it to supply the developing assembly with
toner at time of installation.
Note: The +/− key remains disabled.
T11-705-01
<CST>
Use it to register paper widths for the multifeeder.

<CST> <1/1> <READY>
MF-A6R xxxxx
MF-A3 xxxxx
MF-A4 xxxxx
+/- OK
F11-705-03
Using the Screen

screen.
Items
MF-A6R Use it to register a paper width basic setting for
MF-A3 the multifeeder.
MF-A4 For fine-adjustment thereafter, use ADJUST>
CST-ADJ>MFA6R through MF-A4.
1) Place A6R paper in the multifeeder, and set the
side guide to the A6R width.
2) Select ‘MF-A6R’ to highlight; then, press the
OK key. The new setting will be registered for
MF-A6R.
3) Repeat the same steps to register settings for
other sizes.
T11-705-02
<PANEL>
Use it to check the control panel.

<PANEL> <1/1> <READY>
LCD-CHK
LCD-CHK
KEY-CHK xxxxxxxx
TOUCHCHK
+/- OK
F11-705-04
Using the Screen

screen.
Items
LCD-CHK Use it to check the LCD for missing dots:
• Select an item to highlight, and press the OK
key. The entire face of the LCD will repeat
turning on white and then green for several
seconds.
LED-CHK Use it to start a check on the LEDs on the control
panel:
• Select an item to highlight, and press the OK
key. The LEDs will turn on in sequence.
KEY-CHK Use it to start a check on the key inputs. The
number/name of each input key will be indicated.
To stop the check mode, select <KEY-CHK> once
again.
TOUCHCHK Use it to adjust coordinates on the analog touch
panel:
Try to match the point of a press on the panel
and the corresponding coordinates on the LCD.
(Use this if you have replaced the LCD assembly.)
1) Select the item to highlight, and press the OK
key.
2) Press the nine +’s indicated at the top left of
the LCD in sequence.
T11-705-03
Indication Indication Indication

Key pressed Key pressed Key pressed
on screen on screen on screen
RESET Reset 0 to 9 0 to 9 START Start
? Guide ID ID STOP Stop
M User Mode CLEAR Clear STAND BY Power Save
INTERRUPT Interrupt
Note: The +/− key remain disabled.
T11-705-04
<PART-CHK>
Use it to check each of the electric parts.

<PART-CHK> <1/2> <READY>
CL xxxxx ← (yyyyy){aaaaa ~ bbbbb}
CL-ON
FAN xxxxx ← (yyyyy){aaaaa ~ bbbbb}
FAN-ON
MRT xxxxx ← (yyyyy){aaaaa ~ bbbbb}
MRT-ON
SL xxxxx ← (yyyyy){aaaaa ~ bbbbb}
SL-ON
+/- OK
F11-705-05
Using the Screen

screen.
previous key.
• A press on a Level 3 item highlights it, turning it ready for input/operation.
Items
CL Use it to select a clutch to operate for a check.
• Enter the code of the clutch using the keypad,
and press the OK key.
CL-ON Use it to check the operation of the clutch.
• Select the item, and press the OK key.
FAN Select a fan to operate for a check.
• Enter the code of the fan using the keypad,
FAN-ON Use it to check the operation of a fan.
MTR Use it to select a motor to operate for a check.
• Enter the code of the motor using the keypad,
MTR-ON Use it to check the operation of the motor.
SL Use it to select a solenoid to operate for a check.
• Enter the code of the solenoid using the keypad,
SL-ON Use it to check the operation of a solenoid.
To stop the ongoing operation in the middle, press the Stop key or the Reset key.
T11-705-05

<PART-CHK> <2/2> <READY>
SHV xxxxx ← (yyyyy) {aaaaa ~ bbbbb}
SHV-ON
LAMP xxxxx ← (yyyyy) {aaaaa ~ bbbbb}
LAMP-ON
+/- OK
F11-705-06
Using the Screen

screen.
previous page.
• The screens are not switched over while a service operation is taking place.
• A press on a Level 3 item highlights it, turning it ready for an input/operation.
Items
SHV Use it to select a high-voltage output to operate
for a check.
• Enter the code of the high-voltage using the
keypad, and press the OK key.
SHV-ON Use it to check the operation of a high-voltage
output.
LAMP Use it to select a lamp to operate for a check.
• Enter the code of a lamp using the keypad, and
press the OK key.
LAMP-ON Use it to check the operation of a lamp.
To stop the ongoing operation in the middle, press the Stop key or the Reset key.
T11-705-06
Codes of the Parts to Check
Clutches
Code Part Model Remarks
1 cassette pickup clutch 1 iR70W only OFF → 1 sec ON → 10 sec OFF
2 cassette pickup clutch 2 all models → 1 sec ON → 10 sec OFF
3 cassette pickup clutch 3 all models → 1 sec ON → OFF
4 cassette pickup clutch 4 all models
5 intermediate clutch all models
6 manual feed clutch all models
T11-705-07
Fans
1 delivery feed assembly cooling fan all models output reversal → 10 sec →
2 exhaust fan all models output reversal
3 separation blower all models OFF → 10 sec ON → OFF
4 scanner cooling fan all models ON → 10 sec OFF → ON
5 process unit cooling blower all models ON → 10 sec OFF → ON
T11-705-08
Motors
1 paper feed motor all models OFF → 10 sec ON → OFF
2 main motor all models
3 developing assembly push-on motor all models ON → HP detection → stop
4 toner supply motor all models OFF → 10 sec ON → OFF
5 wire cleaner motor all models Executes cleaning once.
6 duplex motor iR75W only OFF → 10 sec CW rotation →
5 sec
OFF → 10 sec CCW rotation →
OFF
T11-705-09
Solenoids
1 pickup roller DOWN solenoid iR70W only OFF → 1 sec ON → 10 sec OFF
(cassette holder 1) → 1 sec ON → 10 sec OFF →
2 pickup roller DOWN solenoid all models 1 sec ON → OFF
(cassette holder 2)
3 pickup roller DOWN solenoid all models
(cassette holder 3)
4 pickup roller DOWN solenoid all models
(cassette holder 4)
5 reversing roller UP solenoid all models
(cassette holder 1)
(cassette holder 2)
(cassette holder 3)
(cassette holder 4)
9 manual feed pickup roller DOWN all models
solenoid 1
10 delivery switching solenoid all models
(side tray)
11 delivery switching solenoid all models
(duplex unit)
12 counter roller control iR75W only
13 manual feed pickup roller DOWN all models
solenoid 2
T11-705-10
High-Voltage Outputs
1 primary charging assembly all models OFF → 10 sec ON → OFF
2 transfer charging assembly all models
3 separation charging assembly all models
4 developing bias (positive) all models
5 developing bias (negative) all models
T11-705-11
Lamps
1 scanning lamp all models OFF → 10 sec ON → OFF
2 transfer auxiliary lamp all models
3 pre-exposure lamp all models
4 fixing assembly heater 1 all models OFF → 5 sec ON → OFF
5 fixing heater 2 Jpn model only
T11-705-12
<CLEAR>
Use it to clear the RAM, jam history, or error code.

<CLEAR> <1/1> <READY>
ERR
MMI-COPY
SERVICE
JAM-HIST
ERR-HIST
+/- OK
F11-705-07
Using the Screen

• The screens are not switched over while a service operation is taking place.
Items
ERR Use it to clear an error. Select the item to highlight,
(selection of a backup error) and press the OK key.
1) Select the item to highlight, and press the OK
key.
2) Turn off and then on the main power supply.
MMI-COPY Use it to clear the backup data for the copier
control panel.
SERVICE Use it to clear the backup data for service mode.
JAM-HIST Use it to clear the jam history.
ERR-HIST Use it to clear the error code.
T11-705-13
<MISC-R>

<MISC-R> <1/1> <READY>
SCANMTR
IP-CHK xx
ADJ-OFST
+/- OK
F11-705-08
Using the screen

screen.
• The screens are not switched cover white a service operation is taking place.
• A press on a Level 3 item highlights it, turning it ready for operation.
Items
SCANMTR Use it to start a check on the scanner motor. The machine executes a scan,
and stops the scanner at its
home position.
IP-CHK Use it to execute self diagnosis on the scanner At the end, the machine indi-
control PCB. cates the result as OK or NG.
ADJ-OFST Use it to execute image read start position At the end of the automatic
automatic adjustment. adjustment, the machine
Keep the copyboard cover or the ADF fully open, updates the data in the
and do not place any original on the copyboard following: ADJUST>
glass. ADJ-XY>SDJ-X, ADJ-Y.
T11-705-14
7.6 OPTION Settings Mode
BODY
USER
INT-FACE
F11-706-01
Using the Screen

screen.
OPTION Items
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Mode outline
OPTION BODY WIRE-CLN sets settings for wire cleaning.
USER COPY-LIM changes the upper limit for the number of copies to
make.
INT-FACE B-CLR indicates the disconnection for the copy data controller.
<BODY>
Use it to make settings related to the machine.

<BODY> <1/1> <READY>
WIRE-CLN xxxxx ← (yyyyy){aaaaa ~ bbbbb}
+/- OK
F11-706-02
Using the screen

screen.
Items
Initial
setting
WIRE-CLN Use it to make settings for wire cleaning. 0 0: execute if the fixing
The machine may execute wire cleaning assembly temperature is
when the power is turned on or when a job 40°C or less at power-on.
ends successfully (not when it stops 1: execute for setting ‘0’
because of a jam, absence of paper, or in above and, in addition, for
response to an interrupt). The machine every 100 copies.
will not end a job in the middle even if the 2: execute for setting ‘0’
limit is reached. above and, in addition, for
every 200 copies.
3: execute for setting ‘0’
above and, in addition,
every 300 copies.
T11-706-01
Entering Data
<USER>
Use it to make settings related to user mode.

<USER> <1/1> <READY>
COPY-LIM xxxxx ← (yyyyy) {aaaaa ~ bbbbb}
+/- OK
F11-706-03
Using the Screen

• A press on a Level 1 item at the top the screen brings up its Level 1/Level 2 Item screen.
Items
Initial
setting
COPY-LIM changes the upper limit for the number of 999 Range: 0 to 999
copies to make.
T11-706-02
Entering Data
<INT-FACE>
Use it to set conditions when an external controller is connected.

<INT-FACE> <1/1> <READY>
B-CLR xxxxx ← (yyyyy) {aaaaa ~ bbbbb}
+/- OK
F11-706-04
Using the Screen

Items
Initial
setting
B-CLR Use it when disconnecting the copy data 0 0: not connected
controller. 1: connected
The machine recognizes connection (‘1’)
when the copy data controller is installed
and it is identified in terms of software.
When disconnecting the copy data con-
troller, set it to ‘not set’ (‘0’) before
physically disconnecting the copy data
controller from the machine.
T11-706-03
Entering Data
7.7 PG Test Print
PG
F11-707-01 TEST (Level 2 Item screen)
Using the Screen

screen.
Level 2 Level 3 Mode description

PG TYPE generates a test print.
<PG>

<PG> <1/1> <READY>
TYPE xxxxx ← (yyyyy) {aaaaa ~ bbbbb}
+/- OK
F11-707-02
Using the screen

screen.
Items
TYPE Use it to select a type (1 through 16) of test print. To generate, press the Start
The copy count and the source of paper are as key.
selected on the Basic screen.
In auto section (i.e., no source is selected), the
topmost source will be selected.
‘0’ is for normal copying mode (made from the
CCD)
• When the PG screen is closed, ‘0’ is stored,
causing the machine to assume normal copying
mode.
T11-707-01
Types (test patterns)

No. Pattern No. Pattern
1 squares and 5-mm diameter dots 8 blank
2 vertical black/white bands 9 grid
3 white band, vertical lines, horizontal 10 17-gradation 1
lines, solid black band 11 17-gradation 2
4 blank 12 blank
5 grid and diagonal lines 13 halftone 2
6 halftone 1 14 solid black
7 horizontal lines, vertical lines, grid, 15 vertical straight lines
dots 16 horizontal straight lines
T11-707-02
7.8 COUNTER Mode

TOTAL
SCANNER
PICK-UP
FEEDER
JAM
F11-708-01 COUNTER (Level 2 Item screen)
Using the Screen

screen.
• Here, the notations “large-size” and “small-size” are used as follows:
Large-size: A2R, B3R (non-default sizes of 451 mm or longer)
Small size: A3, A3R, A4, A4R, A5, A5R, A6R, B4, B4R, B5, B5R, postcard, double post-
card (non-default paper sizes up to 450 mm)
• Clearing the Counter Reading

1) Press the item to highlight.
2) Press the Clear key on the control panel.
3) See that the counter reading has been cleared and returned to ‘00000000’.
iR70W/iR75W Cassette (R indicates horizontal placement of paper)

S cassette: A3R, A4, A4R, A5, A5R, B4R, B5, B5R
L cassette: A2R, A3, A3R, A4, B3R, B4
Manual feed: A2R, A3, A3R, A4, A4R, A5, A5R, A6R, B3R, B4, B4R, B5, B5R, post-
card, double postcard
Duplex unit: A3R, A4, A4R, A5, B4R, B5, B5R
Counter Items
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Mode outline
COUNTER TOTAL COPY indicates the copy total counter.
L-COPY indicates the large size pickup total counter.
S-COPY indicates the small size pickup total counter.
SCANNER SC-COPY indicates the scanner total scan counter.
PICKUP C1 indicates the pickup total counter for cassette holder 1.
C2 indicates the pickup total counter for cassette holder 2.
L-C3 indicates the pickup total counter for cassette holder 3.
(large-size)
S-C3 indicates the pickup total counter for cassette holder 3.
(small-size)
L-C4 indicates the pickup total counter for cassette holder 4.
(large-size)
S-C4 indicates the pickup total counter for cassette holder 4.
(small-size)
MF indicates the pickup total counter for the multifeeder.
2-SIDE indicates the pickup total counter for the duplex unit.
(2nd side)
FEEDER FEED indicates the pickup total counter for the feeder.
L-FEED indicates the pickup total counter for the feeder.
(large-size original)
S-FEED indicates the pickup total counter for the feeder.
(small-size original)
JAM TOTAL indicates the total jam counter for the copier.
FEEDER indicates the total jam counter for the feeder.
SORTER indicates the total jam counter for the sorter.
Note: The data is obtained and indicated when a Level 3 item screen is opened.
The display will remain unchanged while the screen is open. (To indicate the updated
data, close the screen and then open the Level 3 Item screen once again.)
<TOTAL>

<TOTAL> <1/1> <READY>
COPY xxxxxxxx
L-COPY xxxxxxxx
S-COPY xxxxxxxx
F11-708-02
Using the screen

screen.
Incrementing the Count

The count is incremented in relation to the number of pickups made (i.e.,
Memo for both large and small papers, the count is incremented by ‘1’ for each
pickup that takes place).
<SCANNER>

<SCANNER> <1/1> <READY>
SC-COPY xxxxxxxx
F11-708-03
Using the Screen

screen.
<PICKUP>

<PICK-UP> <1/1> <READY>
C1 xxxxxxxx MF xxxxxxxx
C2 xxxxxxxx 2-SIDE xxxxxxxx
C3 xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx
L-C3 xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx
S-C3 xxxxxxxx
C4 xxxxxxxx
L-C4 xxxxxxxx
S-C4 xxxxxxxx
F11-708-04
Using the Screen

screen.
Keeping Track of the Count

iR70W iR75W
cassette holder 1 .... C1 duplex unit .... 2-SIDE
cassette holder 2 .... C2 cassette holder 2 .... C2
cassette holder 3 .... C3, L-C3, S-C3 cassette holder 3 .... C3, L-C3, S-C3
cassette holder 4 .... C4, L-C4, S-C4 cassette holder 4 .... C4, L-C4, S-C4
<FEEDER>

<FEEDER> <1/1> <READY>
FEED xxxxxxxx
L-FEED xxxxxxxx
S-FEED xxxxxxxx
F11-708-05
Using the Screen

screen.
<JAM>

<JAM> <1/1> <READY>
TOTAL xxxxxxxx
FEEDER xxxxxxxx
SORTER xxxxxxxx
F11-708-06
Using the Screen

screen.
7.9 FEEDER
FEEDER Items
Level 1 Level 2 Mode outline
DISPLAY FEEDSIZE indicates the size of the original detected by the feeder.
ADJUST DOC-ST adjusts the original stop position in ADF mode.

DOC-ST-R adjusts the original stop position in RADF mode.
For any FEEDER item, the following are not used: I/O, FUNCTION, OP-
TION, TEST, COUNTER.
<DISPLAY>

<1/1> <READY>
FEEDSIZE xxxx
F11-709-01
Using the Screen

• A press on a Level 1 item (ADJUST) at the top of the screen brings up the ADJUST
screen.
• A press on the Reset screen brings up the initial screen.
Items
FEEDSIZE Indicates the size of the original detected by the Default sizes.
feeder.
T11-709-01
<ADJUST>

<1/1> <READY>
DOC-ST xxxxx ← (yyyyy) {aaaaa ~ bbbbb}
DOC-ST-R xxxxx ← (yyyyy) {aaaaa ~ bbbbb}
+/- OK
F11-709-02
Using the Screen

• A press on a Level 1 item (DISPLAY) at the top of the screen brings up the DISPLAY
screen.
Items
Initial
setting
DOC-ST Use it to adjust the original stop position 0 Range: −63 to 63
in ADF mode. −: shifts to read start position.
+: shifts to read end position.
DOC-ST-R Use it to adjust the original stop position 0 Range: −63 to 63
in RADF mode. −: shifts to read start position.
+: shifts to read end position.
F11-709-02
• When originals are set in the feeder and the Start key is pressed while this item is se-
lected, the machine will pick up an original and stop it at the original read position.
CHAPTER 12
SELF DIAGNOSIS
1 Troubleshooting
1. Before starting to troubleshoot the machine, be sure to check the history of errors in ser-
vice mode (COPIER>DISPLAY>ERR).
2. If E000, E001, E002, E003, or E004 is indicated, be sure to clear the error by making
the following selections in service mode: FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR.
3. The connectors on the machine’s circuits do not allow connection of the probes of a
meter, requiring a probe extension (FY9-3038/3039).
Code Detail Cause Remarks

Faulty Increase in Fixing Tempera- • The reading of the thermistor
E000 ture (TH1) fails to reach 70°C 150 sec
• faulty thermistor (TH1) after the power is turned on.
• faulty fixing heater
• faulty thermals switch
• faulty AC driver PCB
• faulty fixing assembly sensor
• faulty connector connection
• faulty harness
• faulty DC controller PCB
• faulty DC driver PCB
• faulty phase control PCB
(230V model only)
Abnormal Increase in Fixing Tem- • The reading of the thermistor
E001 perature (TH1, TH2) exceeds 200°C.
• faulty thermistor
• faulty AC driver PCB
• faulty harness
• faulty driver PCB
(230V model only)
Faulty Rise in Fixing Temperature • The output of the thermistor
E002 • faulty thermistor (TH1)

• faulty thermal switch
reaches 70°C but fails to exceed
150°C within 120 sec.
• faulty connector connection • The output of the thermistor
• faulty connector connection reaches 150°C but fails to exceed
• faulty harness 170°C within 130 sec.

Abnormal Drop in Fixing Tempera- • After wait-up, the reading of the
E003 ture thermistor (TH1, TH2) drops to
• faulty thermistor 70°C or lower.
• faulty thermal switch
• faulty harness
Short Circuit in the Triac • When the front cover is open or
E004 • faulty fixing heater the fixing lamp is off, the triac
• faulty AC driver PCB short circuit detection signal lasts
• faulty connector connection for 2.5 sec or more.
• faulty harness
(230V model only)
Main Motor Error • The main motor fails to start ro-
E010 • faulty connector connection tating 1 sec after it has been
• faulty harness turned on.
• faulty main motor • The main motor fails to stop ro-
• faulty DC controller PCB tating 1 sec after it has been
• faulty DC relay PCB turned off.
• faulty low-voltage power supply
Feed Motor Error • The feed motor fails to start rotat-
E014 • faulty connector connection ing 1 sec after it has been turned
• faulty harness on.
• faulty feed motor • The feed motor fails to stop
• faulty low-voltage power supply within 1 sec after it has been
• faulty DC controller PCB turned off.
Developing Assembly Push-On • When the developing assembly
E021 Error push-on motor is rotating (when
• faulty mounting of developing the power is turned on, the front
assembly cover is closed), its home position
• faulty sensor is not detected within 30 sec.
• faulty harness
• faulty developing assembly push-
on motor

Copy Counter Error • Counting does not occur for 50
E030 • faulty copy counter msec or more when counting
• faulty connector connection must take place.
• faulty harness • Counting occurs for 50 msec or
• faulty DC controller PCB more when counting must not
take place.
Lifter Motor Error • When liftup must occur (when
E041 • faulty cassette paper level sensor the cassette is closed, the power is
• faulty connector connection turned on in non-lift up state), the
• faulty harness level sensor does not turn on
• faulty DC carrier PCB within a specific period of time
• faulty cassette liftup motor (for S cassette, 16.53 sec; for L
• faulty DC controller PCB cassette, 14.28 sec).
Wire Cleaning Error • When wire cleaning is executed,
E060 • faulty wire cleaning motor the cleaning operation (forward
• faulty connector connection movement) does not end within
• faulty harness 50 sec.
• faulty DC carrier PCB
Primary Charging Assembly Output • The output signal is detected for
E067 Error 1 sec or more when it should not
• faulty connector connection be present.
• faulty high-voltage cable
• faulty harness
Separation Charging Assembly Out- • The output signal is detected for
E068 put Error 1 sec or more when it should not
• faulty harness
Transfer Charging Assembly Output • The output signal is detected for
E069 Error 1 sec or more when it should not
• faulty harness
E199 CPLD Configuration Error

• faulty CPLD
• The power is turned on.
• faulty mounting of CPLD

Scanner Motor Error • Power is turned on.
E201 • faulty scanner home position • The HP sensor is affected within
sensor a specific number of pulses while
• faulty scanner motor the scanner returns after reading
• faulty connector connection operation.
• faulty harness • The HP sensor is not affected at
• faulty scanner controller PCB the end of return of the scanner
after reading operation.
• The reading of the position
counter is outside the range (col-
lision).
• The motor operates (with a blown
motor fuse).
Scanning Lamp Heater Error • The change in temperature 165
E222 • faulty scanning lamp heater sec after the power has been
• faulty thermistor turned on is less than 15°C.
• faulty connector connection • The temperature is 40°C or less
• faulty harness 10 min after the power has been
• faulty lamp relay PCB 1 turned on.
• faulty lamp relay PCB 2
• faulty carrier relay PCB
• faulty inverter relay PCB
• faulty scanner control PCB
Inadequate Scanning Lamp Intensity • The power is turned on.
E225 • faulty scanning lamp
• connector connection
• faulty harness
• faulty sensor unit
• faulty scanner controller PCB

Scanner Cooling Fan Error/Scan- • At power-on
E226 ning Lam Error • At end of 1 job (switch-over to
• faulty scanner cooling fan low speed rotation)
• faulty scanning lamp heater
• faulty thermistor
• faulty harness
• faulty carrier relay PCB
• faulty inverter power supply
• faulty scanner controller PCB
Scanner Communication Error • The communication has been dis-
E248 • faulty connector connection rupted.
• faulty harness • The power is turned on.
• fault scanner controller PCB
Improper Insertion of Memory • The power is turned on.
E305 • faulty expansion memory
• wrong socket
• faulty image processing PCB
DADF Communication Error • The communication has been dis-
E400 • faulty connector connection rupted.
• faulty harness
• faulty DADF
DADF Feed Motor Error • The motor fails to operate 100
E403 • faulty feed motor msec after the DADF feed motor
• faulty connector connection (M2) has been turned on.
• faulty harness
• faulty sensor
• faulty DADF
DADF Pickup Motor Error • The motor fails to operate 100
E404 • faulty pickup motor msec after the DADF pickup mo-
• faulty connector connection tor (M3) has been turned on.
• faulty harness
• faulty sensor
• faulty DADF

DADF Delivery Motor Error • The DADF delivery motor (M3)
E405 • faulty delivery motor fails to operate 136 msec after it
• faulty connector connection has been turned on.
• faulty harness • The delivery motor clock senor
• faulty sensor (PI9) is faulty.
• faulty DADF
DADF Sensor Error • The output of the sensor is 5V or
E411 • faulty registration paper sensor higher in the absence of paper.
(PI2)
• faulty feed sensor (PI4)
• faulty reversal sensor (PI6)
• faulty original width sensor 1
(PI7)
• faulty original width sensor 2
(PI8)
Sorter Alignment Motor (M3) Error • When the alignment rod is re-
E530 • faulty alignment motor turned to its home position, the
• faulty connector connection home position sensor (PI6) re-
• faulty harness mains off after 400 pulses have
• faulty sensor been generated.
• faulty sorter • When the alignment rod is moved
away from its home position, the
home position sensor (PI6) re-
mains on after 400 pulses have
been generated.
Sorter Staple Slide Motor (M1) • After the motor has been turned
E531 Error on, the move does not end after a
• faulty staple slide motor specific number of pulses have
• faulty connector connection been generated (from an unspe-
• faulty harness cific point to the home position,
• faulty sensor 1000 pulses; from the home posi-
• faulty sorter tion to the stapling position, 200
pulses; from the stapling position
to the home position, 240 pulses).
• After the motor has been turned
on, when the stapler reaches its
home position in less than 160
pulses and yet cleaning does not
end 1 sec after the motor has been
turned on; in addition, the stapler
fails to return to its home position
when the motor is rotated in re-
verse.

Sorter Shift Motor (M4) Error • After the motor has been turned
E540 • faulty shift motor on, the on-edge/off-edge state of
• faulty connector connection the lead cam sensor cannot be de-
• faulty harness tected.
• faulty sensor • While the motor is operating, the
• faulty sensor lead cam signal reverses itself in
fewer than 200 pulses.
• The bin shift fails to end a spe-
cific period of time after the mo-
tor has been turned on (1 sec with
motor output fixed to 100%; 2 sec
with motor output lower than
10%; 1.5 times the target period
for smooth shift).
• While the motor is operating, the
shift safety switch turns on (in
response, an error is issued after
shifting the bin unit by a single
bin).
Sorter Communication Error • The time-out error in IPC commu-
E713 • faulty connector connection nication is not reset for 5 sec.
• faulty harness
• faulty sorter
Copy Data Controller Communica- • The communication has been dis-
E717 tion Error rupted.
• faulty harness
• faulty copy data controller
Power Switch OFF Signal Open • An open circuit remains for 100
E800 Circuit msec or more.
• faulty main power switch
• faulty harness
DC Power Supply Fan Error • The rotation fails for 5 sec or
E804 • faulty fan more.
• faulty harness

0001 Separation Blower Error • The fan fails to start rotating for 5
E805 • faulty fan sec or more after it has been
• faulty connector connection turned on.
• faulty harness • The fan fails to stop rotating for 5
• faulty DC controlled PCB sec or more after it has been
turned off.
0002 Exhaust Fan Error • The fan fails to start rotating for 5
• faulty connector sec or more after it has been
• faulty harness turned on.
• faulty DC driver PCB • The fan fails to stop rotating for 5
• faulty DC controller PCB sec or more after it has been
turned off.
0003 Delivery/Feeding Assembly Fan • The fan fails to start rotating for 5
Error sec or more after it has been
• faulty connector connection turned on.
• faulty harness • The fan fails to stop rotating for 5
• faulty DC driver PCB sec or more after it has been
• faulty DC controller PCB tuned off.
Developing Assembly Connection • At the time push-on operation
E815 Error starts for the developing assem-
• developing assembly absent bly. (front cover closed, power
• faulty connector connection turned on).
• faulty harness of connector (J65)
• faulty harness
• faulty developing assembly
1) E000 (The fixing temperature fails to rise.)

1 Clear the error in service mode. NO Make the connection once
gain.
Relay connector 2 Is the connector J62A/J62B NO Replace the thermistor.
(J62A, J62B; of connected properly?
thermistor)
Thermistor 3 Let the fixing assembly cool; NO Replace the thermistor.
(open circuit) then, disconnect J62A or J62B,
and measure the resistance of
the thermistor. Is it as follows?
The resistance changes
according to a rise/fall in
temperature; use the following
readings for reference only.
(room temperature at 25°C)
• J62A (white line; TH1)
about 1054 to 1603K Ω
• J62B (white line; TH2)
about 1054 to 1603K Ω
Thermistor (wrong 4 Disassemble the fixing NO Mount the thermistor
connection) assembly, and check the properly.
mounting of the thermistor.
Is the thermistor properly in
contract with the upper fixing
roller?
Heater (open circuit) 5 Disconnect the connector J62, NO Replace the heater.
and check the heater side for
electrical continuity:
• between J62-1/3, several Ω
• between J62-1/4, several Ω
Thermal switch 6 Is there electrical continuity in NO Replace the thermal
relation to the thermal switch? switch, or mount it
Is its mounting position correct? correctly.
AC driver PCB 7 Is the rated voltage supplied by NO Replace the AC driver
the AC driver PCB? PCB.
• between J104-2/J102-1
about 230 VAC
• between J104-1/J102-1
(no voltage applicable for
voltage)
T12-100-01

Front door switch 8 Are the connectors connected NO Connect the connectors
correctly? correctly.
Is there electrical continuity Mount the front door
between the following? properly. Check to make
DS1-3/DS1-4, DS1-1/DS1-2 sure that the front door
DS1-5/DS1-6 switch is mounted properly.
Fixing assembly 9 Is the connection of the NO Connect the connector
sensor connector J140 proper? properly.
Is the fixing assembly mounted NO Mount the fixing assembly
properly? properly.
Triac (TR1) 10 Is there a short circuit between YES Replace the AC driver PCB;
triac J104-3 and J104-2? at this time, check to make
sure that the harness is not
trapped around the AC
driver PCB. In addition,
check to make sure the
thermistor (TS1) is normal.
Door switch, Relay 11 Try replacing the door switch YES Replace the door switch
(RY1) and the relay (RY1). Is the or the relay as needed.
problem corrected?
DC controller PCB 12 Try replacing the PCBs. Is the YES Replace the DC controller
problem corrected? PCB.
DC driver PCB YES Replace the DC driver PCB.
Phase control PCB YES Replace the phase control
PCB.
T12-100-02
2) E001 (The fixing temperature has increased abnormally.)

1 Clear the error in service mode.
Thermistor 2 Let the fixing assembly cool; YES Replace the thermistor.
(short circuit) then, disconnect J62A/J62B,
the thermistor. Is the reading as
follows?
• J62A (white harness; TH1):
about 0 Ω
• J62B (white harness; TH2):
about 0 Ω
Triac 3 Is there a short circuit between YES Replace the AC driver PCB;
(TR1) J104-3 and J-14-2? at this time, check to make
sure that the harness is not
trapped around the AC drive
PCB.
In addition, check to make
sure that the thermal switch
(TS1) is normal.
DC controller PCB 4 Try replacing the PCB. Is the YES Replace the DC controller
problem corrected? PCB.
DC driver PCB YES Replace the DC driver PCB.
Phase control PCB YES Replace the phase control
PCB.
T12-100-03
3) E002 (The fixing temperature fails to reach a specific level.)

E003 (The fixing temperature shows an abnormal drop.)

2 Which of the following is true YES See the descriptions of the
when the machine has warmed respective item.
up?
• The fixing heater fails to
turn on.
• E000 is indicated.
Thermistor 3 Let the fixing assembly cool; YES Replace the thermistor.
(short circuit) then, disconnect J62A/J62B,
the thermistor. Is the reading
as follows?
• J62A (white harness; TH1):
about 0 Ω
• J62B (black harness; TH2):
about 0 Ω
Wiring 4 Is the wiring from the con- NO Correct the wiring.
nector J204 on the DC con-
troller PCB to the thermistor
proper?
Thermal switch 5 Try replacing the thermal YES End.
switch. Is the problem
corrected?
Relay (RY1), Front 6 Try replacing the relay or the YES End.
door switch door switch. Is the problem
corrected?
DC controller PCB 7 Try replacing the DC con- YES Replace the DC controller
troller PCB. Is the problem PCB.
corrected?
T12-100-04
4) E004 (The triac has a short circuit.)

Fixing heater 2 Does the fixing heater operate NO See “The fixing heater fails
immediately after the power is to turn on.” If E000 or E002
turned? is indicated at this time, see
the descriptions of the
respective code. If E004 is
indicated once again, go to
step 3.
Wiring 3 Is there a fault in the wiring YES Correct the wiring.
between the AC driver PCB,
phase control PCB, DC driver
PCB, relay (RY2), and DC
controller PCB?
Triac 4 Is there a short circuit between YES Replace the AC driver PCB.
(TR1) J104-3 and J-14-2?
corrected?
Phase control PCB 7 Try replacing the phase control YES Replace the phase control
PCB. Is the problem corrected? PCB.
T12-100-05
AC driver PCB
1
J105
4
TR1 8
ST1
Triac 1 CN101 Low-voltage
5
Main power supply
switch 3
1 CN104 (DCP1) CN105 1 3 5 8 J213B
3 2 1 J104 N line 2 1
8 1
GND
+24VB
TR1_ERR
F_LAMP1
H line
Sheet detection
4 2
3 1
circuit 1 J28
J214B
2 ZEROCR Phase control PCB
Disconnect the J104
ZEROCR_IN
TR1_ERR
TR2_ERR
1 GND
F_LAMP1
F_LAMP2
connector; if a short
Check for
+24VB
circuit exists between Between CN101-1 disconnected
GND
1 +5V
GND
J104-3 and -2, NG and -3, about connector
-6
2 GND
-4
-2
230 VAC
DS1
J211B 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 1 J212
Front door
-5
-3
-1
Main switch Between J62-1

N line and -3, several Ω
H line Between J62-1
and -4, several Ω
RY1 ON
COM
Between TB7
Between CN1-3 and and TB8,
about 0 Ω.
CN1-1, about 230 VAC Fixing assembly
-1A
-2A
1 3
DS3
4 J62
Left door TB 7 TB 5 TB 6
-2B
-1B
Thermal
CN1 switch
3 5 1 Low-voltage Main TB 1 TB 3
TS1 heater
FG
J27 1
N
power supply J27 H1

(DCP2) 3
+24VB
+24VB
+24VB
+24VB
TB 8 TB 9 TB 2 TB 4
-1A
-2A
DS2
Thermistor 1 Thermistor 2
1 2 3 5
CN2 Check for a
Right door Check for a
-1B
-2B
TH1 disconnected TH2 disconnected

connector connector
J62B-2
J62B-4
J62A-1
J62A-3
J27 2 4
4 2 RY2 G
J62
J62A-1
J62B-1
1
J62A-3
J62B-3
5 3 6
4 2 RY3
1
Between 1 Between 1
F_TEMP1
F_TEMP2
and 3, about and 3, about

RDR_OP
6
LDR_OP
5 3 1054 to 1603KΩ 1054 to 1603KΩ

DS2-1A
DS3-1B
RY1-A
RY1-B
DS1-5
DS1-6
RY3-6
RY3-1
RY2-6
RY2-1
+24VB
+24VB
+24VB
+24VB
+24VB
11 8 10 7 6 4 3 1 2 3 4 3 2 1 10 11 12 13 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 10
F_LAMP1
J560-B
F_LAMP2
J219
TR2_ERR
J554
GND
TR1_ERR
ZEROCR_IN
J204-B J555
+24VB
Motor driver PCB
DC driver PCB
Feed motor
Main motor
The output
of RY2/RY3 DC controller PCB
must be about
+24 VDC.
DC driver PCB
Loads
E000, E001, E002, E003, E004 (230-V model)
F12-100-01
5) E010 (The main motor has a fault.)

Door switch 1 Are all the door switches NO Correct the faulty door
normal? switch.
Harness, Wiring 2 Is there a fault (disconnected YES Correct the wiring.
connector, trapped wire)
around the main motor?
Main motor 3 Is J209-B6 (MAMTR_LD) on NO Replace the main motor.
the DC controller PCB ‘0 VDC’ (However, this applies only
while the main motor is when J209-B7 is ‘0 VDC’.)
rotating?
DC controller PCB 4 Is the output of J209-B7 NO Replace the DC controller
(MAMTR) on the DC control- PCB.
ler PCB ‘0 VDC’ during
rotation? (Normal if the output
is 0 V during rotation.)
DC relay PCB 5 Is the electrical continuity be- NO Replace the relay PCB.
ween the following connectors
normal?
• J904-3 and J209-B8
• J904-4 and J209-B7
• J904-5 and J209-B6
Low-voltage power 6 Is there a 24 VDC output NO Replace the low voltage
supply between U2-CN2-5 and power supply (single
(single output) U2-CN3-3 on the DC power output).
supply PCB? (However, this applies only
when there is no trapping
over the entire length of the
U2-CN2 line.)
T12-100-06
6) E014 (The feed motor has a fault.)

Door switch 1 Are all door switches normal? NO Correct the faulty door
switch.
Connector 2 Is J209 on the DC controller YES Correct the connection.
PCB disconnected? Or, does
the relay connector J162 or J56
has a faulty connection?
DC controller PCB 3 Try replacing the DC controller YES Replace the DC controller.
Feed motor 4 Does J209-B3 (PEMTR-LD) NO Replace the feed motor.
change from about 5 VDC to (However, this applies only
about 0 VDC while the main if J209-B2 is ‘0 VDC’.)
motor is rotating?
Low-voltage power 5 Is the voltage between NO Replaced the low-voltage
supply U2-CN2-1 and U2-CN2-3 on power supply (single
(single output) the DC power supply PCB output). (However, this
24 VDC? applies only when there is
no trapping over the entire
length of the U2-CN2 line.)
Harness 6 Is the electrical continuity NO Replace the harness.
DC controller PCB across the harness between the YES Replace the DC controller
feed motor and the DC con- PCB.
troller PCB normal?
• between J209-B1 and
CN601-1
CN601-2
CN601-3
T12-100-07
7) E021 (The developing assembly contact has a fault.)

switch.
Process unit 2 Mount the process unit making YES End.
sure to insert it fully to the rear.
Developing assemb- 3 Is the operation of the sensor NO Replace the sensor.
ly push-on sensor normal?
Developing 4 Does the slit plate attached to NO Correct the mounting so
assembly push-on the developing assembly lock- that the slit plate attached
motor ing shaft (inside the process to the developing assembly
unit) operate? Turn on the locking shaft inside the
developing assembly push-on process unit operates
motor in service mode to normally.
check. YES Go to step 3.
Wiring 5 Is the wiring between the YES End.
(developing developing assembly push-on
assembly push-on motor, DC driver PCB, and DC
motor) controller PCB normal?
Fuse 6 Is there electrical continuity NO Replace the DC driver PCB.
(DC driver PCB) for F552 on the DC driver
PCB?
Developing 7 Does the developing assembly NO Replace the developing
assembly push-on push-on motor operate when assembly push-on motor.
motor the main switch is turned on?
DC controller PCB 8 Is J553-9 on the DC driver NO Replace the DC controller
PCB ‘0 VDC’? PCB.
T12-100-08
Inside Developing
the process assembly
unit push-on
sensor
PH30
J58 3 2 1
Developing
M10
J93
10 11 12 assembly
M push-on motor
In home position,
During During
‘0 VDC’. J70 2 1
rotation, rotation,
about 24 VDC. about 0 VDC
DPMTR+
DPMTR-
DP_HP
GND
+5V
10 11 12 8 9
J210-A J553
DC controller PCB DC driver PCB

J210 J551
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5
+24VA
+24VB
RY2
+24VA
+12V
GND
GND
+5V
6 8 1 5 8
CN104 CN3
Low-voltage Low-voltage
power supply (DCP1) power supply (DCP2)
CN102 4
E021
F12-100-02
8) E030 (The copy counter has a fault.)

1 Check the wiring and the YES End.
connector for connection, and
turn off and then on the main
power. Is the problem
corrected?
Counter 1, 2 Turn off the main power NO Replace the counter.
Counter 2 switch, and disconnect the
DC controller PCB connector (J185, J186) of the YES Replace the DC controller
counter. Is the resistance on PCB.
both terminals of the counter
about 525 Ω?
T12-100-09
Low-voltage power Low-voltage power

supply (DCP2) supply (DCP1)
CN3 CN104
2 3 6 8 1
RY3
Feed motor
GND
+24V
M3 M1
1 2 J162 M
M
CN601 CN501
During motor 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5
rotation, ‘0 VDC’.
During
MATR_LD
motor
+24VB
MATR
rotation,
GND
+5V
‘0 VDC’
J904 1 2 3 4 5
1
2
3
4
5
J56 Relay PCB

5
4
3
2
1
J901
1 2 3 J902 2 3
GND
PEMTRCLK
PEMTR_LD
RY2
MATR-LD
+24VB
PEMTR
MATR
GND
+5V
+5V
1 2 3 4 5 8 7 6 1 2 3 4
J209-B J209-B J201
DC controller PCB
J202-B
3 4 5 6
+24VA
4 CPY_CNT1
+24VA
2 CPY_CNT2
1
3
J174
4
3
2
1
2
1
2
1
J185 J186
Between 1 and 3, Between 1 and 2,

about 525 Ω. CNT1 CNT2 about 525 Ω.
E010,E014,E030
F12-100-03
9) E041 (the lifter motor has a fault.)

switch.
Connector 2 Is any of the following con- YES Connect the disconnected
nectors disconnected: J559, connectors.
J154, J552 through J213?
Cassette paper level 3 Check the sensors PS13 NO Replace the cassette paper
sensor through PS16 according to the level sensor.
instructions given on how to
check photointerrupters in
Chapter 14.
Fuse (on DC driver 4 Is the fuse (F552) on the DC NO Replace the DC driver PCB.
PCB) driver PCB normal? At this time, check to make
sure that the line (J551-2,
+24VB) is not trapped.
DC driver PCB 5 Replace the DC driver PCB. YES Replace the DC driver PCB.
Cassette liftup 6 Replace the cassette liftup YES Replace the liftup motor.
motor motor. Is the problem
corrected?
DC controller PCB 7 Replace the DC controller YES Replace the DC controller
T12-100-10
10) E060 (The wire cleaning mechanism has a fault.)

Wire cleaning 1 Try replacing the wire cleaning YES Replace the wire cleaning
motor (M2) motor (M2). Is the problem motor (M2).
corrected?
Harness 2 Is there a fault in the harness YES Correct the connection of
between the wire cleaning the harness or replace the
motor (M2) and J553 on the harness as necessary.
DC driver PCB?
Harness 3 Is there a fault in the harness YES Correct the connection of
between J552 on the DC driver the harness or replace the
PCB and J213 on the DC harness as necessary.
controller PCB?
DC driver PCB 5 Try replacing the DC controller YES Replace the DC controller
T12-100-11
11) E067 (The primary charging assembly output has a fault.)

E068 (The separation charging assembly output has a fault.)
E069 (The transfer charging assembly output has a fault.)

Contact 1 Are the points of contact NO Clean or correct the faulty
between each assembly in contacts.
correct contact?
High-voltage cable 2 Try replacing the high-voltage YES Replace the high-voltage
cable. Is the problem corrected? cable.
Harness 3 Is there trapping or connector YES Correct the connection.
disconnection in the harness
around the high-voltage power
supply unit?
DC controller PCB 4 Try replacing the DC controller YES Replace the DC controller
Low-voltage power 5 Is the voltage between NO Replace the low-voltage
supply (single U2-CN2-3 and U2-CN3-1 of power supply.
output), DCP2 the DC power supply (single (However, no length of the
output) +24 VDC? U2-CN2 line must be
trapped.)
T12-100-12
10kΩ
10kΩ
OUT4
OUT2
OUT1
HV2 HV3 HV1

CN301 CN302 CN303
1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 4 3 2 1
When the bias is

positive, ‘0 VDC’.
At time of output,
‘0 VDC’.
1
2
3
In the event of
4
an error, ‘0 VDC’. J38 There must be
4
3
2
1
At time of output,
no wire trapping.
‘0 VDC’.
BNLANLG
TR_ANLG
DBIASST
HV_SER
HV_XFR
SEP_ST
HV1_ST
BIASCH
+24VB
D_BIAS
TR_ST
GND
GND
HV1
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4
RY3 J210-B J211
DC controller PCB
GND
1
CN3
Low-voltage
power supply
E067, E068, E069
F12-100-04
12) E199 (The CPLD configuration is faulty.)

CPLD 1 Is the CPLD correctly inserted NO Correct the insertion.
into U715 on the DC controller
PCB?
DC controller PCB 2 Try replacing the DC controller YES Replace the DC controller
T12-100-13
13) E210 (The scanner motor has a fault.)

1 Is the scanner at its home NO See “The scanner fails to
position when E201 is move forward/in reverse.”
indicated?
Scanner home posi- 2 Is 3.3 VDC present at CN1-23 NO Check the wiring from the
tion sensor (PS44) on the scanner control PCB scanner control PCB
when the scanner is at PS44? (CN1-23) to PS44; if
normal, replace PS44.
3 Clean the light-receiving rear NO Check the wiring from the
of the sensor. Is the problem scanner control PCB
corrected? (CN1-23) to PS44; if
normal, replace PS44.
Wiring 4 Is there a fault in the wiring YES Correct the connection.
from CN1 on the scanner
control PCB to the scanner
motor (M11)?
Scanner motor 5 Try replacing the scanner YES Check the harness for
(M11) motor (M11). Is the problem electrical continuity; if
corrected? normal, replace the scanner
motor (M11).
Scanner control NO Replace the scanner control
PCB PCB.
T12-100-14
14) E222 (The scanning lamp heater has a fault.)

E225 (The scanning lamp has an inadequate intensity.)
E226 (The scanner cooling fan has a fault./The scanning lamp has a fault.)

1 Turn off and then on the main YES End.
corrected?
Connector 2 Is the connector of the fan NO Correct the connection.
(FM4) connected properly?
Scanner control 3 Is the output voltage of the YES Replace the fan.
PCB cooling fan rotation detection signal of the
fan about 0 VDC when the fan
is rotating?
Scanner control 4 Try replacing the scanner YES Replace the scanner control
PCB control PCB. Is the problem PCB.
corrected?
corrected?
6 Press the Start key. Does the NO See “The scanning lamp
scanning lamp go on? fails to turn on.”
7 Execute the following in NO See “The scanning lamp
service mode: fails to turn on.”
FUNCTION>MISC-R>
SCANNLAMP. Does the
scanner lamp turn on?
Scanning lamp 8 Have both ends of the scan- YES Replace the scanning lamp.
(intensity) ning lamp turned black?
Connector 9 Is the connection of the YES Correct the connection.
following connectors proper?
CN1, relay connector J810 on
the scanner control PCB;
CN1A, CN2A, CN3A of the
inverter power supply; CAN,
CNB, CNC, CND in the carrier
relay circuit; CNE, CNF, CNG,
CNH in the lamp relay PCB;
CNJ, CNK, CNL, CNM on
the lamp relay PCB
T12-100-15

Flat cable connector 10 Is the locking of the flat cable YES Correct the locking.
(locking) connector J805 of the sensor
unit and the flat cable con-
nectors CN3 and CN4 on the
scanner control PCB normal?
Lamp heater 11 Try replacing the lamp heater YES End.
connected to CNL on the lamp
relay PCB. Is the problem
corrected?
Lamp heater 12 Try replacing the lamp heater YES End.
connected to CNM on the
problem corrected?
Lamp socket 13 Try replacing the lamp heater YES End.
connected to CNK on the lamp
relay PCB 1. Is the problem
corrected?
Lamp socket 14 Try replacing the lamp heater YES End.
connected to CNG on the
problem corrected?
corrected?
Lamp harness 16 Try replacing the lamp harness YES End.
connecting CNJ on the lamp
relay PCB 2 and CNH on the
problem corrected?
corrected?
cable connecting CNF on the
lamp relay PCB 1 and CND
connecting CNE on the lamp
relay PCB 2 and CNC on the
carrier relay PCB. Is the
problem corrected?
T12-100-16

Carrier relay PCB 20 Try replacing the carrier relay YES End.
INVOUT harness 21 Try replacing the INVOUT YES End.
harness connecting CNB on
the carrier relay PCB and
supply. Is the problem
corrected?
Inverter power 22 Try replacing the inverter YES End.
supply power supply. Is the problem
corrected?
INV/MT harness 23 Try replacing the INV/MT YES End.
harness connecting CN1A and
supply and the relay connector
J810. Is the problem corrected?
JNT harness 24 Try replacing the JNT harness YES End.
connecting the relay connector
J810, CAN on the carrier relay
PCB, CN1 on the scanner
control PCB, an others. Is the
problem corrected?
Sensor unit 25 Try replacing the sensor unit. YES End.
Scanner control Is the problem corrected? NO Replace the scanner control
PCB PCB.
T12-100-17
15) E248 (The scanner communication has a fault.)

Harness 1 Is the harness between J223 NO Correct the connection.
on the DC controller PCB and
CN13 on the scanner
controller PCB connected
correctly?
DC controller PCB 2 Try replacing the DC YES Replace the DC controller
controller PCB. Is the problem PCB.
corrected?
Scanner control 3 Try replacing the scanner YES Replace the scanner
PCB controller PCB. Is the problem controller PCB.
corrected?
T12-100-18
16) E305 (The memory is inserted wrongly.)

Memory 1 Is CN4 on the image process- YES Relocate the memory to
ing PCB empty while CN5 CN4.
has an expansion memory?
Memory 2 Is the expansion memory NO Correct the insertion of the
correctly inserted to CN4 on expansion memory.
the image processing PCB?
Image processing 3 Try replacing the image pro- YES Replace the image process-
PCB cessing PCB. Is the problem ing PCB.
corrected?
T12-100-19
17) E400 (The DADF communication has a fault.)

E403 (The DADF feed motor has a fault.)
E404 (The DADF pickup motor has a fault.)
E405 (The DADF delivery motor has a fault.)
E411 (The DADF sensor error has a fault.)

corrected?
Cable 2 Disconnect and then connect YES Correct the connection.
the cable between the machine
and the accessory. Is the
problem corrected?
Cable (electrical 3 Is the electrical continuity of NO Replace the cable.
continuity) the cable normal?
corrected? NO See the DADF Service
Manual.
T12-100-20
18) E530 (The sorter alignment motor has a fault.)

E531 (The sorter staple slide motor has a fault.)
E540 (The sorter shift motor has a fault.)
E713 (The sorter communication has a fault.)

corrected?
Cable (connection) 2 Disconnect and then connect YES Correct the connection.
the cable between the machine
and the accessory. Is the
problem corrected?
Cable (electrical 3 Is the electrical continuity of NO Replace the cable.
continuity) the cable normal?
DC controller PCB 4 Try replacing the DC con- YES Replace the controller
corrected? NO See the Sorter Service
Manual.
T12-100-21
19) E717 (The copy data controller communication has a fault.)

corrected?
Connector 2 Is the wiring of the harness NO Correct the wiring.
(connection) between the DC controller
PCB and the copy data con-
troller normal?
Harness (electrical 3 Is there electrical continuity NO Replace the harness.
continuity) on the harness between J09 on
the DC controller PCB and
the copy data controller?
Copy data 4 Try replacing the copy data YES End.
controller controller. Is the problem
DC controller PCB corrected? NO Replace the DC controller
PCB.
T12-100-22
20) E800 (The power switch-off signal has an open circuit.)

Harness 1 Is there a fault on the harness YES Correct the connection of
between the main power the harness or replace the
switch (SW1) and J202 on the harness.
DC controller PCB?
Main power supply 2 Try replacing the main power YES Replace the main power
switch (SW1) switch (SW1). Is the problem switch (SW1).
corrected?
DC controller PCB 3 Try replacing the DC con- YES Replace the controller PCB.
troller PCB. Is the problem
corrected?
T12-100-23
21) E804 (The DC power supply fan has a fault.)

corrected?
Connector 2 Is the connection of the con- NO Correct the connection.
(connection) nector for the fan (FM1)
proper?
DC controller PCB 3 Is the output for the rotation NO Replace the DC controller
detention signal about 24 VDC PCB.
DC power supply when the fan is rotating? YES Replace the DC controller
fan PCB.
T12-100-24
22) E805-0001 (The separation blower has a fault.)

E805-0002 (The exhaust fan has a fault.)
E805-0003 (The delivery/feeding assembly fan has a fault.)

corrected?
Connector 2 Is the connection of the con- NO Correct the connection.
(connection) nector of the fan in question
(FM2, FM3, BL1) indicated
by the error code proper?
Fan 3 Is the output for the rotation YES Replace the fan.
detection signal abut 0 VDC
when the fan is rotating?
DC driver PCB 4 Try repacking the DC driver YES Replace the DC driver PCB.
corrected?
T12-100-25
Notation Constan t rotation signal Jack

FM2 EXFM_ST J560-B7
FM3 PEXFM_ST J560-B4
BL1 SEPBLWST J560-A3
T12-100-26
23) E815 (The developing assembly has a connection fault.)

Developing 1 Is the developing assembly NO Mount the developing
assembly mounted? assembly.
Connector 2 Is the connector J65 of the NO Correct the connection.
developing assembly con-
nected correctly?
Shorting harness 3 Are pins 4 and 5 of the J65 NO Connect the shorting
connector connected by a harness to J65.
shorting harness?
Connector 4 Is the connection of the con- NO Correct the connection of
nector J210 on the DC J210.
controller PCB proper?
Connector 5 Is the connector J93 connected NO Correct the connection of
correctly? J93.
Harness 6 Is the harness between J65-93 NO Replace the harness.
and J93-J210 correct?
corrected?
Developing 8 Try repacking the developing YES Replace the developing
assembly assembly. Is the problem assembly.
corrected?
T12-100-27
APPENDIX
1 General Timing Chart
A4, Plain paper, Direct, Copyboard, 1 Copy, Cassette 2, Center Tray

Main motor (M1)

Feed motor (M3)
Scanner motor (M11)
Lamp 1/2 (FL1/FL2)
Paper entry sensor (PS2)
LED exposure
Inside tray delivery sensor 1 (PS6)
Inside tray delivery sensor 2 (PS7)
Exhaust fan (FM2)
Delivery/feeding assembly cooing fan (FM3)
Scanner control PCB cooing fan (FM4)
COPYRIGHT© 2000 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR75W REV.0 OCT. 2000 A-1
2 List of Signals
SLCT_0 PRINT PARAMETER DATA SELECT signal 0 P_CHK2 VERTICAL FEED 2 DETECTION signal FEED_CL3 CASSETTE PICKUP CLUTCH 3 CS_DGT1 CASSETTE SIZE DIGIT signal 1
SLCT_1 PRINT PARAMETER DATA SELECT signal 1 P_CHK3 VERTICAL FEED 3 DETECTION signal CONTROL signal (cassette holder 3) CS_DGT2 CASSETTE SIZE DIGIT signal 2
SLCT_2 PRINT PARAMETER DATA SELECT signal 2 P_CHK4 VERTICAL FEED 4 DETECTION signal FEED_CL4 CASSETTE PICKUP CLUTCH 4 CS_DGT3 CASSETTE SIZE DIGIT signal 3
SLCT_3 PRINT PARAMETER DATA SELECT signal 3 P_ENT2 PAPER ENTRY DETECTION signal 2 (outside) CONTROL signal (cassette holder 4) CS_DGT4 CASSETTE SIZE DIGIT signal 4
SLCT_4 PRINT PARAMETER DATA SELECT signal 4 P_SEPR1 SEPARATION DETECTION signal 1 REV_SL1 REVERSING ROLLER UP SOLENOID 1 CS_DGT5 CASSETTE SIZE DIGIT signal 5
SLCT_WE SELECT WRITE ENABLE signal F_EXIT FIXING OUTLET DETECTION signal CONTROL signal (cassette holder 1) S_LED SEPARATION SENSOR 2 LED CONTROL signal
BUS_DIR0 DATA BUS CONTROL signal I_EXIT2 INSIDE TRAY DELIVERY DETECTION signal 2 CR_SL COUNTER ROLLER CONTROL signal DISP_DT0 DISPLAY DATA 0
SCANNER EXTERNAL DEVICE CONNECTION SELECT signal 0_EXIT DELIVERY DETECTION signal (side tray, sorter) (duplex cassette) DISP_DT1 DISPLAY DATA 1
IPRDY_I. PRINTER READY signal MP_ENT MULTI RIGHT FEEDER PAPER DETECTION signal REV_SL2 REVERSING ROLLER UP SOLENOID 2 DISP_DT2 DISPLAY DATA 2
IPREQ_I. PRINTER REQUEST signal I_EXIT1 INSIDE TRAY DELIVERY DETECTION signal 1 CONTROL signal (cassette holder 2) DISP_DT3 DISPLAY DATA 3
IBUSY_II. DATA OUTPUT BUSY signal BSP_ENT DUPLEX INLET PAPER DETECTION signal REV_SL3 REVERSING ROLLER UP SOLENOID 3 DISP_DT4 DISPLAY DATA 4
PAGEBL_I. PRINT REQUEST signal BSP_END PAPER END DETECTION signal (duplex unit) CONTROL signal (cassette holder 3) DISP_DT5 DISPLAY DATA 5
TEST_II TEST PATTERN PRINT signal BSP_STY STATIONARY PAPER DETECTION signal (duplex unit) REV_SL4 REVERSING ROLLER UP SOLENOID 4 DISP_DT6 DISPLAY DATA 6
BUS_DIR1 DATA BUS SWITCH signal BS_ST DUPLEX UNIT SET signal CONTROL signal (cassette holder 4) DISP_DT7 DISPLAY DATA 7
CMD_DATA0 COMMAND DATA BUS 0 signal SW_DT (INDICATION PCB SWITCH DATA signal) FEED_CL5 INTERMEDIATE CLUTCH CONTROL signal
CMD_DATA1 COMMAND DATA BUS 1 signal ZEROCR ZERO-CROSS DETECTION signal MFUP_SL1 MULTIFEEDER PICKUP ROLLER DOWN CPU_DQ0 DATA BUS 0
CMD_DATA2 COMMAND DATA BUS 2 signal ITP_FULL INSIDE TRAY PAPER FULL DETECTION signal SOLENOID CONTROL signal CPU_DQ1 DATA BUS 1
CMD_DATA3 COMMAND DATA BUS 3 signal DPCFM_ST DC POWER SUPPLY COOLING FAN ON MFFEDCL MULTIFEEDER PICKUP CLUTCH CONTROL signal CPU_DQ2 DATA BUS 2
CMD_DATA4 COMMAND DATA BUS 4 signal DETECTION signal CFED_CL CASSETTE PICKUP CLUTCH CONTROL signal CPU_DQ3 DATA BUS 3
CMD_DATA5 COMMAND DATA BUS 5 signal EXFM_ST PFMTR FEEDER MOTOR CONTROL signal CPU_DQ4 DATA BUS 4
CMD_DATA6 COMMAND DATA BUS 6 signal SPBLWST SEPARATION BLOWER ON DETECTION signal MAMTR MAIN MOTOR CONTROL signal CPU_DQ5 DATA BUS 5
CMD_DATA7 COMMAND DATA BUS 7 signal PEXFM_ST DELIVERY FEED ASSEMBLY COOLING FAN WCMTR WIRE CLEANER MOTOR CONTROL signal CPU_DQ6 DATA BUS 6
ON DETECTION signal WCMTR_DIR WIRE CLEANER MOTOR REVERSE signal CPU_DQ7 DATA BUS 7
CMD_STB COMMAND STROBE signal DP_HP DEVELOPING ASSEMBLY PUSH-ON AN_SEL0 ANALOG INPUT SELECT 0 (74HC4051 A) PNLDON LCD BACK-LIGHT CONTROL signal
SCN_REQ DOCUMENT SCAN REQUEST signal DETECTION signal AN_SEL1 ANALOG INPUT SELECT 1 (74HC4051 B) CPY_CNT1 COUNTER 1 CONTROL signal
DATA_REQ IMAGE DATA REQUEST signal LDR_OP LEFT COVER OPEN/CLOSED DETECTION signal AN_SEL2 ANALOG INPUT SELECT 2 (74HC4051 C) CPY_CNT2 COUNTER 2 CONTROL signal
STOP SCAN STOP signal RDR_OP RIGHT COVER OPEN/CLOSED DETECTION signal EXFM EXHAUST FAN CONTROL signal S1 SWITCH 1 CONTROL signal
RY1 RELAY 1 CONTROL signal SEP_BLW SEPARATION BLOWER CONTROL signal BSMTR_DIR DUPLEX FEED MOTOR REVERSAL CONTROL signal
IPCUT_I. PAPER CUT REQUEST signal MAMTR_LD MAIN MOTOR SYNC signal HOP_MTR TONER SUPPLY MOTOR CONTROL signal BSMTR_OE DUPLEX FEED MOTOR HOLD OFF CONTROL signal
IPRNT_I. PRINT REQUEST signal PFMTR_LD PAPER FEED MOTOR SYNC signal PE_SL1 DELIVERY DIRECTION SWITCH SOLENOID 1 A_CNT ASSIST2 COUNT signal
IMG_PSYNC SUB SCANNING SYNC signal WCMTR_0C WIRE CLEANING MOTOR OVERCURRENT CONTROL signal (side tray) CCV_CNT CCV COUNT signal
DATA_RDY PAGE MEMORY READY signal DETECTION signal PE_SL2 DELIVERY DIRECTION SWITCH SOLENOID 2
SCAN_BSY SCAN BUSY signal DEV_TNR1 DEVELOPING ASSEMBLY TONER DETECTION signal CONTROL (duplex unit) F_TEMP1 FIXING ASSEMBLY TEMPERATURE DETECTION
READY SCANNER READY signal HV1_ST PRIMARY CHARGING OUTPUT DETECTION signal HV1 PRIMARY CHARGING CONTROL signal signal 1 (temperature control)
FDR_OP FRONT DOOR OPEN/CLOSED DETECTION signal TR_ST TRANSFER CHARGING OUTPUT DETECTION signal HV_XFR TRANSFER CHARGING CONTROL signal F_TEMP2 FIXING ASSEMBLY TEMPERATURE DETECTION
S1_ST POWER SWITCH RESET signal SEP_ST SEPARATION CHARGING OUTPUT DETECTION signal D_BIAS DEVELOPING ASSEMBLY BIAS CONTROL signal signal 2 (overheating detection)
STD_DATA0 STATUS DATA BUS 0 DBIASST DEVELOPING BIAS OUTPUT DETECTION signal BAISCH DEVELOPING ASSEMBLY BIAS POLARITY MP_SZDT MANUAL FEED PAPER WIDTH SIZE ANALOG
STD_DATA1 STATUS DATA BUS 1 CPY_CNT1 COUNTER 1 DETECTION signal SWITCH CONTROL signal VOLTAGE
STD_DATA2 STATUS DATA BUS 2 CPY_CNT2 COUNTER 2 DETECTION signal HV_SEP SEPARATION CHARGING CONTROL signal P_SEPR2 SEPARATION DETECTION SIGNAL 2 ANALOG
STD_DATA3 STATUS DATA BUS 3 TR1_ERR TRANSFER 1 SHORT CIRCUIT DETECTION signal E_LAMP PRE-EXPOSURE LAMP CONTROL signal VOLTAGE
STD_DATA4 STATUS DATA BUS 4 TR2_ERR TRANSFER 2 SHORT CIRCUIT DETECTION signal PEX_FM DELIVERY FEEDING ASSEMBLY COOLING TEMP MACHINE INSIDE TEMPERATURE DETECTION signal
STD_DATA5 STATUS DATA BUS 5 FU_ST FIXING ASSEMBLY DETECTION signal FAN CONTROL signal
STD_DATA6 STATUS DATA BUS 6 TB_ST TONER BOTTLE DETECTION signal GATE2 µPD71054 GATE2 STS_STB STATUS STROBE signal
STD_DATA7 STATUS DATA BUS 7 ADF_ST ADF SET signal LMTR1_A LIFT MOTOR 1 CW ROTATION CONTROL COMSTB_L COMMAND RECEPTION signal
C_SZDT0 CASSETTE PAPER SIZE DETECTION signal 0 CCV_EN CCV ENABLE signal SIGNAL (cassette holder 1) P_ENT1 PAPER ENTRY DETECTION signal 1 (inside)
C_SZDT1 CASSETTE PAPER SIZE DETECTION signal 1 DP_MTR DEVELOPING ASSEMBLY PUSH-ON MOTOR LMTR2_A LIFT MOTOR 2 CW ROTATION CONTROL P_CHK1 DETECTION signal
C_SZDT2 CASSETTE PAPER SIZE DETECTION signal 2 CONTROL signal signal (cassette holder 2) PFMTRCLK PICKUP FEED MOTOR CLOCK
C_SZDT3 CASSETTE PAPER SIZE DETECTION signal 3 DP_CHG RELEASE POWER SUPPLY CHG CONTROL signal LMTR3_A LIFT MOTOR 3 CW ROTATION CONTROL BSMTRCLK DUPLEX FEED MOTOR CLOCK
P_LVL1 CASSETTE 1 PAPER LEVEL DETECTION signal (for developing assembly push-on motor) signal (cassette holder 3)
P_LVL2 CASSETTE 2 PAPER LEVEL DETECTION signal F_LAMP1 FIXING ASSEMBLY HEATER 1 CONTROL signal LMTR4_A LIFT MOTOR 4 CW ROTATION CONTROL
P_LVL3 CASSETTE 3 PAPER LEVEL DETECTION signal F_LAMP2 FIXING ASSEMBLY HEATER 2 CONTROL signal signal (cassette holder 4)
P_LVL4 CASSETTE 4 PAPER LEVEL DETECTION signal DEHUM DEHUMIDIFYING HEATER CONTROL signal LMTR1_B LIFT MOTOR 1 CCW ROTATION CONTROL
C1_PL1 CASSETTE 1 REMAINING PAPER LEVEL STR/STP HD64610 STR/STEP signal (cassette holder 1)
DETECTION signal 1 WD WATCHDOG LMTR2_B LIFT MOTOR 2 CCW ROTATION CONTROL
C1_PL2 CASSETTE 1 REMAINING PAPER LEVEL signal (cassette holder 2)
DETECTION signal 2 TR_LAMP TRANSFER AUXILIARY LAMP CONTROL signal LMTR3_B LIFT MOTOR 3 CCW ROTATION CONTROL
C2_PL1 CASSETTE 2 REMAINING PAPER LEVEL PKUP_SL1 PICKUP ROLLER DOWN SOLENOID 1 signal (cassette holder 3)
DETECTION signal 1 CONTROL signal (cassette holder 1) LMTR4_B LIFT MOTOR 4 CCW ROTATION CONTROL
C2_PL2 CASSETTE 2 REMAINING PAPER LEVEL PKUP_SL2 PICKUP ROLLER DOWN SOLENOID 2 signal (cassette holder 4)
DETECTION signal 2 CONTROL signal (cassette holder 2) C3_PL1 CASSETTE 3 REMAINING PAPER LEVEL
P_EMP1 CASSETTE 1 PAPER ABSENT DETECTION signal PKUP_SL3 PICKUP ROLLER DOWN SOLENOID 3 DETECTION signal 1
P_EMP2 CASSETTE 2 PAPER ABSENT DETECTION signal CONTROL signal (cassette holder 3) C3_PL2 CASSETTE 3 REMAINING PAPER LEVEL
P_EMP3 CASSETTE 3 PAPER ABSENT DETECTION signal PKUP_SL4 PICKUP ROLLER DOWN SOLENOID 4 DETECTION signal 2
P_EMP4 CASSETTE 4 PAPER ABSENT DETECTION signal CONTROL signal (cassette holder 4) C4_PL1 CASSETTE 4 REMAINING PAPER LEVEL
CPF_CHK1 CASSETTE 1 PICKUP DETECTION signal FEED_CL1 CASSETTE PICKUP CLUTCH 1 DETECTION signal 1
CPF_CHK2 CASSETTE 2 PICKUP DETECTION signal CONTROL signal (cassette holder 1) C4_PL2 CASSETTE 4 REMAINING PAPER LEVEL
CPF_CHK3 CASSETTE 3 PICKUP DETECTION signal FEED_CL2 CASSETTE PICKUP CLUTCH 2 DETECTION signal 2
CPF_CHK4 CASSETTE 4 PICKUP DETECTION signal CONTROL signal (cassette holder 2) CS_DGT0 CASSETTE SIZE DIGIT signal 0
P_CHK1 VERTICAL FEED 1 DETECTION signal
A-2 COPYRIGHT© 2000 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR75W REV.0 OCT. 2000
3 General Circuit Diagram
SCANNER GENERAL
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
APPENDIX
4 Special Tools
You will need the following special tools in addition to the standard tools set:
No. Tool name Tool No. Configuration Rank Remarks

1 Digital multimeter FY9-2002-000 A For making
electrical checks.
2 Door switch TKN-0093 A
3 Mirror positioning FY9-3050-000 B For adjusting No. 1

tool mirror base/No. 2
(rear)
(front) mirror base.
4 NA-3 FY9-9196-000 A For adjusting and

Test Sheet checking images.
TA-400-01
APPENDIX
No. Tool name Tool No. Configuration Rank Remarks

5 Grip FB3-9037-000 B For installing the
machine.
6 Pulley clip FY9-3049-000 C For adjusting the

tension of the
scanner cable.
7 Meter extension FY9-3038-000 A For extending the

pin meter during
electrical checks.
8 Meter extension FY9-3039-000 A For extending the

pin (L-tipped) meter during
electrical checks.
TA-400-02
APPENDIX
5 Solvents/Oils
No. Name Uses Composition Remarks

1 Alcohol Cleaning: Fluorine family • Do not bring near fire.
e.g., glass, plastic, hydrocarbon, Alcohol, • Procure locally.
rubber; external Surface activating • IPA (isopropyl alcohol)
covers. agent, Water may be substituted.
2 Solvent Cleaning: Fluorine family hydro- • Procure locally
e.g., metal; removing carbon, Chlorine • MEK may be
oil and toner. family hydrocarbon, substituted.
Alcohol
3 Heat-resisting Lubrication: Mineral oil family • Tool No.: CK-0427
grease e.g., fixing drive lithium, Soap, (500 g/can)
parts. Molybdenum disulfide
4 Lubricant Spring clutch (paraffin family)
5 Lubricant Lubrication: Mineral oil • Tool No.: CK-05

e.g., pickup assembly (paraffin family) (100 cc)
feed roller
bushing
(FS2-1005-000).
6 Lubricant Lubrication: Silicone oil • Tool No.: CK-0551
e.g., dive parts, (20 g)
friction parts.
TA-500-01
Prepared by
Office Imaging Products Technical Support Division
Office Imaging Products Quality Assurance Center
CANON INC.
Printed in Japan
REVISION 0 (OCT. 2000) (17187)
5-1, Hakusan 7-chome, Toride-shi, Ibaraki 302-8501 Japan
This publication is
printed on 100%
recycled paper.
PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 2000 2000 1000AB0.60-0

Ir75w SM

Enviado por

Dados do documento

Título original

Direitos autorais

Formatos disponíveis

Compartilhar este documento

Compartilhar ou incorporar documento

Opções de compartilhamento

Você considera este documento útil?

Este conteúdo é inapropriado?

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

Ir75w SM

Enviado por

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

iR75W

OCT. 2000 FY8-13GX-000

COPYRIGHT © 2000 CANON INC.

Indicates an item of a non-specific nature, possibly classified as Note, Caution,

Indicates an item requiring care to avoid electric shocks.

Indicates an item requiring care to avoid combustion (fire).

Indicates an item prohibiting disassembly to avoid electric shocks or problems.

Indicates an item intended to provide notes assisting the understanding of the

Indicates an item of reference assisting the understanding of the topic in ques-

Provides a description of a service mode.

Provides a description of the nature of an error indication.

LASER SHOT and TypeWing are registered trademarks of Canon Inc.

The following fonts are licensed by Bitstream Inc.:

The following fonts are trademarks of International Typeface Corporation:

2 Outline of the Manual

This manual consists of the following chapters:

Chapter 1 General Description: features, specifications, names of parts, and

This Service Manual uses the following conventions:

An iR75W Series machine may be configured as follows:

[1] Copyboard cover (option) [7] Copy Data Controller-A1 or Remote

Points to Note When Turning Off the Main Power Switch

Main power switch

Main power lamp

Pinots to Note When Connecting Pickup/Delivery Accessories

[1] for DADF-F1

CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATIONS

CHAPTER 3 ORIGINAL EXPOSURE

CHAPTER 4 IMAGE PROCESSING

CHAPTER 5 IMAGE FORMATION

2.3.7Removing the Manual Feed 2.6.2 Removing the Motor Driver

CHAPTER 8 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY CONTROLS

3.1.9 Others .............................. 11-32 5.7.1 DC controller PCB

CHAPTER 12 SELF DIAGNOSIS

The above specifications are subject to change for product improvement.

2.5 Default Ratios

2.6 Copying Speed

Reproduction iR70W/iR75W DADF in use

T01-206-01 Copying Speeds

Reproduction mode Reduction (copies/min) Enlargement (copies/min)

T01-206-02 Copying Speeds

The above specifications are subject to change for product improvement.

The orientation of paper is defined as follows:

Paper feed direction

[1] Copyboard cover (option) [6] Cassette 2

[1] Copyboard glass [6] Fixing assembly

3.2 Cross Section

[1] Feed roller 2 [28] Feed roller 2

4 Using the Machine

[1] Main power switch

4.2 Control Panel

[1] Screen contrast adjustment dial [7] Keypad

4.3 Extension Mode

4.4 List of User Modes

8. Changing the Standard Mode

15. Turning On/Off Photo Mode

Setting the Timer

5 Routine Maintenance by the User

Do not throw toner into fire to avoid explosion.

Copyboard glass Scanning lamp

2. Primary charging 3. LED image exposure

Flow of copy paper Cassette

1.1.1 Scanner Function

1.1.2 Printer Functions